NetBackup™ Snapshot

Client Administrator's Guide

UNIX, Windows, and Linux

Release 10.2
NetBackup™ Snapshot Client Administrator's Guide
Document version: 10.2

Technical Support
Technical Support maintains support centers globally. All support services will be delivered
in accordance with your support agreement and the then-current enterprise technical support
policies. For information about our support offerings and how to contact Technical Support,
visit our website:

https://www.veritas.com/support

You can manage your Veritas account information at the following URL:

https://my.veritas.com

If you have questions regarding an existing support agreement, please email the support
agreement administration team for your region as follows:

Worldwide (except Japan) [email protected]

Japan [email protected]

Documentation
The latest documentation is available on the Veritas website:

https://sort.veritas.com/documents

Documentation feedback
Your feedback is important to us. Suggest improvements or report errors or omissions to the
documentation. Include the document title, document version, chapter title, and section title
of the text on which you are reporting. Send feedback to:

[email protected]

You can also see documentation information or ask a question on the Veritas community site:

http://www.veritas.com/community/

Veritas Services and Operations Readiness Tools (SORT)

Veritas Services and Operations Readiness Tools (SORT) is a website that provides information
and tools to automate and simplify certain time-consuming administrative tasks. Depending
on the product, SORT helps you prepare for installations and upgrades, identify risks in your
datacenters, and improve operational efficiency. To see what services and tools SORT provides
for your product, see the data sheet:

https://sort.veritas.com/data/support/SORT_Data_Sheet.pdf
Legal Notice
Copyright © 2023 Veritas Technologies LLC. All rights reserved.

Veritas, the Veritas Logo, Veritas Alta, and NetBackup are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Veritas Technologies LLC or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. Other names may
be trademarks of their respective owners.

This product may contain third-party software for which Veritas is required to provide attribution
to the third party (“Third-party Programs”). Some of the Third-party Programs are available
under open source or free software licenses. The License Agreement accompanying the
Software does not alter any rights or obligations you may have under those open source or
free software licenses. Refer to the Third-party Legal Notices document accompanying this
Veritas product or available at:

https://www.veritas.com/about/legal/license-agreements

The product described in this document is distributed under licenses restricting its use, copying,
distribution, and decompilation/reverse engineering. No part of this document may be
reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Veritas Technologies
LLC and its licensors, if any.

THE DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED

CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH
DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID. Veritas Technologies LLC SHALL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION
WITH THE FURNISHING, PERFORMANCE, OR USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION. THE
INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENTATION IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE
WITHOUT NOTICE.
The Licensed Software and Documentation are deemed to be commercial computer software
as defined in FAR 12.212 and subject to restricted rights as defined in FAR Section 52.227-19
"Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights" and DFARS 227.7202, et seq.
"Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as
applicable, and any successor regulations, whether delivered by Veritas as on premises or
hosted services. Any use, modification, reproduction release, performance, display or disclosure
of the Licensed Software and Documentation by the U.S. Government shall be solely in
accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

Veritas Technologies LLC

2625 Augustine Drive
Santa Clara, CA 95054

http://www.veritas.com
 Contents

Chapter 1 Introduction .......................................................................... 14

About Snapshot Manager ............................................................... 14
About snapshot management ......................................................... 16
About snapshots .................................................................... 16
About Snapshot Manager ......................................................... 16
About snapshot methods ......................................................... 17
About snapshot providers ......................................................... 18
About off-host backup support ................................................... 18
About backup host pool ........................................................... 20
About Instant Recovery ........................................................... 20
About FlashBackup policies ...................................................... 20
About snapshot methods for disk arrays ...................................... 20
About block level incremental backup ......................................... 20
About Snapshot Manager and NDMP ......................................... 21
About snapshot basics .................................................................. 21
About the copy-on-write snapshot type ....................................... 22
About the mirror snapshot type .................................................. 22
Benefits of copy-on-write versus mirror ............................................. 23
About local backup of a snapshot .................................................... 24
Off-host backup overview ............................................................... 25
About file and volume mapping methods ..................................... 26
Off-host backup methods ............................................................... 27
About alternate client backup .................................................... 27
FlashBackup and alternate client combination example .................. 33
NetBackup media server data mover example (UNIX only) ............. 34
About the NDMP data mover .................................................... 35
Snapshot Manager requirements ..................................................... 35
Snapshot Manager restrictions .................................................. 36
Snapshot Manager terminology ....................................................... 38
Snapshot Manager assistance ........................................................ 42
About open file backups for Windows ............................................... 43

Chapter 2 Installation ........................................................................... 44

Installation prerequisites for Snapshot Manager .................................. 44

Snapshot Manager installation notes ................................................ 45
 Contents 5

About distributing Client Software in mixed-platform environments

........................................................................................... 47
About creating log directories .......................................................... 47
About the snapshot state file ........................................................... 47

Chapter 3 Policy configuration ........................................................... 49

Notes on Snapshot Manager policies ................................................ 49
Configuring a Snapshot Manager policy ............................................ 50
Backup Selections tab options when configuring a policy ...................... 53
Off-host backup configuration options .............................................. 55
Automatic snapshot selection .......................................................... 57
Selecting the snapshot method ....................................................... 58
Snapshot methods .................................................................. 60
Configuration parameters for Snapshot Manager .......................... 63
Snapshot Resources ............................................................... 69
Configuring backup scripts ............................................................. 69
About using alternate client backup .................................................. 71
Alternate client backup requirements .......................................... 71
Configuring alternate client backup .................................................. 72
Before running the alternate client backup ................................... 73
Example alternate client backup configurations ............................. 73
Policy configuration tips ................................................................. 74
Maximum pathname length ...................................................... 74
Snapshot tips ........................................................................ 75
Multiple data streams .............................................................. 75
About incremental backup of mirror-based snapshots .................... 76
About disabling snapshots ............................................................. 77
Disabling Open File Backups on Windows ................................... 77
Disabling Snapshot Manager snapshots ..................................... 78

Chapter 4 NAS snapshot configuration .......................................... 80

About NAS snapshot overview ........................................................ 80

Notes on NAS_Snapshot methods ................................................... 81
Logging on to the NetBackup Client Service as the Administrator ........... 83
Setting up a policy for NAS snapshots .............................................. 83
NAS snapshot naming scheme ....................................................... 85

Chapter 5 FlashBackup configuration ............................................. 86

About FlashBackup ....................................................................... 86

FlashBackup restrictions ................................................................ 87
Restores of Windows encrypted files and hard links ....................... 88
 Contents 6

Configuring a FlashBackup policy for NetBackup Administration

Console ............................................................................... 88
Configuring FlashBackup policy for backward compatibility (UNIX only)
........................................................................................... 92
About the cache partition ......................................................... 94
Requirements for the cache partition .......................................... 95
Directives for multiple data streams ............................................ 95
Regular recovery using FlashBackup and FlashBackup Windows policy
for NetBackup web UI ............................................................. 97

Chapter 6 Instant Recovery configuration .................................... 100

About Instant Recovery capabilities ................................................ 100

Instant Recovery requirements ...................................................... 101
Instant Recovery restrictions ......................................................... 102
Giving full server privileges to the media server ................................. 103
About Instant Recovery ................................................................ 104
About snapshot and backup for Instant Recovery ........................ 105
About NetBackup catalog maintenance ..................................... 105
About snapshot management .................................................. 106
Means of controlling snapshots ................................................ 107
Configuring a policy for Instant Recovery ......................................... 109
About sizing the cache for Instant Recovery copy-on-write snapshots
.......................................................................................... 112
Cache size during restore ....................................................... 112
Setting an adequate size for the snapshot cache ......................... 113
Large restores from an Instant Recovery snapshot ...................... 113
About configuring VxVM ............................................................... 114
Creating a snapshot mirror ..................................................... 114
About creating Instant Snapshots ............................................. 115
Using the VxVM 3.5 GUI to configure VxVM mirrors ..................... 117
Modifying the VxVM or FlashSnap resync options for point in time
rollback .............................................................................. 118
Instant Recovery for databases ..................................................... 119
About storage lifecycle policies for snapshots ................................... 119
Configuring a storage lifecycle policy to manage snapshot-based
backups for Instant Recovery ........................................... 119
Storage lifecycle polices and Snapshot Manager troubleshooting
.................................................................................... 121
 Contents 7

Chapter 7 Configuration of software-based snapshot

methods ........................................................................ 125
Software-based snapshot methods ................................................ 125
About nbu_snap ................................................................... 125
Cache device requirements .................................................... 126
About VxFS_Checkpoint ........................................................ 130
About VxFS_Snapshot ........................................................... 132
About VxVM ........................................................................ 132
About FlashSnap .................................................................. 135
About VVR .......................................................................... 138
About NAS_Snapshot ............................................................ 140
About VSS .......................................................................... 140

Chapter 8 Support for Cluster Volume Manager

Environments (CVM) ................................................ 143
About support for CVM environments .............................................. 143
Note on NetBackup and CVM ........................................................ 144
About enabling VxVM or FlashSnap snapshots in a CVM environment
.......................................................................................... 144
About enabling the NetBackup client to execute VxVM commands on
the CVM master node ............................................................ 145

Chapter 9 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays

.......................................................................................... 146
About the new disk array snapshot methods ..................................... 146
About array-specific methods vs array-independent methods
.................................................................................... 147
Advantages of the new array-specific methods ........................... 148
About types of disk array methods ............................................ 148
Important disk array method notes and restrictions ...................... 149
Disk array methods at a glance ................................................ 150
Disk array configuration tasks ........................................................ 152
Configuration tasks for the array administrator ............................ 152
Configuration tasks for the NetBackup administrator .................... 153
Disk array configuration tasks diagram ...................................... 154
OS-specific configuration tasks ...................................................... 155
About dynamic multi-pathing ................................................... 155
HBA configuration ................................................................. 155
About Solaris sd.conf file ........................................................ 156
Linux modprobe.conf file ........................................................ 157
 Contents 8

Verifying NetBackup client access, zoning, and LUN masking

.................................................................................... 157
About VSS configuration (Windows) ............................................... 159
Note on NetBackup array credentials ........................................ 159
Initial configuration of certain arrays .......................................... 159
About EMC CLARiiON arrays ........................................................ 163
EMC CLARiiON software requirements for UNIX ......................... 164
Veritas support for VSS Snapshot and EMC CLARiiON ................ 164
Diagram of installed software for EMC CLARiiON ........................ 164
Verifying connectivity from client to array ................................... 166
About resolving host names on the network ............................... 167
Configuring NetBackup to access the CLARiiON array ................. 167
Adding clients to a CLARiiON storage group .............................. 168
Configuring for EMC_CLARiiON_SnapView_Clone ...................... 169
Creating a clone private LUN with the EMC Navisphere Web
interface ....................................................................... 170
Creating a clone group and select a LUN as source ..................... 170
Adding clone LUNs to the clone group ...................................... 171
Obtaining the device identifier for each source and clone LUN
.................................................................................... 173
About configuration for EMC_CLARiiON_SnapView_Snapshot
.................................................................................... 174
Configuring a reserved LUN pool for the storage processors .......... 175
Configuring a NetBackup policy for a CLARiiON array method
.................................................................................... 176
Common CLARiiON array configuration problems ....................... 177
About EMC Symmetrix arrays ....................................................... 177
EMC Symmetrix DMX software requirements ............................. 178
Clone emulation flag can cause snapshots to fail ......................... 178
EMC snapshot operation fails ................................................. 178
Support for EMC Symmetrix with Volume Shadow Copy Service
.................................................................................... 179
Prerequisites for using EMC Symmetrix disk arrays ..................... 179
Configuring NetBackup clients to use EMC Symmetrix ................. 179
About configuring NetBackup to access the Symmetrix array ......... 181
About configuration for EMC_TimeFinder_Mirror ......................... 181
About configuration for EMC_TimeFinder_Clone ......................... 182
About configuration for EMC_TimeFinder_Snap .......................... 183
Configuring a policy for EMC_TimeFinder methods ...................... 183
About HP EVA arrays .................................................................. 185
Prerequisites for working with HP EVA arrays ............................. 185
HP EVA software requirements for UNIX ................................... 185
Diagram of installed software for HP EVA .................................. 186
 Contents 9

Veritas support for VSS Snapshot and HP EVA ........................... 186

Verifying connectivity from clients to array using SSSU 5.0 ............ 187
Configuring NetBackup to access the EVA array ......................... 189
Configuring a NetBackup policy for an HP EVA array method
.................................................................................... 189
HP EVA restrictions ............................................................... 190
About IBM DS6000 and DS8000 arrays ........................................... 190
IBM DS6000 and DS8000 software requirements ........................ 191
Preconfiguration for IBM arrays ............................................... 191
Configuring NetBackup to access the IBM DS6000 or DS8000
array ............................................................................ 191
Configuring the IBM array for NetBackup ................................... 192
Using DSCLI commands to obtain unique IBM identifiers .............. 192
Configuring a NetBackup policy for IBM_DiskStorage_FlashCopy
.................................................................................... 195
For further reference on IBM arrays .......................................... 196
About IBM DS4000 array .............................................................. 196
Array preconfiguration tasks .................................................... 196
IBM 4000 software requirements .............................................. 197
Verifying NetBackup client access, zoning, and LUN masking
.................................................................................... 197
Configuring NetBackup to access the IBM DS4000 array .............. 199
Configuring the IBM 4000 array for NetBackup ........................... 199
Configuring a NetBackup policy for
IBM_StorageManager_FlashCopy ..................................... 200
About Hitachi SMS/WMS/AMS, USP/NSC, USP-V/VM ....................... 201
Hitachi array software requirements .......................................... 201
Preconfiguration for Hitachi ..................................................... 202
About communication between NetBackup and the Hitachi array
.................................................................................... 202
Determining if the Hitachi command devices are visible ................ 202
About configuring the Hitachi array for NetBackup ....................... 203
Obtaining the Hitachi array serial number and the unique device
identifiers ...................................................................... 203
Configuring a NetBackup policy for Hitachi_ShadowImage or
Hitachi_CopyOnWrite ...................................................... 204
About HP-XP arrays .................................................................... 206
HP-XP array software requirements .......................................... 206
Preconfiguration for HP-XP ..................................................... 206
About communication between NetBackup and the HP-XP array
.................................................................................... 207
Determining if the HP-XP command devices are visible ................ 207
About configuring the HP-XP array for NetBackup ....................... 207
 Contents 10

Obtaining the array serial number and unique HP-XP identifiers

.................................................................................... 207
Configuring a NetBackup policy for HP_XP_BusinessCopy and
HP_XP_Snapshot ........................................................... 208
About array troubleshooting .......................................................... 209
Troubleshooting issues pertaining to all arrays ............................ 209
Troubleshooting NetBackup and EMC CLARiiON arrays ............... 210
Troubleshooting NetBackup and EMC Symmetrix arrays .............. 212
Troubleshooting NetBackup and HP EVA arrays ......................... 213
Troubleshooting IBM DS6000 and DS8000 arrays ....................... 214
Troubleshooting IBM4000 arrays ............................................. 217
Troubleshooting Hitachi arrays ................................................ 219

Chapter 10 Notes on Media Server and Third-Party Copy

methods ........................................................................ 226
Disk requirements for Media Server and Third-Party Copy methods
.......................................................................................... 226
Directives for Media Server and Third-Party Copy methods ................. 227
Storage units for Media Server and Third-Party Copy methods ............. 227
Preventing multiplexing on a third-party copy backup ......................... 227
Raw partition backups ................................................................. 227
Increasing the client read timeout for all clients ................................. 228
Further information on off-host data mover backups ........................... 228

Chapter 11 Backup and restore procedures .................................. 229

About performing a backup ........................................................... 229

About performing a restore ........................................................... 230
About restores from a FlashBackup backup ..................................... 230
Notes for FlashBackup and UNIX client restore ........................... 231
Notes for FlashBackup and Windows client restore ...................... 231
Restoring a large number of files in a clustered file system (VxFS on
UNIX Only) .......................................................................... 232
Instant Recovery restore features ................................................... 232
About Instant Recovery: block-level restore ................................ 233
About Instant Recovery: file promotion ...................................... 233
About Instant Recovery: Fast File Resync (Windows clients only)
.................................................................................... 235
About Instant Recovery: point in time rollback ............................. 236
Notes for restoring individual files from an Instant Recovery snapshot
.......................................................................................... 243
About configurations for restore ..................................................... 244
About restoring over the LAN .................................................. 244
 Contents 11

About restoring over the SAN to a host acting as both client server
and media server ............................................................ 245
About restoring directly from a snapshot .................................... 246
About restoring from a disk snapshot .............................................. 247
About restoring on UNIX ........................................................ 247
About restoring on Windows ................................................... 250

Chapter 12 Snapshot management ................................................ 253

About NetBackup and Snapshot Manager integration for snapshot

management ....................................................................... 253
Troubleshooting Snapshot Manager and NetBackup integration issues
.......................................................................................... 256

Chapter 13 Troubleshooting ................................................................ 258

About gathering information and checking logs ................................. 259
Logging directories for UNIX platforms ............................................ 260
UNIX logging directories for backup .......................................... 260
UNIX logging directories for restore .......................................... 261
snapctl driver messages ......................................................... 261
Logging folders for Windows platforms ............................................ 261
Windows logging folders for backup .......................................... 262
Windows logging folders for restore .......................................... 262
Configuring VxMS logging ...................................................... 263
Customer support contact information ............................................. 265
Latest patches and updates .......................................................... 266
Snapshot provider information ....................................................... 266
Important notes on Snapshot Manager ............................................ 266
Snapshot Manager installation problems ......................................... 268
FlashBackup and status code 13 ................................................... 268
The FlashBackup cache partition may have run out of space ......... 268
Removing stale snapshots (Solaris) .......................................... 269
Single file restore from a FlashBackup Instant Recovery snapshot of
a file protected by Windows VSS writer fails ............................... 269
Identifying and removing a left-over snapshot ................................... 270
Removing a VxVM volume clone .................................................... 275
Alternate client restore and backup from a snapshot fails ................... 278
Restore from a snapshot fails with status 2800 ................................. 278
Raw Partition restore fails with the message ‘FlashBackup-Windows
policy restore error’ ............................................................... 279
Snapshot creation fails with error 156 ............................................. 279
Snapshot fails with error 20 ........................................................... 279
Restore from a snapshot fails with status 133 ................................... 280
 Contents 12

Backup from snapshot fails with error 50 ......................................... 280

Backup from snapshot parent job fails with error 4213: Snapshot import
failed .................................................................................. 280
Snapshot job fails and the snapshot command does not recognize the
volume name ....................................................................... 281
Snapshot creation fails with error 4220 ........................................... 281
Snapshot creation fails when the same volume is mounted on multiple
mount points of the same host ................................................. 282
Snapshot-based backup and restore failure ..................................... 283
Multiple snapshot jobs fail with code 156 or 1541. ............................. 283
FlashBackup policy fails, with multiple backup selections [Cache =]
.......................................................................................... 283
Partial backup failure with 'Snapshot encountered error 156' ................ 284
Backup of file system validation fails with error 223 ............................ 284
Policy validation fails if the specified CIFS share path contains a forward
slash .................................................................................. 284
Policy validation fails with status code 223 ....................................... 285
An NDMP snapshot policy for wildcard backup fails with error 4201
.......................................................................................... 285
Troubleshooting with bpfis log ....................................................... 285
Limitations of using HP-UX 11.31 ................................................... 285
While configuring a policy for snapshot operations, the NetBackup
Administration Console hangs ................................................. 286
Accelerator enabled incremental backup of NetApp NAS volume .......... 286
Snapshot method: Auto ............................................................... 287

Appendix A Managing nbu_snap (Solaris) ...................................... 288

About managing nbu_snap ........................................................... 288
Cache for nbu_snap .............................................................. 288
About determining cache size .................................................. 289
About terminating nbu_snap ................................................... 289
nbu_snap commands ............................................................ 289

Appendix B Overview of snapshot operations ............................... 294

Introduction to snapshot operations ................................................ 294

Pre and post snapshot creation operations ....................................... 295
About quiescing the system .......................................................... 295
About quiescing the database application ........................................ 296
About quiescing the stack ............................................................. 297
File system quiesce ..................................................................... 297
Volume manager data caching ...................................................... 297
How copy-on-write works ............................................................. 297
 Contents 13

Index .................................................................................................................. 302

 Chapter 1
Introduction
This chapter includes the following topics:

■ About Snapshot Manager

■ About snapshot management

■ About snapshot basics

■ Benefits of copy-on-write versus mirror

■ About local backup of a snapshot

■ Off-host backup overview

■ Off-host backup methods

■ Snapshot Manager requirements

■ Snapshot Manager terminology

■ Snapshot Manager assistance

■ About open file backups for Windows

About Snapshot Manager

NetBackup Snapshot Manager provides a variety of snapshot-based features for
NetBackup. It supports clients on UNIX, Linux, and Windows platforms, on Fibre
Channel or iSCSI networks (SANs). It supports snapshot-based backup and restore
of NAS shares over NFS and SMB.
NetBackup Snapshot Manager provides a variety of snapshot-based features for
NetBackup. It supports clients on UNIX, Linux, and Windows platforms, on Fibre
Channel or iSCSI networks (SANs) or traditional LANs.
 Introduction 15
About Snapshot Manager

Table 1-1 Snapshot Manager features at a glance

Snapshot Manager feature Description

Snapshot A native, instant, read-only, point-in-time state of the

storage array logical device, for example: LUN, Volume,
Volume group. Storage array native snapshot
mechanisms (space-optimized or copy) will differ from
vendor to vendor

A point-in-time, read-only, disk-based copy of a client

volume. NetBackup backs up data from the snapshot,
not directly from the client’s primary or original volume.

Required by all features of Snapshot Client.

Instant Recovery Makes the backups available for recovery from snapshot.

Off-host backup Shifts the burden of backup processing onto a separate

backup agent, reducing the backup effect on the client’s
computing resources. The backup agent sends the
client’s data to the storage device.

Includes alternate the client, data mover, and virtual

machine host (for VMware).
Note: NetBackup 7.1 supports off-host backup of Oracle
database in the SFRAC (Storage Foundation Real
Application Clusters) environment. For more details, refer
to the NetBackup for Oracle System Administrator’s
Guide.

FlashBackup Combines the speed of raw-partition backups with the

ability to restore individual files.

NetBackup for Hyper-V Backs up and restores Windows and Linux Hyper-V
virtual machines (guest operating systems).

See the NetBackup for Hyper-V Administrator's Guide.

NetBackup for VMware Backs up and restores Windows and Linux VMware
virtual machines (guest operating systems).

See the NetBackup for VMware Administrator's Guide.

NAS snapshot Makes snapshot-based backup of data on a Network

Attached Storage (NAS) host.

Hardware snapshot support for Hardware snapshot support for VMware datastore on
VMware the Network Attached Storage (NAS) host.

See the NetBackup for VMware Administrator's Guide.

 Introduction 16
About snapshot management

Table 1-1 Snapshot Manager features at a glance (continued)

Snapshot Manager feature Description

Block level incremental backup Enables NetBackup to back up only the changed data
(BLIB) blocks of VMware virtual machines and Oracle or DB2
database files.

Snapshot Management Server Servers to manage arrays for discovery of devices and
snapshot life cycle management.

NetBackup Replication Director The implementation of NetBackup

OpenStorage-managed snapshot replication, where the
snapshots are stored on the storage systems of
partnering companies. Replication is conducted per
defined operations in storage lifecycle policies.

See the NetBackup Replication Director Solutions Guide.

About snapshot management

These topics describe the features of Snapshot Manager.

About snapshots
A snapshot is a point-in-time, read-only, disk-based copy of a client volume. After
the snapshot is created, NetBackup backs up data from the snapshot, not directly
from the client’s primary or original volume. Users and client operations can access
the primary data without interruption while data on the snapshot volume is backed
up. The contents of the snapshot volume are cataloged as if the backup was
produced directly from the primary volume. After the backup is complete, the
snapshot-based backup image on storage media is indistinguishable from a
traditional, non-snapshot backup image.
All the features of Snapshot Manager (including off-host backup, FlashBackup, and
Instant Recovery) require the creation of a snapshot.

About Snapshot Manager

NetBackup interacts with the snapshot management servers to discover devices
to protect and manage the snapshot lifecycle using arrays. Snapshot management
severs are installed separately from NetBackup and they contain plug-ins for various
storage arrays. Veritas Snapshot Manager is an example of a snapshot management
server for NetBackup. Using the NetBackup snapshot management framework,
 Introduction 17
About snapshot management

you can use Snapshot Manager for taking snapshots of your images. You can
protect all the on-premise storage arrays that are supported by Snapshot Manager.
The following table describes the underlying snapshot management tasks.

Table 1-2 Tasks for snapshot management

Tasks Description

Configure the Snapshot You can configure the Snapshot Manager server as a
Manager server in snapshot management server. To configure the Snapshot
NetBackup. Manager server in NetBackup you need to add the credentials
of the Snapshot Manager server in the NetBackup UI.

Configure the Snapshot The Snapshot Manager plug-ins that are installed on the
Manager plug-ins in Snapshot Manager server must be registered and configured
NetBackup. in the associated NetBackup server.

Configure a standard policy See “Configuring a Snapshot Manager policy” on page 50.
to use the VSO snapshot
See “Selecting the snapshot method” on page 58.
method.

Backup and restore See “About performing a backup” on page 229.

procedures
See “About performing a restore” on page 230.

About snapshot methods

NetBackup can create different types of snapshots. Each snapshot type that you
configure in NetBackup is called a snapshot method. Snapshot methods enable
NetBackup to create snapshots within the storage stack (such as the file system,
volume manager, or disk array) where the data resides. If the data resides in a
logical volume, NetBackup can use a volume snapshot method to create the
snapshot. If the data resides in a file system, NetBackup can use a file system
method, depending on the client OS and the file system type.
Many different technologies are available for creating snapshots, and many different
terms are used to refer to the underlying implementation of any given snapshot.
Common terms include clone, split-mirror, and copy-on-write. In this documentation,
the term "snapshot" designates any point-in-time, read-only copy of a primary
volume, regardless of its underlying implementation. Method-specific terminology
is explained along with specific snapshot methods in other chapters of this guide.
In some cases, more than one method can make the snapshot. If the data resides
in a file system over a logical volume, NetBackup could use a file system method
or logical volume method. The choice of method might depend on the snapshot
features available in the storage subsystem where the data resides. Or, the choice
might depend on the requirements of the snapshot method itself. For example: if
 Introduction 18
About snapshot management

the client data is in a VxFS file system over a VxVM volume, NetBackup could
create the snapshot with a file system method. On the other hand, NetBackup can
use a volume manager method to create the snapshot of the same data, such as
VxVM or FlashSnap. Between VxVM and FlashSnap, only FlashSnap supports the
Persistent FastResync feature of VxVM mirror volumes. To take advantage of the
Persistent FastResync feature, you would have to select the FlashSnap method.

About snapshot providers

Each snapshot method relies on the snapshot technology that is built into the storage
subsystem where the data is stored. Examples of storage subsystem are volume
manager, file system, or hardware disk array. NetBackup includes a set of Software
Libraries that are called "snapshot providers." The providers enable Snapshot
Manager to access the snapshot technology in the storage subsystem.
Each snapshot provider is designed for a particular subsystem. For example, the
VxFS provider enables NetBackup to create snapshots of files in the Veritas File
System (VxFS). The VxVM provider does the same for the data that is configured
in Veritas Volume Manager volumes. The EMC CLARiiON disk array provider
enables NetBackup to create hardware snapshots in the CLARiiON array.
You specify the method in the NetBackup policy. When the policy runs, the snapshot
method calls the snapshot provider library. The provider then accesses the
underlying commands in the storage subsystem to create the snapshot.

Figure 1-1 Simplified view of NetBackup access to snapshot technology

Snapshot method selected in NetBackup policy

Snapshot provider library

Storage subsystem (file system, volume, raw device, disk array)

About off-host backup support

Another major component of NetBackup Snapshot Manager is support for off-host
backup. Off-host backup shifts the burden of backup processing onto a separate
 Introduction 19
About snapshot management

backup agent, greatly reducing the backup effect on the client’s computing resources.
The backup agent sends the client’s data to the storage device.
Figure 1-2 shows a backup agent.

Figure 1-2 Backup agent for off-host backup

NetBackup master
server

LAN / WAN

NetBackup
client SCSI
Backup agent

Local client data

storage

Fibre Channel/SAN Backup agent

Robot on
Disks of client SAN
data on SAN

The backup agent can be any of the following:

■ An additional (alternate) client
■ A NetBackup media server or a third-party copy device that implements the
SCSI Extended Copy command
■ A NAS host (Network Attached Storage)
Note that many types of devices are designed to act as third-party copy devices,
such as routers, bridges, robotic libraries, and disk arrays. The backup agent can
direct the data to SCSI-attached storage or to storage on the SAN.

Note: NetBackup supports off-host backup of Oracle database in the SFRAC

(Storage Foundation Real Application Clusters) environment. For more details,
refer to the NetBackup for Oracle System Administrator’s Guide.
 Introduction 20
About snapshot management

About backup host pool

Backup host pool is a group of hosts where NetBackup stages the snapshots of
the volumes for the backup process to access them. These hosts can be NetBackup
Client, Media, or Primary server.

About Instant Recovery

This feature makes backups available for quick recovery from disk. Instant Recovery
combines snapshot technology—the image is created with minimal interruption of
user access to data—with the ability to do rapid snapshot-based restores. The
snapshot is retained on disk as a full backup image. The snapshot can also be the
source for an additional backup copy to tape or other storage.
Instant Recovery makes possible three additional variations of restore: block-level
restore, file promotion, and snapshot rollback.
See “Instant Recovery restore features” on page 232.

About FlashBackup policies

FlashBackup is a policy type that combines the speed of raw-partition backups with
the ability to restore individual files.

About snapshot methods for disk arrays

Snapshot Manager supports snapshot methods for many disk arrays. Each array
method is designed for a particular disk array series and a particular snapshot type.
These methods support the following:
■ Auto, Mirror, clone, and copy-on-write snapshot types.
■ NetBackup Instant Recovery, both snapshot-only and snapshot-to-tape backup.
■ Local backup or alternate client backup.
■ Backup of Oracle, Exchange, and DB2 database clients.

About block level incremental backup

Block level incremental backup enables NetBackup to back up only the changed
data blocks of VMware virtual machines and Oracle or DB2 database files. For
details, refer to the appropriate NetBackup database agent guide or to the NetBackup
for VMware Administrator's Guide.
 Introduction 21
About snapshot basics

About Snapshot Manager and NDMP

Using the NDMP protocol version V4 snapshot extension, NetBackup Snapshot
Manager can make policy-based snapshots of data on a Network Attached Storage
(NAS) host. The snapshot is stored on the same NAS device that contains the
primary client data. From the snapshot, you can restore individual files or roll back
an entire volume or file system, by means of Instant Recovery.

Note: NetBackup for NDMP add-on software is required, and the NAS vendor must
support snapshots.

About snapshot basics

The large active databases or file systems that must be available around-the-clock
are difficult to back up without incurring a penalty. Often, the penalty takes one of
the following forms:
■ To allow time for the backup, the entire database is taken offline or the file
system is unmounted. The result is suspension of service and inconvenience
to users.
■ The copy is made very quickly but produces an incomplete version of the data,
since some transactions have failed to complete.
A solution to this problem is to create a snapshot of the data. A snapshot captures
the data at a particular instant, without causing the client downtime. The resulting
capture or snapshot can be backed up without affecting the performance or
availability of the file system or database. Without a complete, up-to-date snapshot
of the data, a correct backup cannot be made.
When a NetBackup media server or third-party copy device manages the backup,
the data to back up must be contained in a snapshot. The backup agent can only
access the data by means of the raw physical disk. Once the data is captured as
a snapshot, the NetBackup client "maps" the logical representation of the data to
its physical disk address. These disk addresses are sent to the backup agent over
the LAN. The data is then read from the appropriate disk by the backup agent.
See “Off-host backup overview” on page 25.
Two types of snapshots are available, both supported by NetBackup: copy-on-write
and mirror (or clone). In Auto mode, NetBackup automatically decides the best
type of snapshot which the storage array supports.
 Introduction 22
About snapshot basics

About the copy-on-write snapshot type

A copy-on-write type of snapshot is a detailed account of data as it existed at a
certain moment. A copy-on-write snapshot is not a copy of the data, but a specialized
account of it.
A copy-on-write snapshot is created in the client’s file system or in a raw partition.
The copy-on-write is not created as a complete copy of the client data on a separate
or a mirror disk. The snapshot is then backed up to storage as specified in the
backup policy. Users can access their data without interruption, as though no backup
is underway. The file system is paused long enough to assemble a transnationally
consistent record.
See “How copy-on-write works” on page 297.
Note that VxFS allows two kinds of copy-on-write snapshots: file system snapshots
and Storage Checkpoints.
See “Benefits of copy-on-write versus mirror” on page 23.

About the mirror snapshot type

Unlike a copy-on-write, a mirror is a complete data copy stored on a separate disk,
physically independent of the original. Every change or write to the data on the
primary disk is also made to the copy on the secondary disk. The copy is a "mirror"
image of the source data.

Figure 1-3 Source is copied to mirror

NetBackup
client

All data that is written to

source is also written to mirror

Source image (on Mirror image (on

primary disk) secondary)

As in a copy-on-write, transactions are allowed to finish and new I/O on the primary
disk is briefly halted. When the mirror image is brought up-to-date with the source,
the mirror is split from the primary. After the mirror is split, new changes can be
made to the primary but not to the mirror. The mirror can now be backed up (see
next diagram).
 Introduction 23
Benefits of copy-on-write versus mirror

Figure 1-4 Mirror is split from source

NetBackup
client
Mirror is split from source:
further writes to source are not
made to mirror.

Source image (on Mirror image (on

primary disk) secondary)

If the mirror is to be used again it must be brought up-to-date with the primary
volume (synchronized). During synchronization, the changes that were made to
the primary volume—while the mirror was split—are written to the mirror.
Since mirroring requires a complete copy of the primary on a separate device (same
size as the primary), it consumes more disk space than copy-on-write.
See “Benefits of copy-on-write versus mirror” on page 23.

Benefits of copy-on-write versus mirror

Table 1-3 compares the benefits of the two types of snapshots.
 Introduction 24
About local backup of a snapshot

Table 1-3 Comparative benefits of copy-on-write and mirror

Benefits of copy-on-write Benefits of mirror

■ It consumes less disk space: No need for ■ It has less effect on the performance of
secondary disks containing complete the host being backed up (NetBackup
copies of source data. client), because the copy-on-write
■ Relatively easy to configure (no need to mechanism is not needed.
set up mirror disks). ■ Allows for faster backups: The backup
■ Creates a snapshot much faster than one process reads data from a separate disk
created by a large, unsynchronized mirror, (mirror) operating independently of the
because mirror synchronization can be primary disk that holds the client’s source
time consuming. data. Unlike copy-on-write, disk I/O is not
shared with other processes or
applications. Apart from NetBackup, no
other applications have access to the
mirror disk. During a copy-on-write, other
applications as well as the copy-on-write
mechanism can access the source data.

Note: If additional disk drives are available

and volumes have been configured with the
Veritas Volume Manager, a mirror snapshot
method is usually a good choice.

About local backup of a snapshot

A snapshot can be backed up to any NetBackup storage device. A Fibre Channel
network or SAN is not required. The following diagram shows a network configuration
sufficient for backing up a snapshot on the primary client (sometimes referred to
as a "local" snapshot backup). The network configuration is identical to the
configuration for normal NetBackup (no snapshot).
 Introduction 25
Off-host backup overview

Figure 1-5 Snapshot backup on local network (no Fibre Channel/SAN

required)

NetBackup master
server

LAN / WAN

SCSI SCSI

Client’s disks storage

NetBackup client NetBackup media
server

The figure shows the following phases in the local backup process:

Phase Action

Phase 1 NetBackup primary server tells the client to create

the snapshot of the primary data.

Phase 2 Client reads the snapshot, formats a backup image

reflecting the primary data, and writes the image
to the media server.

Phase 3 Media server reads the backup image.

Phase 4 Media server writes data to local storage.

Off-host backup overview

One of the principal goals of NetBackup Snapshot Manager is to move I/O
processing off the primary NetBackup client to a backup agent.
Table 1-4 describes the types of backup agents.
 Introduction 26
Off-host backup overview

Table 1-4 Type of backup agents

Type of backup agent Description

Alternate client A secondary or an alternate client performs the backup

on behalf of the primary client. Compared to the other
off-host methods, this approach reduces the backup I/O
burden on the primary client to the greatest extent.

Data mover: NetBackup media A NetBackup media server reads raw data from the client
server (UNIX clients only) snapshot and writes it to a storage device, using mapping
information that the client provides.

Data mover: Network Attached An NDMP (NAS) host performs the snapshot-only backup
Storage for Instant Recovery only.

Data mover: Third-Party Copy A third-party copy device reads raw data from the client
Device data mover (UNIX clients snapshot and writes the data to a storage device. To do
only) so, the third-party copy device uses the Extended Copy
command and mapping information from the client. Many
kinds of devices, such as routers and disk arrays, are
designed as third-party copy devices.

A list of supported third-party copy devices is available.

See “Snapshot Manager assistance” on page 42.

Data mover: NDMP Use to replicate NDMP snapshots. Select this agent in
a policy that uses NDMP with Replication Director.

For more information about configuring a policy to use

NDMP with Replication Director, see the NetBackup
Replication Director Solutions Guide.

Virtual machine host A VMware backup host performs backups on behalf of

the virtual machines. The host can also be configured
as a NetBackup primary or media server.

About file and volume mapping methods

The NetBackup media server and Third-Party Copy Device backup agents are
unaware of logical organizations of data such as file systems and volume managers.
The agent can access the data only from the physical disk address location. In
order for NetBackup to perform this type of backup, it must translate the logical
representation of the data to its physical disk addresses. This logical-to-physical
translation process is referred to as mapping the data. During the backup, the
mapping information is transmitted to the media server.
 Introduction 27
Off-host backup methods

The mapping methods are installed as part of the NetBackup Snapshot Manager
product. Depending on whether the backup data is configured over physical devices,
logical volumes, or file systems, NetBackup automatically selects the correct
mapping method.

Off-host backup methods

NetBackup Snapshot Manager supports several forms of off-host backup, as
explained in the following sections.

About alternate client backup

With this feature, all backup processing is off-loaded to another client. Off-loading
the work to an alternate client saves computing resources on the primary client.
The alternate client handles the backup I/O processing, and the backup has little
or no effect on the primary client.
The following diagram shows alternate client backup. A NetBackup primary server
is connected by means of a local or wide-area network to two clients and a media
server. The primary NetBackup client contains the data to be backed up. A snapshot
of that data is created on the alternate client (perhaps at another site). The alternate
client creates a backup image from the snapshot, using original path names, and
streams the image to the media server.

Figure 1-6 Alternate client backup: backup is performed on alternate client

(Detail from policy attributes dialog.)

NetBackup master
server

LAN / WAN

Data sharing
(mirrors or
replication)
primary client alternate client media server storage

The figure shows the following phases in the alternate client backup process:
 Introduction 28
Off-host backup methods

Phase Action

Phase 1 Primary and alternate client collaborates to create the snapshot on the
alternate client.

Phase 2 Alternate client sends the snapshot data to the media server.

Phase 3 Media server reads the snapshot data from the alternate client.

Phase 4 Media server writes data to local storage.

About data sharing between clients

For alternate client backup, the original (primary) and alternate client must
collaborate to create a snapshot. The following sections highlight two configurations:
hardware array split-mirror snapshot and volume manager snapshot with data
replication. Other configurations are possible, depending on the hardware and the
snapshot method.

Alternate client backup split mirror examples

The alternate client has access to the mirror disks that contains a snapshot of the
primary client’s data. Before the backup, the mirror is split from the primary disk,
which creates the snapshot on the mirror disk. The alternate client has access to
the mirror disk, from which it creates and streams a snapshot-based backup image
to the media server. After the backup, the mirror can be optionally resynchronized
with the primary disk.

Note: The mirror disk need not be visible to the primary client, only to the alternate
client.
 Introduction 29
Off-host backup methods

Figure 1-7 Alternate client and split mirror: primary client and alternate client
share data through mirroring.

NetBackup master
server

(Detail from policy attributes dialog.)

LAN / WAN

primary client alternate media

client server

Primary mirror storage

disk disk

The figure shows the following phases:

Phase Action

Phase 1 Mirror disk is synchronized with primary.

Phase 2 Primary client collaborates with the alternate client

to create the snapshot. Primary client splits the
mirror disk from primary disk, and mounts the
snapshot on the alternate client.

Phase 3 Alternate client streams the snapshot-based

backup from the mirror to the media server.

Phase 4 Media server reads the backup image from the

alternate client.

Figure 1-8 shows the media server and alternate client on the same host.
 Introduction 30
Off-host backup methods

Figure 1-8 Alternate client and media server on same host

(Detail from policy attributes dialog.)

NetBackup master
server

LAN / WAN

alternate client/
primary client media server

Primary mirror
disk disk storage

The figure shows the following phases:

Phase Action

Phase 1 Mirror disk is synchronized with primary.

Phase 2 Primary client collaborates with the alternate client

to create the snapshot. Primary client splits the
mirror disk from primary disk, and mounts the
snapshot on the alternate client.

Phase 3 Media server (serving as alternate client) reads

the snapshot-based backup from the mirror.

A single alternate client can handle backups for a number of primary clients, as
shown in the following diagram.
Multiple clients can share an alternate backup client of the same operating system
type.

Note: All clients must be of the same OS.

 Introduction 31
Off-host backup methods

Figure 1-9 Alternate client for multiple primary clients

LAN / WAN

client client client alternate client/ storage

media server

Figure 1-10 Multiple clients with SSO: alternate client performs backup for
multiple primary clients with NetBackup SSO option on a SAN

LAN / WAN

Solaris

Solaris Alternate client/

clients media server, with
SSO

Shared
Fibre Channel/SAN Storage

Alternate client/
Windows
media server, with
clients
SSO

Windows

Alternate client backup through data replication example

(UNIX only)
A volume that is configured with a software mirror on the alternate client replicates
a volume that is on the primary client. When the backup starts, the replication is
suspended. The software mirror is split from the replicating volume to form a
snapshot on the alternate client. The snapshot is mounted on the alternate client
 Introduction 32
Off-host backup methods

and is used to complete the backup. After the backup, the snapshot volume is
unmounted. The mirror is resynchronized with the replicating volume, and the
replication is resumed.

Figure 1-11 Replication: primary client and alternate client share data through
replication

NetBackup master
server (Detail from policy attributes dialog.
Requires the VVR snapshot method.)
LAN / WAN

primary replication
alternate media
client
client server

primary
volume
The NetBackup client’s primary volume
replicating mirror
is replicated on an alternate client.
volume volume
Storage

Phase Action

Phase 1 Primary client collaborates with the alternate client

to create snapshot.

Phase 2 Alternate client creates the snapshot by splitting

the mirror from a replicating volume.

Phase 3 Alternate client sends the snapshot data from the

snapshot to the media server.

Phase 4 Media server reads the snapshot data from the

alternate client.

Phase 5 Media server writes data to storage.

Only the VVR snapshot method for UNIX clients supports this configuration. This
configuration requires the Veritas Volume Manager (VxVM version 3.2 or later) with
the VVR license.
 Introduction 33
Off-host backup methods

FlashBackup and alternate client combination example

FlashBackup is a policy type that combines the speed of raw-partition backup with
the ability to restore individual files. FlashBackup can be combined with off-host
backup methods, such as alternate client backup in the split-mirror configuration.

Figure 1-12 Alternate client split-mirror backup with FlashBackup policy type

NetBackup master
server

(Detail from policy attributes dialog.)

LAN / WAN

alternate
primary client media
client
server

primary mirror storage

disk disk

The figure shows the following phases:

Phase Action

Phase 1 Mirror disk is synchronized with primary.

Phase 2 Primary client collaborates with the alternate client

to create the snapshot. Primary client splits the
mirror disk from primary disk, and mounts the
snapshot on the alternate client.

Phase 3 Alternate client creates file system map of the

snapshot.

Phase 4 Alternate client sends the file system map to the

media server.

Phase 5 Alternate client streams the snapshot-based

backup from the mirror to the media server.
 Introduction 34
Off-host backup methods

Phase Action

Phase 6 Media server reads the backup image from the

alternate client.

Phase 7 Media server writes the backup image to storage.

NetBackup media server data mover example (UNIX only)

In this off-host backup method, a NetBackup media server reads the backup data
from the client snapshot and writes the data to a storage device. The NetBackup
media server uses the mapping information that the client provides to read the data
as raw disk extents (units consisting of physical address and length). This method
is not supported for Windows clients.
This mapping-based data movement is in addition to the normal backup processing
that the media server performs in a primary server or media server configuration.

Note: For a multi-ported SCSI disk array, a Fibre Channel SAN is not required.

Figure 1-13 NetBackup media server data mover

NetBackup
master
server (Detail from policy attributes dialog.)

LAN / WAN

media
client
server

Fibre Channel/SAN

robot on
SAN
disks of client
data on SAN
 Introduction 35
Snapshot Manager requirements

The figure shows the following phases in the backup process:

Phase Action

Phase 1 On LAN, NetBackup primary server tells the client

to map the snapshot data on the disk.

Phase 2 On LAN, client sends the mapping information to

the media server.

Phase 3 Media server processes the mapping information

and reads client data over the SAN, from the
addresses that the client provides.

Phase 4 Media server writes data across the SAN to

storage.

About the NDMP data mover

Replication Director uses NDMP to perform the following operations:
■ Back up snapshots
■ Perform a live browse of snapshots.
■ Restore from snapshots for the copy back method.
Support for all these operations is provided for replicated snapshots as well.
For more information about configuring a policy to that uses NDMP with Replication
Director, see the NetBackup Replication Director Solutions Guide.

Snapshot Manager requirements

NetBackup Snapshot Manager requires the following components:
■ A primary server with NetBackup Snapshot Manager server software installed.
■ Clients running Solaris, HP, AIX, Linux, or Windows, with NetBackup Snapshot
Manager software installed.
Certain operating system and device patches (such as for the host bus adapter)
may be required for both servers and clients.
See “Snapshot Manager assistance” on page 42.
Please note the following additional requirements:
■ For the VxFS_Checkpoint snapshot method, all clients must have VxFS 3.4 or
later with the Storage Checkpoints feature.
 Introduction 36
Snapshot Manager requirements

■ To use Snapshot Manager to back up a VxFS file system, the client’s VxFS file
system has to be patched with the dynamic linked libraries.
■ For the VxVM snapshot method, all clients must have VxVM 3.1 or later.
■ For the FlashSnap and VVR snapshot methods, all clients must have VxVM 3.2
or later. Each method requires its own add-on license to VxVM.
■ For the disk array snapshot methods, assistance may be required from the disk
array vendor.
■ To use the snapshot and off-host backup features of NetBackup Snapshot
Manager with a NetBackup Oracle policy, UNIX clients must have Oracle8i or
later installed.
■ HP clients must use the OnlineJFS file system, not the default JFS.

Snapshot Manager restrictions

For detailed support information, refer to the following:
■ For a complete list of supported platforms, snapshot methods, data types, and
database agents, and supported combinations of platform and snapshot methods,
see NetBackup 7.x Snapshot Manager Compatibility:
http://www.netbackup.com/compatibility
■ Further information is also available.
See “Snapshot Manager assistance” on page 42.
Note the following restrictions:
■ Snapshot Manager does not support the ALL_LOCAL_DRIVES entry in the
policy’s Backup Selections list.
■ The VxFS_Checkpoint and VxVM snapshot methods support VxFS multi-volume
file systems only.
■ For the NetBackup media server or Third-Party Copy Device methods, the client
disk must be either a SCSI or Fibre Channel device.
■ For off-host backup that uses a data mover with the nbu_snap,
VxFS_Checkpoint, or VxVM snapshot methods: The NetBackup media server
must have access to all the disks that make up the snapshot. The disk(s) can
be connected to a SAN. For each of these snapshot methods, note the following:
■ nbu_snap: Media server requires access to the active disk and the cache
disk.
■ VxFS_Checkpoint: Media server requires access to the primary or an active
disk.
 Introduction 37
Snapshot Manager requirements

■ VxVM: Access requirements depend on layout of the volume group. Media

server must be able to access all disks that make up the SnapMirror volume.

■ Backup of an AIX 64-bit client with the NetBackup media server (data mover)
method and the VxVM or VxFS_Checkpoint snapshot method may fail with
NetBackup status code 11. This failure may occur if the client volumes are
configured with Storage Foundation 5.0 MP3. A NetBackup message similar to
the following appears in the job's Detailed Status tab:

12/09/2010 23:23:23 - Error bpbrm (pid=458874) from

client p5201: ERR - bp_map_open, err 2059

This error occurs because the required VxVM libraries for 64-bit AIX are not
installed in the correct location. The libraries should be installed in
/opt/VRTSvxms/lib/map/aix64/.

cp /usr/lpp/VRTSvxvm/VRTSvxvm/5.0.3.0/inst_root/
opt/VRTSvxms/lib/map/aix64/* /opt/VRTSvxms/lib/map/aix64/

Note: This issue is fixed in Storage Foundation versions starting with

5.0MP3RP3, 5.1RP1, and 5.1SP1.

■ For off-host backups that use the NDMP data mover option to replicate
snapshots, see the NetBackup Replication Director Solutions Guide for a list of
limitations.
■ In a clustered environment, Instant Recovery point-in-time rollback is not
supported for the backups that were made with a disk array snapshot method.
The disk array snapshot methods are described in the chapter titled Configuration
of snapshot methods for disk arrays.
See “About the new disk array snapshot methods” on page 146.
■ For the TimeFinder, ShadowImage, or BusinessCopy legacy snapshot methods
(when you use the NetBackup media server or Third-Party Copy Device backup
methods): The NetBackup clients must have access to the mirror (secondary)
disk containing the snapshot of the client’s data. The NetBackup clients must
also be able to access the primary disk. The NetBackup media server only needs
access to the mirror (secondary) disk.
■ For the TimeFinder, ShadowImage, or BusinessCopy legacy snapshot methods,
a Volume Manager disk group must consist of disks from the same vendor.
■ The NetBackup media server off-host backup method does not support the
clients that use client deduplication. If the client is enabled for deduplication,
you must select Disable client-side deduplication on the policy Attributes
tab.
 Introduction 38
Snapshot Manager terminology

■ For the NetBackup media server or Third-Party Copy Device backup method:
The disk must return its SCSI serial number in response to a serial-number
inquiry (serialization), or the disk must support SCSI Inquiry Page Code 83.
■ Multiplexing is not supported for Third-Party Copy Device off-host backups.
■ For alternate client backup: The user and the group identification numbers (UIDs
and GIDs) for the files must be available to the primary client and the alternate
backup client.
■ Inline Tape Copies (called Multiple Copies in Vault) is not supported for
Third-Party Copy Device off-host backups.
■ For media servers running AIX (4.3.3 and higher), note the following:
■ Clients must be Solaris, HP, or AIX.
■ Requires the use of tape or disk LUNs to send the Extended copy commands
for backup.
■ The tape must be behind a third-party-copy-capable FC-to-SCSI router. The
router must be able to intercept Extended Copy commands that are sent to
the tape LUNs.
■ The mover.conf file must have a tape path defined, not a controller path.

Snapshot Manager terminology

Table 1-5 describes the terms that are used with NetBackup Snapshot Manager.
For explanations of other NetBackup terms, consult the NetBackup online glossary.

Table 1-5 Snapshot Manager terminology

Term Definition

SMDC Snapshot Manager

Alternate client backup The alternate client performs a backup on behalf of another client.

Backup agent (see also A general term for the host that manages the backup on behalf of the NetBackup client.
Third-Party Copy Device) The agent is either another client, the NetBackup media server, a third-party copy device,
or a NAS filer.

BCV The mirror disk in an EMC primary-mirror array configuration (see mirror). BCV stands
for Business Continuance Volume.

Bridge In a SAN network, a bridge connects SCSI devices to Fibre Channel. A third-party copy
device can be implemented as part of a bridge or as part of other devices. Note that not
all bridges function as third-party copy devices.
 Introduction 39
Snapshot Manager terminology

Table 1-5 Snapshot Manager terminology (continued)

Term Definition

Cache Copy-on-write snapshot methods need a separate working area on disk during the lifetime
of the snapshot. This area is called a cache. The snapshot method uses the cache to
store a copy of the client’s data blocks that are about to change because of file system
activity. This cache must be a raw disk partition that does not contain valuable information:
when you use the cache, the snapshot method overwrites any data currently stored there.

See “How copy-on-write works” on page 297.

Copy Manager See Third-Party Copy Device.

Copy-on-write In NetBackup Snapshot Manager, one of two types of supported snapshots (see also
mirror). Unlike a mirror, a copy-on-write does not create a separate copy of the client’s
data. It creates a block-by-block "account" from the instant the copy-on-write was activated.
The account describes which blocks in the client data have changed and which have
not. The backup application uses this account to create the backup copy. Other terms
and trade names sometimes used for copy-on-write snapshots are space-optimized
snapshots, space-efficient snapshots, and checkpoints.

Data movement A copy operation as performed by a third-party copy device or NetBackup media server.

Data mover The host or entity that manages the backup on behalf of the NetBackup client. The data
mover can be either the NetBackup media server, a third-party copy device, or a NAS
filer.

device A general term for any of the following: LUN, logical volume, vdisk, and BCV or STD.

Disk group A configuration of disks to create a primary-mirror association, using commands unique
to the disks’ vendor. See mirror and volume group.

Extent A contiguous set of disk blocks that are allocated for a file and represented by three
values:

■ Device identifier
■ Starting block address (offset in the device)
■ Length (number of contiguous blocks)

The mapping methods in Snapshot Manager determine the list of extents and send the
list to the backup agent.

FastResync (VxVM) Formerly known as Fast Mirror Resynchronization or FMR, VxVM FastResync performs
quick and efficient resynchronization of mirrors. NetBackup’s Instant Recovery feature
uses FastResync to create and maintain a point-in-time copy of a production volume.

Fibre Channel A type of high-speed network that is composed of either optical or of copper cable and
employing the Fibre Channel protocol. NetBackup Snapshot Manager supports both
arbitrated loop and switched fabric (switched Fibre Channel) environments.
 Introduction 40
Snapshot Manager terminology

Table 1-5 Snapshot Manager terminology (continued)

Term Definition

File system Has two meanings. For a product, such as UFS (Sun Solaris) or VxFS (Veritas) file
systems, file system means the management and the allocation schemes of the file tree.
Regarding a file tree component, file system means a directory that is attached to the
UNIX file tree by means of the mount command. When a file system is selected as an
entry in the NetBackup Backup Selections list, this definition applies.

File system means a directory that is attached to the UNIX file tree by means of the
mount command. When a file system is selected as an entry in the NetBackup Backup
Selections list, this definition applies.

Instant Recovery A restore feature of a disk snapshot of a client file system or volume. Client data can be
rapidly restored from the snapshot, even after a system restart.

Mapping Converting a file or raw device (in the file system or Volume Manager) to physical
addresses or extents for backup agents on the network. NetBackup Snapshot Manager
uses the VxMS library to perform file mapping.

Mapping methods A set of routines for converting logical file addresses to physical disk addresses or extents.
NetBackup Snapshot Manager includes support for file-mapping and volume-mapping
methods.

Mirror Has two meanings.

■ A disk that maintains an exact copy or duplicate of another disk. A mirror disk is often
called a secondary, and the source disk is called the primary. All writes to the primary
disk are also made to the mirror disk.
■ A type of snapshot that is captured on a mirror disk. At an appropriate moment, all
further writes to the primary disk are held back from the mirror, which "splits" the
mirror from the primary. As a result of the split, the mirror becomes a snapshot of the
primary. The snapshot can then be backed up.

NetBackup media server An off-host backup method in which the NetBackup media server performs the data
method movement.

Off-host backup The off-loading of backup processing to a separate backup agent executing on another
host. NetBackup Snapshot Manager provides the following off-host backup options:
Alternate Client, NetBackup media server, Third-Party Copy Device, and Network Attached
Storage.

Primary disk In a primary-mirror configuration, client applications read and write their data on the
primary disk. An exact duplicate of the primary disk is the mirror.

Raw partition A single section of a raw physical disk device occupying a range of disk sectors. The
raw partition does not have a file system or other hierarchical organization scheme (thus,
a "raw" stream of disk sectors). On some operating systems, such as Solaris and HP-UX,
a raw partition is different from a block device over which the file system is mounted.
 Introduction 41
Snapshot Manager terminology

Table 1-5 Snapshot Manager terminology (continued)

Term Definition

Recovery Manager (RMAN) Oracle's backup and recovery program. RMAN performs backup and restore by making
requests to a NetBackup shared library.

RMAN Proxy Copy An extension to the Oracle8i media management API which enables media management
software such as NetBackup to perform data transfer directly.

SAN (storage area network) A Fibre Channel-based network connecting servers and storage devices. The storage
devices are not attached to servers but to the network itself, and are visible to all servers
on the network.

Secondary disk See mirror.

Snapshot A point-in-time, read-only, disk-based copy of a client volume. A snapshot is created with
minimal effect on other applications. NetBackup provides several types, depending on
the device where the snapshot occurs: copy-on-write, mirror, clone, and snap.

Snapshot method A set of routines for creating a snapshot. You can select the method, or let NetBackup
select it when the backup is started (auto method).

Snapshot mirror A disk mirror created by the Veritas Volume Manager (VxVM). Snapshot mirror is an
exact copy of a primary volume at a particular moment, reproduced on a physically
separate device.

Snapshot source The entity (file system, raw partition, or logical volume) to which a snapshot method is
applied. NetBackup automatically selects the snapshot source according to the entries
in the policy’s Backup Selections list.

Snapshot volume A mirror that has been split from the primary volume or device and made available to
users. Veritas Volume Manager (VxVM) creates snapshot volumes as a point-in-time
copy of the primary volume. Subsequent changes in the primary volume are recorded in
the Data Change Log. The recorded changes can be used to resynchronize with the
primary volume by means of VxVM FastResync. The changes that were made while the
snapshot volume was split are applied to the snapshot volume to make it identical to the
primary volume.

Standard device Refers to the primary disk in an EMC primary-mirror disk array (see primary disk).

Storage Checkpoint (VxFS) Provides a consistent and a stable view of a file system image and keeps track of modified
data blocks since the last checkpoint. Unlike a mirror, a VxFS Storage Checkpoint does
not create a separate copy of the primary or the original data. It creates a block-by-block
account that describes which blocks in the original data have changed from the instant
the checkpoint was activated.

A Storage Checkpoint stores its information in available space on the primary file system,
not on a separate or a designated device. (Also, the ls command does not list Storage
Checkpoint disk usage; you must use the fsckptadm list command instead.)
 Introduction 42
Snapshot Manager assistance

Table 1-5 Snapshot Manager terminology (continued)

Term Definition

Third-Party Copy Device Has two meanings:

■ A backup agent on the SAN that operates on behalf of backup applications. The
third-party copy device receives backup data from a disk that is attached to Fibre
Channel and sends it to a storage device. The third-party copy device uses the SCSI
Extended Copy command. The third-party copy device is sometimes called a Copy
Manager, third-party copy engine, or data mover. In SAN hardware configurations, a
third-party copy device can be implemented as part of a bridge, router, or storage
device. The third-party copy device may or may not be the device to which the storage
units are connected.
■ An off-host backup method in NetBackup Snapshot Manager that allows backups to
be made by means of a backup agent on the SAN.

UFS file system The UNIX file system (UFS), which is the default file system type on Sun Solaris. The
UFS file system was formerly the Berkeley Fast File System.

VxMS (Veritas Federated A library of routines (methods) used by NetBackup Snapshot Manager to obtain the
Mapping Services) physical addresses of logical disk objects such as files and volumes.

Volume A virtual device that is configured over raw physical disk devices (not to be confused with
a NetBackup Media and Device Management volume). Consists of a block and a character
device. If a snapshot source exists over a volume, NetBackup automatically uses a
volume mapping method to map the volume to physical device addresses.

Volume group A logical grouping of disks, created with the Veritas Volume Manager, to allow more
efficient use of disk space.

VxFS The Veritas extent-based File System (VxFS), designed for high performance and large
volumes of data.

VxVM The Veritas Volume Manager (VxVM), which provides the logical volume management
that can also be used in SAN environments.

Snapshot Manager assistance

The following kinds of assistance are available.

Table 1-6 Types of assistance available for Snapshot Manager

Type of assistance Description

Snapshot Manager help from For help creating a policy, click the primary server name at the top of the left pane and
NetBackup Administration click Create a Snapshot Backup Policy.
Console
 Introduction 43
About open file backups for Windows

Table 1-6 Types of assistance available for Snapshot Manager (continued)

Type of assistance Description

Snapshot Manager For a document containing additional Snapshot Manager assistance, see the tech note
assistance from the web NetBackup Snapshot Client Configuration. This document may be accessed from the
following link:

http://www.veritas.com/docs/000081320
This document includes the following:

■ An up-to-date list of supported operating systems and peripherals

■ Detailed configuration assistance for the legacy disk array snapshot methods: EMC
TimeFinder, Hitachi ShadowImage, and HP BusinessCopy
■ Sections on SAN device configuration and on setting up NetBackup for off-host
data mover backups (with instructions for creating 3pc.conf and mover.conf
files)

Compatibility list For a complete list of supported platforms, snapshot methods, data types, and database
agents, and supported combinations of platform and snapshot methods, see the
NetBackup 7.x Snapshot Manager Compatibility document:

http://www.netbackup.com/compatibility

NDMP information on the web The Veritas Support website has a pdf document on supported NDMP operating systems
and NAS vendors. The document also contains configuration and troubleshooting help
for particular NAS systems.

This document may be accessed from the following link:

http://www.veritas.com/docs/000027113

The document’s title is: NetBackup for NDMP Supported OS and NAS Appliance
Information.

About open file backups for Windows

The Open File Backup license is included in the standard NetBackup for Windows
product, and enables open file backups of Windows clients. Open File Backup is
independent of Snapshot Manager. The Snapshot Manager product is not required
for Windows open file backups.
See the NetBackup Administrator’s Guide, Volume I.
 Chapter 2
Installation
This chapter includes the following topics:

■ Installation prerequisites for Snapshot Manager

■ Snapshot Manager installation notes

■ About distributing Client Software in mixed-platform environments

■ About creating log directories

■ About the snapshot state file

Installation prerequisites for Snapshot Manager

Note the following prerequisites:
■ NetBackup Enterprise server 10.2 or later must be installed on the primary and
the media servers. For performing backups of the primary client, the primary or
the media server can be running any supported UNIX, Linux or Windows platform.
For a list of supported platforms for Snapshot Manager, refer to the following
document:
http://www.veritas.com/docs/000081320
■ From NetBackup version 9.1 onwards, the media server should be running the
same NetBackup version as that of the primary server for it to communicate
with the Snapshot Manager server
■ You must have a license for Snapshot Manager.
■ For a list of supported platforms for NetBackup for VMware and NetBackup for
Hyper-V, refer to the following document:
http://www.veritas.com/docs/000035749
■ NetBackup 10.2 or later client software must be installed on clients.
For AIX and Linux clients, the client data must be in a VxFS file system.
 Installation 45
Snapshot Manager installation notes

■ For Instant Recovery using the VxFS_Checkpoint method, the VxFS file system
with the Storage Checkpoints feature must be installed on clients.

Snapshot Manager installation notes

The following list contains C installation information for RHEL, UNIX and Windows.
RHEL
Perform the following tasks for RHEL:
■ In the recent RHEL version, there are changes in usage of partition delimiter.
Based on the last character in the device path, OS decides if partition delimiter
must be added or not. To address the change, update the udev rule to add
partition delimiter 'p' on RHEL.
■ Open the /lib/udev/rules.d/62-multipath.rules file.
■ Locate these line:

RUN+="$env{MPATH_SBIN_PATH}/kpartx -an $tempnode",

\ ENV{DM_MULTIPATH_NEED_KPARTX}=""

Update the lines as follows:

RUN+="$env{MPATH_SBIN_PATH}/kpartx -an -p p $tempnode",

\ ENV{DM_MULTIPATH_NEED_KPARTX}=""

■ Restart the multipath service, using the following command:

# service multipathd restart

■ For devices in LVM, if multiple paths are used, ensure that the multipathing
service is enabled.
■ Junction mount point on filler or array is not supported for snapshot operations
with VSO FIM snapshot method.
■ For client-side nested mount points, rollback of parent mount points is not
supported.
UNIX
■ NetBackup Snapshot Manager is installed with the NetBackup client software.
Every NetBackup server includes the NetBackup client software, by default. So,
you can use NetBackup Snapshot Manager on a NetBackup server or client, if
the Snapshot Manager is supported on that platform.
■ For NetBackup 10.2, Snapshot Manager for Solaris is supported on SPARC
computers only.
 Installation 46
Snapshot Manager installation notes

For the NetBackup installation procedure, refer to the NetBackup Installation

Guide
■ If you install in a cluster environment, first freeze the active node so that
migrations do not occur during installation.
For information about freezing a service group, see the clustering section in the
NetBackup High Availability Administrator’s Guide for the cluster software you
are running.
■ For Linux platform, ensure that sg3_utils package is installed.
When you install or upgrade the NetBackup Snapshot Manager, NetBackup
deploys the sg3_utils package on the NetBackup Client.
The package provides the rescan-scsi-bus.sh script which helps to rescan
and discover new devices after a snapshot is imported. This script is used during
‘bpfis import’ and ‘bpfis deport’ operations. If this script is not present on the
NetBackup client, snapshot import fails.
The default location of the script is:
<install_location>/usr/bin/rescan-scsi-bus.sh
In case, the package is not deployed run the following command:
yum install sg3_utils

■ For LinuX LVM, ensure that systemctl is available.

■ Ensure that F user is configured.
Windows
■ For Windows, NetBackup Snapshot Manager software is automatically installed
with the core NetBackup server and client product.
For the NetBackup installation procedure, see the NetBackup Installation Guide.
■ If you install Snapshot Manager in a cluster environment, first freeze the active
node so that migrations do not occur during installation.
For information about freezing a service group, see the clustering section in the
NetBackup High Availability Administrator’s Guide for the cluster software you
are running.
Refer to the uninstall procedure that is described in the NetBackup Installation
Guide
 Installation 47
About distributing Client Software in mixed-platform environments

About distributing Client Software in

mixed-platform environments
For UNIX and Windows, Snapshot Manager software is automatically installed with
the base NetBackup client software. See the appropriate NetBackup Installation
Guide for more information.
For mixed environments, note the following:
■ If you have a Windows server with UNIX clients, you must install the client
software on the UNIX client computers individually, from the NetBackup media.
■ If you have a UNIX server with Windows clients, you must install the client
software on the Windows client computers individually, from the NetBackup
media.

About creating log directories

During backup and restore, Snapshot Manager messages are written to several
log directories on the NetBackup server and client, if the directories exist. For logging
to occur, you must create these directories manually if the directories do not already
exist.
See “About gathering information and checking logs” on page 259.

About the snapshot state file

Whenever NetBackup creates a snapshot, it also creates a file that contains
information about the snapshot. This file is called the snapshot state file. The state
file stores information that is required for performing certain operations on the
snapshot. (Examples of such operations are, data restore from snapshots, backup
from snapshots, or snapshot deletion.
The NetBackup bpfis process creates a state file on the client. A copy of the state
file is stored on the NetBackup primary server. In a cluster, if the client experiences
problems and failover to another node occurs, the state file on the NetBackup
primary server comes in handy to obtain information about the failed client. In case
the state file does not exist on the NetBackup primary server, it becomes impossible
for the active node to get snapshot information.

Table 2-1 Location of snapshot state file

Location UNIX Windows

On the client /usr/openv/netbackup/online_util/fi_cntl/ install_path\NetBackup\online_util\fi_cntl\

 Installation 48
About the snapshot state file

Table 2-1 Location of snapshot state file (continued)

Location UNIX Windows

On the primary /usr/openv/netbackup/db/snapshot/client_name/ install_path\NetBackup\db\snapshot\client_name\

server

Location Unix

On the client /usr/openv/netbackup/online_util/fi_cntl/

On the primary server /usr/openv/netbackup/db/snapshot/client_name/

 Chapter 3
Policy configuration
This chapter includes the following topics:

■ Notes on Snapshot Manager policies

■ Configuring a Snapshot Manager policy

■ Backup Selections tab options when configuring a policy

■ Off-host backup configuration options

■ Automatic snapshot selection

■ Selecting the snapshot method

■ Configuring backup scripts

■ About using alternate client backup

■ Configuring alternate client backup

■ Policy configuration tips

■ About disabling snapshots

Notes on Snapshot Manager policies

Before you configure a Snapshot Manager policy, note the following.
■ NetBackup product must be installed on primary server(s) and clients.
■ For the NetBackup Media Server off-host backup methods, a Fibre Channel
network or multi-ported SCSI disk array must be configured.
■ Storage devices must be configured (you can use the Device Configuration
Wizard).
 Policy configuration 50
Configuring a Snapshot Manager policy

■ Encryption and compression are supported, but are applied only to the backup
copy that is written to a storage unit. The snapshot itself is neither compressed
nor encrypted.
■ FlashBackup policies do not support encryption or compression.
■ BLIB with Snapshot Manager (Perform block level incremental backups
option on the policy Attributes tab): BLIB is supported with NetBackup for
Oracle, NetBackup for DB2, and with VMware.
If you choose the Perform block level incremental backups option on the
policy Attributes tab, the other features of Snapshot Manager are grayed out.
■ Ensure that the number of LUNs exposed to the HBAs, do not reach the
maximum limit during any snapshot related operations.

Configuring a Snapshot Manager policy

The following procedure describes only the options pertaining to a Snapshot
Manager policy.
 Policy configuration 51
Configuring a Snapshot Manager policy

To configure a Snapshot Manager policy

1 On the primary server, open the NetBackup Administration Console.
2 Click Policies and select the policy to edit.

3 Select the policy type:

■ For VMware virtual machines, select FlashBackup-Windows VMware or
MS-Windows. For Hyper-V, select FlashBackup-Windows or Hyper-V.
Refer to the appropriate NetBackup guide for your virtual environment.
 Policy configuration 52
Configuring a Snapshot Manager policy

■ If client data is in a database, select the database type (DB2, Oracle,

MS-Exchange-Server, MS-SQL-Server, or SAP).
If client data is in a database, select the database type (DB2, Oracle, or
SAP).
NetBackup 10.2 supports off-host backup of Oracle database in the SFRAC
(Storage Foundation Real Application Clusters) environment. For more
details, refer to the NetBackup for Oracle Administrator’s Guide:
https://www.veritas.com/docs/DOC5332
■ To use FlashBackup, select FlashBackup for UNIX clients or
FlashBackup-Windows for Windows clients.

Note: FlashBackup-Windows supports the backup and restore of NTFS

files that are compressed.
The files are backed up and restored as compressed files (they are not
uncompressed).

■ For all other cases, select Standard for UNIX clients and MS-Windows
for Windows clients.
■ For all other cases, select Standard for UNIX clients.

4 Select a storage unit, storage unit group, or a storage lifecycle policy as the
Policy storage.
5 Select a storage lifecycle policy as the Policy storage.
6 Make sure Perform snapshot backups is selected.

Note: When you select Perform snapshot backups, the Bare Metal Restore
option is disabled.

Note: Perform snapshot backups must be selected for the policy to reference
any storage lifecycle policy with a Snapshot destination.

7 Select the snapshot method manually.

See “Selecting the snapshot method” on page 58.
Skip this step if you want NetBackup to select the snapshot method.
See “Automatic snapshot selection” on page 57.
 Policy configuration 53
Backup Selections tab options when configuring a policy

8 Select the Retain snapshots for instant recovery or SLP management

attribute.
This attribute is required for block-level restore, file promotion, and rollback.
See “Instant Recovery restore features” on page 232.
See “Configuring a policy for Instant Recovery” on page 109.
9 To reduce the processing load on the client, select Perform off-host backup.
See “Off-host backup configuration options ” on page 55.
10 To save these settings, click Apply.
11 To define a schedule, use the Schedules tab, and to specify the clients, use
the Clients tab .
Regarding clients: only one snapshot method can be configured per policy. To
select one snapshot method for clients a, b, and c, and a different method for
clients d, e, and f: create a separate policy for each group of clients and select
one method per policy. You may be able to avoid this restriction using the auto
method.
12 To specify the files to be backed up, use the Backup Selections tab .
See “Backup Selections tab options when configuring a policy” on page 53.
13 On the Policy Attributes tab: if you click Apply or OK, a validation process
checks the policy and reports any errors. If you click Close, no validation is
performed.

Backup Selections tab options when configuring

a policy
Note the following about the options on the Backup Selections tab:
■ Snapshot Manager policies do not support the ALL_LOCAL_DRIVES entry in
the Backup Selections list (except for the VMware and Hyper-V snapshot
methods).
■ For snapshots, the maximum pathname length is approximately 1000 characters
(as opposed to 1023 characters for backups that do not use a snapshot method).
See “Maximum pathname length” on page 74.
The NetBackup Administrator’s Guide, Volume I, describes other file-path rules.
■ When you configure a snapshot method in a MS-Windows policy, the backward
slash (\) must be entered in the Backup Selections list after the drive letter.
If the backward slash is not included, the snapshot image does not appear in
the NetBackup catalog.
 Policy configuration 54
Backup Selections tab options when configuring a policy

■ Wildcards are permitted if the wildcard does not correspond to a mount point or
a mount point does not follow the wildcard in the path.

Note: This is applicable to a Storage Lifecycle Policy that has snapshot as the
first operation and does not contain any backup or replicate operation.

For example, in the path /a/b, if /a is a mounted file system or volume, and
/a/b designates a subdirectory in that file system: the entry /a/b/*.pdf causes
NetBackup to make a snapshot of the /a file system and to back up all pdf files
in the /a/b directory. But, with an entry of /* or /*/b, the backup may fail or
have unpredictable results, because the wildcard corresponds to the mount
point /a. Do not use a wildcard to represent all or part of a mount point.
In another example, /a is a mounted file system which contains another mounted
file system at /a/b/c (where c designates a second mount point). A Backup
Selections entry of /a/*/c may fail or have unpredictable results, because a
mount point follows the wildcard in the path.
Information is available on the Cross mount points policy attribute.
See “Snapshot tips” on page 75.
■ For a raw partition backup of a UNIX client, specify the /rdsk path, not the /dsk
path. You can specify the disk partition (except on AIX) or a VxVM volume.
Examples:

On Solaris: /dev/rdsk/c0t0d0s1
/dev/vx/rdsk/volgrp1/vol1

On HP: /dev/rdsk/c1t0d0
/dev/vx/rdsk/volgrp1/vol1

On AIX and Linux: /dev/vx/rdsk/volgrp1/vol1

On Linux: /dev/sdc1

On AIX clients, backing up a native disk partition is not supported. A raw partition
backup must specify a VxVM volume, such as /dev/vx/rdsk/volgrp1/vol1.
Note that /dev/vx/dsk/volgrp1/vol1 (without the "r" in /rdsk) does not work.
 Policy configuration 55
Off-host backup configuration options

Off-host backup configuration options

Off-host backup shifts the burden of backup processing to a separate backup agent,
which reduces the impact on the client’s resources ordinarily caused by a local
backup. The client supplies a small amount of information on how data is mapped.
The backup agent does the bulk of the work by sending the client’s data to the
storage device.
Select the off-host backup method when you create a new policy, you can also
select off-host backup for an existing policy. Select off-host backup from the Add
New Policy dialog box. The following image shows a part of the dialog box.
See “Configuring a Snapshot Manager policy” on page 50.

The Use and Machine fields designate the backup agent.

Select the type of off-host backup from the Use field:
■ VMware backup host
Select this option to designate a VMware backup host as the backup agent, for
VMware virtual machine (guest OS) backup. During restore, this host is called
the VMware restore host.
Select the name of the backup host in the Machine pull-down.
 Policy configuration 56
Off-host backup configuration options

To back up a virtual machine that does not have a NetBackup client installed
on it, you must select this option. If a NetBackup client is installed on the virtual
machine, you can back up the virtual machine in the same way as an ordinary
physical host (a snapshot-based backup is not required).
The VMware backup host option requires the FlashBackup-Windows or
MS-Windows policy type.
See the NetBackup for VMware Administrator’s Guide for further information:
https://www.veritas.com/docs/DOC5332

Note: The VMware backup host is not displayed when you select the Retain
snapshots for Instant Recovery or SLP management check box as VMware
backup is not supported for Instant Recovery.

■ Alternate Client
Select this option to designate the backup agent as a NetBackup media server,
a third-party copy device that implements the SCSI Extended Copy command,
or a NAS filer (Network Attached Storage).
Select this option to designate another client (alternate client) as the backup
agent.
An alternate client saves computing resources on the original client. The alternate
client handles the backup I/O processing on behalf of the original client, so the
backup has little effect on the original client.
Enter the name of the alternate client in the Machine field.
See “About using alternate client backup” on page 71.
■ Data Mover
Select this option to designate the backup agent as a NetBackup media server,
a third-party copy device that implements the SCSI Extended Copy command,
or a NAS filer (Network Attached Storage).
The Data Mover option requires the Standard, FlashBackup, or MS-Windows
policy type.
Select the type of data mover in the Machine drop-down:

Network Attached Storage An NDMP host (NAS filer) performs the backup
processing, by means of the NAS_Snapshot method.
NetBackup for NDMP software is required on the
NetBackup server. This option is required for NAS
snapshots.

See “Setting up a policy for NAS snapshots” on page 83.

NetBackup Media Server A Solaris, HP, AIX media server performs the backup
processing (for Solaris, HP, and AIX clients only).
 Policy configuration 57
Automatic snapshot selection

Third-Party Copy Device A third-party copy device handles the backup processing.
For Solaris, HP, AIX, and Linux clients only.

Many types of devices are designed to act as third-party

copy devices, such as routers, bridges, robotic libraries,
and disk arrays. The backup agent can direct the data to
SCSI-attached storage or to storage on the SAN.

For more information on media server and third-party

copy backup, refer to the NetBackup Snapshot Manager
Configuration document:

http://www.veritas.com/docs/000081320

The use of Perform off-host backup may require additional configuration, as

follows:
■ For the policy storage unit or group of storage units, note:
Any_available is not supported for the following data mover types: NetBackup
Media Server and Third-Party Copy Device. Disk storage units are not supported
for Third-Party Copy Device.
Instead of using a particular storage unit, you can create a storage unit group
that designates devices that are configured on the SAN.
See the NetBackup Administrator’s Guide, Volume I:
https://www.veritas.com/docs/DOC5332
■ Also note the following:
■ For the Third-Party Copy Device option, you must create a mover.conf file.
Assistance with this file is available, in the NetBackup Snapshot Manager
Configuration document:
http://www.veritas.com/docs/000081320
■ If you do not have Veritas CommandCentral Storage and your backup devices
do not support identification descriptors (SCSI E4 target descriptors), you
may need to edit the 3pc.conf file.
See http://www.veritas.com/docs/000081320

Automatic snapshot selection

To have NetBackup select the snapshot method, click Perform snapshot backups
on the policy Attributes tab. Note the following points:
■ If the policy is new, NetBackup selects a snapshot method when the backup
starts (by default, the snapshot method is set to auto).
 Policy configuration 58
Selecting the snapshot method

■ If the policy had been configured for a particular snapshot method, click the
Snapshot Manager Options option and set the snapshot method to that
particular one. NetBackup selects a snapshot method when the backup starts.
Use of the auto method does not guarantee that NetBackup can select a snapshot
method for the backup. NetBackup looks for a suitable method according to the
following factors:
■ The client platform and policy type.
■ The presence of up-to-date software licenses, such as VxFS and VxVM.
■ How the client data is configured. For instance:
■ Whether a raw partition has been specified for a copy-on-write cache.
See “Entering the cache” on page 129.
■ Whether the client’s data is contained in the VxVM volumes that were
configured with one or more snapshot mirrors.

NetBackup uses the first suitable method found.

Note: The auto method cannot select a snapshot method that is designed for a
particular disk array, such as EMC_TimeFinder_Clone or HP_EVA_Vsnap. You
must select the disk array method from the drop-down list on the Snapshot Options
dialog box.

The auto method has the following advantages:

■ NetBackup can use a different snapshot method for each item in the Backup
Selections list, or for each client in the policy. As a result, NetBackup has more
flexibility in choosing a snapshot method, and you can circumvent the
one-snapshot-method-per-policy restriction.
■ At the time of backup, NetBackup selects a snapshot method according to how
the client is configured at that moment. If the VxFS or VxVM license on the client
has expired, or if the client was recently reconfigured, NetBackup selects a
snapshot method accordingly.

Selecting the snapshot method

You can manually select a snapshot method as follows.
To select a snapshot method
1 On the primary server, open the NetBackup Administration Console.
2 Click Policies.
 Policy configuration 59
Selecting the snapshot method

3 In the All Policies pane, double-click the name of the policy.

The Change Policy dialog appears.
4 Make sure Perform snapshot backups is selected.
5 Click Options.

6 In the pull-down menu, select VSO as the Snapshot method for the policy,
to manage snapshots using the Snapshot Manager.
■ Choose auto if you want NetBackup to select the snapshot method.
See “Automatic snapshot selection” on page 57.
■ The available methods depend on how your clients are configured and
which attributes you selected on the Attributes tab.
Only one snapshot method can be configured per policy.
Configure each policy for a single method and include only clients and backup
selections for which that snapshot method can be used. For example, for the
nbu_snap method (which applies to Solaris clients only), create a policy that
includes Solaris clients only. The snapshot method you select must be
compatible with all items in the policy’s Backup Selections list.
 Policy configuration 60
Selecting the snapshot method

See “Snapshot methods” on page 60.

7 Specify required parameters, if any. Additional fields in the Snapshot Options
dialog indicate required parameters.
See “Configuration parameters for Snapshot Manager” on page 63.
See “Snapshot Resources” on page 69.
8 Click OK.

Snapshot methods
Table 3-1 describes each snapshot method (not including the disk array methods).
See “Disk array methods at a glance” on page 150.

Table 3-1 Snapshot method descriptions

Method Description

auto NetBackup selects a snapshot method when the backup starts.

If necessary, NetBackup selects a different method for each item
in the Backup Selections list.

FlashSnap For mirror snapshots on alternate clients, with the VxVM

FlashSnap feature. This method is for clients on Solaris, HP, AIX,
Linux, and Windows. UNIX clients must be at VxVM 3.2 or later.
Linux and AIX clients must be at VxVM 4.0 or later. Windows
clients must be at VxVM 3.1 or later, with all the latest VxVM
service packs and updates.

FlashSnap is based on the VxVM disk group split and join

technology.

Hyper-V For snapshots of Hyper-V virtual machines.

Refer to the NetBackup for Hyper-V Administrator's Guide:

https://www.veritas.com/support/en_US/article.DOC5332

NAS_Snapshot For copy-on-write snapshots of client data that resides on an

NDMP host. Requires NetBackup for NDMP software. Further
information is available on requirements and configuration details.
See “About NAS snapshot overview” on page 80.
 Policy configuration 61
Selecting the snapshot method

Table 3-1 Snapshot method descriptions (continued)

Method Description

nbu_snap For copy-on-write snapshots of UFS or Veritas VxFS file systems.

For Solaris clients only. nbu_snap is not supported in clustered
file systems.

NetBackup does not currently support extended volume table of

contents (VTOCs) or EFI labels when nbu_snap is used with
the UNIX file system (UFS). NetBackup supports an effective
limit of 1TB disks (regardless of partition size) when UFS and
nbu_snap are used together. To use nbu_snap with a larger
disk (greater than 1TB), you must use VxVM instead of UFS.

This method requires a raw partition that is designated for cache.

OST_FIM For use in a policy that is configured for snapshot replication

using Replication Director. The OST_FIM method works only if
the Policy storage attribute points to a storage lifecycle policy
that contains a snapshot-capable storage unit.

VMware For snapshots of VMware virtual machines.

Refer to the NetBackup for VMware Administrator's guide

VSS VSS uses the Volume Shadow Copy Service of Windows and
supports Instant Recovery. VSS is for local backup or alternate
client backup.

For the most up-to-date list of Windows operating systems and

disk arrays supported by this method, see the following
NetBackup Snapshot Manager Configuration document:

http://www.veritas.com/docs/000081320

For alternate client backup, the client data must reside on: either
a disk array such as EMC, HP, or Hitachi with snapshot capability,
or a Veritas Storage Foundation for Windows 4.1 or later volume
with snapshots enabled. VSS supports file system backup of a
disk partition (such as E:\) and backup of databases.

VSS-based snapshot methods offer a general interface to

Windows Shadow Copy Services. VSS selects the actual
snapshot method depending on which snapshot provider is
configured on the client. For instance, if the data resides on an
EMC CLARiiON array, and the array administrator configured
the array and its snapshot capability: the Volume Shadow Copy
Service selects the appropriate CLARiiON VSS hardware provider
to take the snapshot.
 Policy configuration 62
Selecting the snapshot method

Table 3-1 Snapshot method descriptions (continued)

Method Description

VVR For alternate client backups of a replicated VxVM volume. For

clients on Solaris, HP, Linux, AIX.

Requires VxVM 3.2 or later with the Veritas Volume Replicator

license. Linux and AIX clients require VxVM 4.0 or later.

VxFS_Checkpoint For copy-on-write snapshots of clients on Solaris, HP, AIX, or

Linux. The FlashBackup policy type does not support this method.

Requires the Storage Checkpoint feature of VxFS 3.4 or later.

HP requires VxFS 3.5 or later. Linux and AIX clients require VxFS
4.0 or later.

Note that VxFS_Checkpoint requires the Snapshot Manager

license and the Veritas File System license with the Storage
Checkpoints feature. Without both licenses, the copy-on-write
snapshot (Storage Checkpoint) cannot be opened and the backup
fails.

VxFS_Snapshot For copy-on-write snapshots of Solaris or HP clients on the local

network (not off-host), for FlashBackup policies only. This method
requires VxFS 3.4 (Solaris) or VxFS 3.3.2 (HP) or later. This
method also requires a designated cache.

Note that all files in the Backup Selections list must reside in
the same file system.

VxVM For any of the following types of snapshots with data configured
over Volume Manager volumes, for clients on Solaris, HP, AIX,
Linux, or Windows. Linux and AIX clients require VxVM 4.0 or
later.

For "third-mirror" snapshots (VxVM 3.1 or later).

For full-sized instant snapshots (VxVM 4.0).

For space-optimized instant snapshots (VxVM 4.0).

remote_vxfs Creates a vxfs_checkpoint snapshot (copy-on-write) of database

backup shares on the NetBackup appliance.

■ This method is only applicable for Oracle Agent.

■ Restore from snapshot is only done through copy back
method.

For more information about remote_vxfs, see the NetBackup

Administrator’s Guide for Oracle.
 Policy configuration 63
Selecting the snapshot method

Table 3-1 Snapshot method descriptions (continued)

Method Description

VSO For snapshots managed using Snapshot Manager.

See “About NetBackup and Snapshot Manager integration for

snapshot management” on page 253.

VSO snapshots are taken at storage array's volume or LUN level.

Additionally, wherever applicable, this also ensures snapshot(s)
at conducted at storage array's device group level, like
consistency group or volume set. In such cases, you can observe
a snapshot at the consistency group or volume set irrespective
of the number of devices the group may contain.

Some devices may be part of multiple consistency groups or

volume sets. For these devices, NetBackup finds the optimal set
of consistency groups and performs snapshot operations on those
groups.

The consistency group level snapshots is supported only for SAN

devices with standard policy type, with VSO as a FIM.
Note: For the policies that use VSO FIM, the policy storage
selection must be SLP. You cannot select STU as policy storage.
If you select STU as Policy storage, you must select the
Override policy storage selection option and select SLP, while
configuring schedules within the policy.

Configuration parameters for Snapshot Manager

The following parameters are required for certain snapshot methods. If no additional
parameters are required for the snapshot method you have chosen, the Snapshot
Options dialog states that no parameters are required.

Cache device path parameter

Specify a raw partition for the cache (logical volume or a physical disk) by entering
the cache partition’s full path name in the Value field. For example:

Solaris raw partition: /dev/rdsk/c2t0d3s3

VxVM volume: /dev/vx/rdsk/diskgroup_1/volume_3

HP LVM volume: /dev/volume_group_1/volume_3

 Policy configuration 64
Selecting the snapshot method

This setting overrides a cache that is specified on Host Properties > Clients >
Client Properties dialog > UNIX Client > Client Settings.
See “Entering the cache” on page 129.
Do not specify wildcards (such as /dev/rdsk/c2*).
A complete list of requirements is available.
See “Cache device requirements” on page 126.

Warning: The cache partition’s contents are overwritten by the nbu_snap or

VxFS_Snapshot process.

Delay in seconds between disk group split retries

parameter
Certain routine operating system processing must complete before the snapshot
volume is available and the disk group can be split. By default, NetBackup waits
60 seconds before it retries the disk group split if Number of times to retry disk
group split is 1 or more. On some systems, a 60-second delay may be too short.
Use this parameter to set a longer delay between retries.

IBC receive timeout parameter (seconds)

Determines how long NetBackup waits for the next end-of-transaction marker to
be received in the VVR replication data stream. For instance, a process may fail to
send the marker, or the network connection may be down or overloaded. If this
timeout is exceeded before the next marker is received, the backup fails.

IBC send timeout parameter (seconds)

Determines how long NetBackup waits for the next end-of-transaction marker to
be automatically removed from the VVR replication data stream. If the marker is
not removed, replication cannot continue. If this timeout is exceeded before the
current marker is removed, the backup fails.

Keep snapshot after backup parameter

This option specifies whether or not the snapshot image is retained on the mirror
disk after the backup completes (default is No). Retaining the image (Yes) enables
a quick restore from the mirror in case data is deleted from the client’s primary disk.
The image is retained on the mirror until the next time a backup is run using this
policy.No indicates that the image is deleted from the mirror as soon as the backup
completes.
 Policy configuration 65
Selecting the snapshot method

If the client is restarted, the snapshots that have been kept must be remounted
before they can be used for a restore. You can use the bpfis command to discover
the images.
See the bpfis man page or the NetBackup Commands manual.
Note however that NetBackup automatically remounts Instant Recovery snapshots.
If the snapshot is on an EMC, Hitachi, or HP disk array, and you want to use
hardware-level restore, important information is available.
See the Warning under Hardware-level disk restore in the NetBackup Snapshot
Manager Configuration document. This document may be accessed from the
following location:
http://www.veritas.com/docs/000081320

Maximum number of volumes to resynchronize

concurrently parameter
For the configurations that have sufficient I/O bandwidth, multiple volumes can be
resynchronized simultaneously, to complete resynchronization sooner. This
parameter specifies the number of volume pairs that are resynchronized
simultaneously. A volume pair consists of a source volume and its snapshot (or
mirror) volume.
The default is 1, which means that volume pairs are resynchronized one at a time.
Accept the default if the I/O bandwidth in your clients and disk storage cannot
support simultaneous synchronization of volumes. A major factor in I/O bandwidth
is the number and speed of HBAs on each client.

Maximum Snapshots parameter (Instant Recovery only)

One of several options for determining when Instant Recovery snapshots are deleted.
Policy validation fails if there is a mismatch of retention found on the snapshot. For
example, if the Maximum Snapshots (Instant Recovery only) parameter is set
to any value other than Managed by SLP and the SLP used in the same policy has
Fixed retention for the Snapshot job the policy validation fails. If you have such a
policy configured on a pre- 7.6 NetBackup primary server, it is advisable that you
validate and correct the policy after you upgrade to a NetBackup 10.2 primary
server.
See “Means of controlling snapshots” on page 107.
 Policy configuration 66
Selecting the snapshot method

Number of times to retry disk group split parameter

After the FlashSnap snapshot is created, the disk group must be split to make the
snapshot data accessible to the alternate client. For a short time, certain routine
operating system processing must complete before the snapshot volume is available
and the disk group can be split. The disk group cannot be split before the OS has
made the volume available.
Use this parameter to set the number of times to retry the disk group split. The
default is 0 (no retries): if the first attempt to split the disk group does not succeed,
the backup fails.
You can also set the Delay in seconds between disk group split retries option.

Provider Type parameter

Indicates the type of VSS snapshot provider that creates the snapshot.

0-auto (the default) If the policy is not configured for Instant Recovery, you can
select this option. The auto option attempts to select the
available provider in this order: Hardware, Software, System.

For an Instant Recovery backup, you must select the

appropriate provider type (not 0-auto) and snapshot attribute;
otherwise, the backup fails.

For example: To use a hardware provider to back up a

CLARiiON array using the EMC_CLARiiON_SnapView_Clone
method, you must select 3-hardware as the provider type
and 2-plex as the snapshot attribute.

1-system Use the Microsoft system provider, for a block-level copy on

write snapshot.

■ Unlike options 2 and 3, the Microsoft system provider

does not require any additional software or hardware.
■ The Microsoft system provider does not support off-host
backup, such as alternate client backup. For off-host
backup, select option 2 or 3, depending on your
environment.

2-software For instance, use the Veritas Storage Foundations provider,

for VxVM volumes. The software provider intercepts I/O
requests at the software level between the file system and
the volume manager.
 Policy configuration 67
Selecting the snapshot method

3-hardware Use the hardware provider for your disk array. A hardware
provider manages the VSS snapshot at the hardware level
by working with a hardware storage adapter or controller. For
example, if you want to back up an EMC CLARiiON or HP
EVA array by means of the array’s snapshot provider, select
3-hardware.

■ Depending on your array and on the snapshot attribute

you select, certain preconfiguration of the array may be
required.
See the appropriate topic for your disk array and snapshot
method.
See “Important note on VSS and disk arrays” on page 69.

Resynchronize mirror in background parameter

This option determines whether or not the backup job completes before the
resynchronize operation has finished (default is No).Yes means that a resynchronize
request is issued, but the backup does not wait for the resync operation to
complete.No means that the backup job cannot reach completion until the
resynchronize operation has finished.
Choosing Yes may allow more efficient use of backup resources. If two backups
need the same tape drive, the second can start even though the resynchronize
operation for the first job has not completed.

Snapshot Attribute parameter

Indicates the type of VSS snapshot to be created.

0-unspecified If the policy is not configured for Instant Recovery, you can
select this option.

For an Instant Recovery backup, you must select a snapshot

attribute of 1 or 2; otherwise, the backup fails.

1-differential Use a copy-on-write type of snapshot. For example, to back

up an EMC CLARiiON array using the
EMC_CLARiiON_SnapView_Snapshot method, select
differential.

2-plex Use a clone or a mirror type of snapshot. For example, to

back up an EMC CLARiiON array using the
EMC_CLARiiON_SnapView_Clone method, select plex.
 Policy configuration 68
Selecting the snapshot method

Sync I/O delay in milliseconds parameter (UNIX only)

Specifies the delay in milliseconds between synchronizing successive sets of regions
as specified by the value of the previous parameter (Sync region size in MB). You
can use this option to change the effect of synchronization on system performance.
The default is 0 milliseconds (no delay). Increasing this value slows down
synchronization. It also reduces the competition for I/O bandwidth with other
processes that may access the volume at the same time.
This option is the same as the slow=iodelay parameter on the VxVM vxsnap
command. For more details on the slow=iodelay parameter, see the Veritas Volume
Manager Administrator’s Guide.

Sync region size in MB parameter (UNIX only)

Specifies the size in MB of each I/O request that is used when the regions of a
volume are synchronized. Specifying a larger size causes synchronization to
complete sooner, but with greater effect on the performance of other processes
that access the volume. 1 MB (the default) is the minimum value that is suggested
for high-performance array and controller hardware. The specified value is rounded
to a multiple of the volume's region size.
This option is the same as the iosize=size parameter on the VxVM vxsnap command.
For more details on the iosize=size parameter, see the Veritas Volume Manager
Administrator’s Guide.

Wait for mirror sync completion parameter

This parameter applies only to the off-host backups that use the NetBackup Media
Server or Third-Party Copy Device backup method.
With the default setting 1 (Yes), this parameter specifies that full-sized instant
snapshots are not available for backup until the mirror synchronization is complete.
Before synchronization is complete, some of the data that is required for the backup
resides on the source disks but not on the snapshot disks. If the media server has
access to the snapshot disks but does not have access to the source disks, and if
the backup starts before the snapshot disks are fully synchronized with the source,
the backup fails.
For a NetBackup Media Server or Third-Party Copy Device backup—if the media
server cannot access the source disks—set this parameter to 1. If both the source
and the snapshot disks are visible to the media server, you can set this parameter
to 0 (No).
 Policy configuration 69
Configuring backup scripts

Important note on VSS and disk arrays

To back up a Windows client with the VSS method, please note the following about
snapshot parameter values:
■ If you selected a Provider Type of 3 (hardware) and a Snapshot Attribute of
2 (plex): You must configure an appropriate number of clones or mirrors in the
disk array, depending on the value that is specified for the Maximum Snapshots
(Instant Recovery only) parameter. If the Maximum Snapshots parameter is
set to 3, you must configure three clones or mirrors. If you do not want to use
Instant Recovery and the Maximum Snapshots parameter is 1, you need only
configure one clone or mirror.
■ You must also synchronize the clones or mirrors with the disk array source
device before starting the backup. If the clones or mirrors are not synchronized
before the backup begins, VSS cannot select a clone or mirror on which to create
the snapshot. The backup fails.
See “Configuration parameters for Snapshot Manager” on page 63.

Synchronize mirror before the backup parameter

Determines whether or not the primary and the mirror devices are automatically
synchronized (if they were not already synchronized) before the backup begins.
Default is No.
Specify Yes to have unsynchronized devices synchronized before the backup
begins.No means that unsynchronized devices are not synchronized before the
backup starts. In this case (No), if the primary and the mirror devices are not
synchronized, the backup cannot succeed.

Snapshot Resources
To configure the disk array methods, see the chapter titled Configuration of snapshot
methods for disk arrays:
See “Disk array configuration tasks” on page 152.

Configuring backup scripts

For backups using a snapshot method, you can run scripts before and after the
snapshot by adding directives to the Backup Selections list, as follows.
To configure backup scripts
1 On the primary server, open the NetBackup Administration Console.
2 Click Policies.
 Policy configuration 70
Configuring backup scripts

3 In the All Policies pane, double-click the name of the policy.

The Change Policy dialog appears.
4 Click the Backup Selections tab.
5 Add the following directive to the start of the Backup Selections list:

METHOD=USER_DEFINED

6 Add one or both of the following directive(s), as required.

DB_BEGIN_BACKUP_CMD=your_begin_script_path
DB_END_BACKUP_CMD=your_end_script_path

Note: DB_BEGIN_BACKUP_CMD and DB_END_BACKUP_CMD directives are not

supported for Windows clients.

The arguments (arg) are optional.

For example:

In this example, the script shutdown_db.ksh is run before the backup, and
restart_db.ksh is run after the snapshot is created.
 Policy configuration 71
About using alternate client backup

About using alternate client backup

Alternate client backup is off-host in that all backup processing is off-loaded to
another client. Off-loading the work to another client saves computing resources
on the original client. The alternate client handles the backup I/O processing and
the backup has little effect on the original client.

Alternate client backup requirements

Before you configure a policy for alternate client backup, make sure the following
have been done:
■ The client data must be configured as required by the snapshot method. The
alternate client must have access to the snapshot devices.
■ For the FlashSnap and VVR snapshot methods, the following must be installed:
VxVM 3.2 or later for UNIX, VxVM 4.0 or later for Linux and AIX, or VxVM 3.1
or later for Windows. Also, volumes must be configured over the primary host’s
disks. The VxVM FlashSnap or VVR license must also be installed.
■ User and group identification numbers (UIDs and GIDs) for the files to back up
must be available to the primary client and the alternate client.
■ Alternate client backup on Windows does not support incremental the backups
that are based on archive bit. Instead, use incremental backups that are based
on timestamp.
See “About incremental backup of mirror-based snapshots” on page 76. for
more information.
■ The primary client and alternate client must run the same version of NetBackup.
For example, the use of a later version of NetBackup on the primary client and
an earlier version on the alternate client is not supported.
■ The primary client and alternate client must run the same operating system,
volume manager, and file system. For each of these I/O system components,
the alternate client must be at the same level as the primary client, or higher
level.
Table 3-2 lists the supported configurations.

Table 3-2 Alternate client requirements

If primary client is: Alternate client must be:

Windows Windows, at same level as primary client or higher

Solaris Solaris, at same level as primary client or higher

HP HP, at same level as primary client or higher

 Policy configuration 72
Configuring alternate client backup

Table 3-2 Alternate client requirements (continued)

If primary client is: Alternate client must be:

AIX AIX, at same level as primary client or higher

Red Hat Red Hat, at same level as primary client or higher

SUSE SUSE, at same level as primary client or higher

VxFS 3.4 or later (VxFS 3.3 VxFS, at same level as primary client or higher
for HP, VxFS 4.0 for AIX
and Linux)

VxVM 3.2 or later (UNIX) VxVM, at same level as primary client or higher.

VxVM 3.1 or later Note: For the VVR method, the alternate client must be at
(Windows) exactly the same level as primary client.

For VxVM on Windows, use VxVM 3.1 or later with all the latest
VxVM service packs and updates.

See “Configuring alternate client backup” on page 72.

Configuring alternate client backup

For an alternate client backup policy, make the following selections. Some of the
options depend on your hardware configuration and product licenses.
To configure a policy for alternate client backup
1 For Policy type, choose Standard, FlashBackup, FlashBackup-Windows,
MS-Windows, MS-Exchange-Server, MS-SQL-Server, DB2, SAP, or Oracle.
2 Click Perform snapshot backups.
3 Click Perform off-host backup.
4 Click Use alternate client and select the alternate client from the drop-down
list or type it in.
5 Click Options if you want to choose the snapshot method.
Snapshot method: You can select the auto method, or the following:
■ FlashSnap, for a disk group split configuration, with VxVM 3.2 or later with
the FlashSnap feature.
■ VVR, for a UNIX replication host; requires VxVM 3.2 or later with VVR
feature.
 Policy configuration 73
Configuring alternate client backup

■ VSS, for snapshots using the Volume Shadow Copy Service of Windows.
This method is for Windows clients, where the client data is stored on a
disk array such as EMC or Hitachi, or in a Veritas Storage Foundation for
Windows 4.1 or later volume. Supports Exchange.
■ The disk array-related snapshot methods.

Before running the alternate client backup

Your volume configuration must be prepared and tested for the snapshot method
you plan to use.
See the topics on software-based snapshot methods:
See “Software-based snapshot methods” on page 125.
See “Configuring alternate client backup” on page 72.

Example alternate client backup configurations

Consider the following example configurations:

Table 3-3 Alternate client backup configurations

Configuration Description

Client data is on a Dell EMC disk array To run the backup on an alternate client: choose
Standard as the policy type, select Perform
snapshot backups, Perform off-host backup,
and Use alternate client. Then select the alternate
client. On the Snapshot Options display, specify
VSO snapshot method.

To run the backup on an alternate client: choose

Standard as the policy type, select Perform
snapshot backups, Perform off-host backup,
and Use alternate client. Then select the alternate
client. On the Snapshot Options display, specify
an EMC TimeFinder snapshot method.

If the data is in an Oracle database, select Oracle

as the policy type.
 Policy configuration 74
Policy configuration tips

Table 3-3 Alternate client backup configurations (continued)

Configuration Description

Client data is replicated on a remote To run the backup on the replication host (alternate
host client), choose: Standard as the policy type, select
Perform snapshot backups, Perform off-host
backup, and Use alternate client. Then select
the alternate client (the replication host). On the
Snapshot Options display, specify the VVR
snapshot method.

Client data is on a JBOD array in VxVM To run the backup on the alternate client, choose:
volumes with snapshot mirrors Standard (for UNIX client) or MS-Windows
configured (Windows client) as the policy type and Perform
snapshot backups, Perform off-host backup,
and Use alternate client. Then select the alternate
client. On the Snapshot Options display, specify
the FlashSnap method.

If the client data consists of many files, or to do

individual file restore from raw partition backups:
select FlashBackup or FlashBackup-Windows
as the policy type.
Note: Other combinations of policy type and
snapshot method are possible, depending on many
factors: your hardware configuration, file system
and volume manager configuration, and installed
NetBackup product licenses.

Policy configuration tips

The following topics relate to policy creation.

Maximum pathname length

For snapshots, the maximum file list pathname length is approximately 1000
characters (1023 characters for the backups that do not use a snapshot method).
The reason is that the snapshot is created on a new mount point which is derived
from the original Backup Selections list path name. If the new mount point plus
the original file path exceeds the system-defined maximum path name length (1023
characters on many systems): the backup fails with a status code 1, "the requested
operation was partially successful."
Refer to the NetBackup Administrator’s Guide, Volume I, for other NetBackup
file-path rules.
 Policy configuration 75
Policy configuration tips

Snapshot tips
Note the following tips:
■ In the Backup Selections list, be sure to specify absolute path names. Refer
to the NetBackup Administrator’s Guide, Volume I for help specifying files in the
Backup Selections list.
■ If an entry in the Backup Selections list is a symbolic (soft) link to another file,
Snapshot Manager backs up the link, not the file to which the link points. This
NetBackup behavior is standard. To back up the actual data, include the file
path to the actual data.
■ On the other hand, a raw partition can be specified in its usual symbolic-link
form (such as /dev/rdsk/c0t1d0s1). Do not specify the actual device name
that /dev/rdsk/c0t1d0s1 points to. For raw partitions, Snapshot Manager
automatically resolves the symbolic link to the actual device.
■ The Cross mount points policy attribute is not available for the policies that
are configured for snapshots. This option is not available because NetBackup
does not cross file system boundaries during a backup of a snapshot. A backup
of a high-level file system, such as / (root), does not back up the files residing
in lower-level file systems. Files in the lower-level file systems are backed up if
they are specified as separate entries in the Backup Selections list. For
instance, to back up /usr and /var, both /usr and /var must be included as
separate entries in the Backup Selections list.
For more information on Cross mount points, refer to the NetBackup
Administrator’s Guide, Volume I.
■ On Windows, the \ must be entered in the Backup Selections list after the drive
letter (for example, D:\).
See “Configuring a FlashBackup policy for NetBackup Administration Console”
on page 88.

Multiple data streams

Multiplexing is not supported for the Third-Party Copy Device method. (Keep in
mind that multiplexing is not the same as multiple data streams.)
Make sure that these settings allow the number of active streams to be equal to or
greater than the number of streams in the Backup Selections list:
■ Policy attribute
Limit jobs per policy
■ Schedule setting
Media multiplexing
 Policy configuration 76
Policy configuration tips

■ Storage unit setting

Maximum multiplexing per drive
■ System configuration setting
Maximum jobs per client

About incremental backup of mirror-based snapshots

For incremental backup of a mirror type snapshot, note the following issues.

Incremental backup options (Windows only)

NetBackup provides two incremental backup options for Windows clients:
■ Based on timestamps
■ Based on archive bit (for Windows clients only)
These options are available in the NetBackup Administration Console under Host
Properties for the client. Right-click the client and select Properties. The Client
Properties dialog box is displayed. Click Windows Client > Client Properties.
These options are described in the NetBackup Administrator’s Guide, Volume I.
If the snapshot is created on a mirror, such as a Volume Manager volume using
VxVM, archive bit incremental backups cannot be used. Archive bit incremental
backups are incompatible with snapshots on mirrors. For incremental backups,
select Based on time-stamps.

Snapshot sequence and access time

After a mirror snapshot backup, the access time of the files in the snapshot is reset
to the access time of the original (primary) disk data. The access time of the
snapshot data continues to match that of the data on the primary until the mirror is
resynchronized with the primary. This behavior is normal for Snapshot Manager
and applies to primary client backups as well as to off-host backups.
 Policy configuration 77
About disabling snapshots

Figure 3-1 Simplified View of Snapshot Sequence And Access Time

NetBackup
client

Primary disk

Mirror disk with 4

snapshot

The figure shows the following phases:

Phase Snapshot sequence and access time description

Phase 1 Last file access on primary: 08/29/05 at 8:01 pm

Phase 2 Mirror was synchronized with primary and split at 8:24 pm.

Phase 3 Snapshot taken on mirror at 8:24 pm.

Phase 4 Backup of mirror was completed at 10:14 pm; file access time on mirror
is reset to 8:01 pm.

About disabling snapshots

This section explains how to turn off the creation of snapshots for certain clients
but to continue making non-snapshot backups of those clients.
Two different products in NetBackup perform snapshots: Snapshot Manager
(described in this guide) and Windows Open File Backups (described in the
NetBackup Administrator’s Guide, Volume I). These products operate independently
of each other. Disabling one does not disable the other.

Disabling Open File Backups on Windows

Do the following steps in the NetBackup Administration Console.
 Policy configuration 78
About disabling snapshots

To disable Open File Backup snapshots for individual clients

1 Click Host Properties > primary Servers > double-click primary server >
Client Attributes.
2 Click the Windows Open File Backup tab.
3 Select a client that is enabled for open file backups.
4 Clear the check box for Enable Windows Open File Backups for this client.
5 Click Apply.

Disabling Snapshot Manager snapshots

Use the following procedure to disable Snapshot Manager snapshots.

Warning: All features of Snapshot Manager depend on snapshots. Clearing the

Perform snapshot backups check box disables all features of Snapshot Manager,
such as off-host backup and Instant Recovery. Backups that depend on these
features are disabled.

To disable Snapshot Manager snapshots for individual clients

1 Determine which Snapshot Manager policies are configured for the clients on
which you want to turn off snapshots.
2 In the NetBackup Administration Console, click NetBackup Management >
Policies.
3 In the All Policies pane, double-click a Snapshot Manager policy.
4 In the Snapshot Manager pane of the Attributes tab, clear the check box for
Perform block level incremental backups.
5 In the same pane, clear the check box for Perform snapshot backups.
 Policy configuration 79
About disabling snapshots

Note: Note the following regarding FlashBackup

If the policy type is FlashBackup-Windows, select a non-FlashBackup policy type,
such as MS-Windows, which clears the Perform snapshot backups check box.
If the policy type is FlashBackup and the policy was configured to use the snapctl
driver for Solaris clients or VxFS snap driver for HP clients (with CACHE= entries
in the Backup Selections tab): select a non-FlashBackup policy type, such as
Standard. Otherwise, the policy continues to create snapshots even though the
Perform snapshot backups check box is cleared.
Backups of raw partitions using policy types other than FlashBackup or
FlashBackup-Windows do not allow individual file restore. Individual file restore
from a raw partition backup is a feature of FlashBackup.
 Chapter 4
NAS snapshot
configuration
This chapter includes the following topics:

■ About NAS snapshot overview

■ Notes on NAS_Snapshot methods

■ Logging on to the NetBackup Client Service as the Administrator

■ Setting up a policy for NAS snapshots

■ NAS snapshot naming scheme

About NAS snapshot overview

By means of Snapshot Client and the NDMP V4 snapshot extension, NetBackup
can make snapshots of client data on a NAS (NDMP) host. The client data must
reside on the NAS host and be accessible on the client through an NFS mount on
UNIX or CIFS on Windows.
A NAS snapshot is a point-in-time disk image. Snapshots can be retained on disk
as long as desired. The data can be efficiently restored from disk by means of the
Snapshot Client Instant Recovery feature.
NAS-Data-Protection policy is a robust approach to backup the data residing on
NAS storage. It is also known as dynamic NAS or D-NAS policy. Refer to the
NetBackup NAS Administrator's Guide to backup your NAS volumes using this
approach.

Note: NetBackup for NDMP software is required in addition to Snapshot Client.

 NAS snapshot configuration 81
Notes on NAS_Snapshot methods

See the following diagram for an overview.

Figure 4-1 NAS snapshot environment

NetBackup for NDMP master server, with

Snapshot Client software

LAN / WAN

NetBackup client
NDMP host (NAS filer)
CIFS or NFS mount

Data is mounted on client and resides on NAS (NDMP) Snapshot of client volume is
host. made here.

In the NetBackup policy, enter the following:

■ For Windows client:
\\ndmp_hostname\share_name
\\nas_array\share_name

■ For UNIX client:

/NFS_mountpoint

Note: Windows pathnames must use the Universal Naming Convention (UNC).

NetBackup creates snapshots on the NAS-attached disk only, not on the storage
devices that are attached to the NetBackup server or the client.

Notes on NAS_Snapshot methods

The following notes apply to backups that are made with the NAS_Snapshot method:
■ Snapshots of NAS host data are supported for NetBackup clients running
Windows (32-bit system and 64-bit system), Solaris, Linux, and AIX.
■ Note these software requirements and licensing requirements:
■ Contact Veritas support to ensure that you have the appropriate licensing
for this feature.
 NAS snapshot configuration 82
Notes on NAS_Snapshot methods

■ NetBackup clients that are used to perform backups must have Snapshot
Manager installed.
■ On NetBackup clients for Oracle: NetBackup for Oracle database agent
software must be installed on all clients.

Note: Contact the Veritas sales team to ensure that you have the appropriate
licensing for this option.

■ The NAS host must support NDMP protocol version V4 and the NDMP V4
snapshot extension, with additional changes made to the snapshot extension.
The NetBackup Snapshot Manager Configuration online pdf contains a list of
NAS vendors that NetBackup supports for NAS snapshots. This online pdf
includes requirements specific to your NAS vendor.
See: http://www.veritas.com/docs/000081320
■ NetBackup must have access to each NAS host on which a NAS snapshot is
to be created. To set up this authorization, you can use either of the following:
■ In the NetBackup Administration Console: the Media and Device
Management > Credentials > NDMP Hosts option or the NetBackup Device
Configuration Wizard.
OR
■ The following command:

tpconfig -add -nh ndmp_host -user_id user_ID -password password

■ The client data must reside on a NAS host and be mounted on the client by
means of NFS on UNIX or CIFS on Windows. For NFS mounts, the data must
not be auto-mounted, but must be hard (or manually) mounted.
■ For NAS snapshot, you must create a NAS_Snapshot policy.
See “Setting up a policy for NAS snapshots” on page 83.
■ On Windows clients, to restore files from a NAS_Snapshot backup, the
NetBackup Client Service must be logged in as the Administrator account. The
NetBackup Client Service must not be logged in as the local system account.
The Administrator account allows NetBackup to view the directories on the
NDMP host to which the data is to be restored. If you attempt to restore files
from a NAS_Snapshot and the NetBackup Client Service is logged in as the
local system account, the restore fails.
 NAS snapshot configuration 83
Logging on to the NetBackup Client Service as the Administrator

Logging on to the NetBackup Client Service as

the Administrator
Use the following procedure.
To log on to the NetBackup Client Service as the Administrator
1 In Windows Services, double-click the NetBackup Client Service.
2 Check the Log On tab: if the service is not logged on as Administrator, stop
the service.
3 Change the log in to the Administrator account and restart the service.
4 Retry the restore.

Setting up a policy for NAS snapshots

This section explains how to set up a policy for making snapshots of NAS data.
To set up a policy for NAS snapshots
1 Open the NetBackup Administration Console on the NetBackup for NDMP
server.
2 Click NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane.
3 In the All Policies pane, double-click an existing policy or right-click and create
a new one.
4 For Policy type: select Standard for UNIX clients, MS-Windows for Windows
clients, SAP for UNIX clients, or Oracle for UNIX clients that are configured in
an Oracle database.
5 For Storage unit, select Any_available if this policy is for a NAS snapshot.
Note the following:
■ Although the policy cannot execute without a specified storage unit,
NetBackup does not use the storage unit. The snapshot is created on disk
regardless of which storage unit you select. Note that the storage unit you
select is not reserved, so it is free for use by other policies.
■ For Oracle policies, the policy uses the storage unit you specify, but only
for backing up archive logs and control files.

6 Select Perform snapshot backups and Retain snapshot for Instant

Recovery or SLP management.
7 Select the Perform off-host backup and Use options.
 NAS snapshot configuration 84
Setting up a policy for NAS snapshots

8 Select Data Mover from the Use list and Network Attached Storage from the
Machinelist.
When the policy executes, NetBackup automatically selects the NAS_Snapshot
method for creating the snapshot.
As an alternative, you can manually select the NAS_Snapshot method from
the Options dialog from the policy Attributes display.
9 On the Schedule Attributes tab, select the following:
■ Instant Recovery
Choose Snapshots only. The other option (Snapshots and copy
snapshots to a storage unit) does not apply to NAS_Snapshot.
■ Override policy storage unit
If the correct storage unit was not selected on the Attributes tab, select it
here.

10 For the Backup Selections list, specify the directories, volumes, or files from
the client perspective, not from the NDMP host perspective. For example:
■ On a UNIX client, if the data resides in /vol/vol1 on the NDMP host nas1,
and is NFS mounted to /mnt2/home on the UNIX client: specify /mnt2/home
in the Backup Selections list.
■ On a Windows client, if the data resides in /vol/vol1 on the NDMP host
nas1, and is shared by means of CIFS as vol1 on the Windows client,
specify \\nas1\vol1.
■ Windows path names must use the Universal Naming Convention (UNC),
in the form \\server_name\share_name.
■ The client data must reside on a NAS host. The data must be mounted on
the client by means of NFS on UNIX or shared by means of CIFS on
Windows. For NFS mounts, the data must be manually mounted by means
of the mount command, not auto-mounted.
■ For a client in the policy, all paths must be valid, or the backup fails.
■ The ALL_LOCAL_DRIVES entry is not allowed in the Backup Selections
list.

11 On the policy Attributes tab: if you click Apply or OK, a validation process
checks the policy and reports any errors. If you click Close, no validation is
performed.
 NAS snapshot configuration 85
NAS snapshot naming scheme

NAS snapshot naming scheme

The format of a NAS snapshot name is as follows:

NAS+NBU+PFI+client_name+policy_name+sr+volume_name+date_time_string

Note the following:

■ The snapshot name always begins with NAS+NBU+PFI+
■ The plus sign (+) separates name components.
■ NAS snapshots reside on the NDMP host (NAS filer).
For example:

NAS+NBU+PFI+sponge+NAS_snapshot_pol1+sr+Vol_15G+2005.05.31.13h41m41s

Where:
Client name = sponge
Policy name = NAS_snapshot_pol1
sr = indicates that the snapshot was created for a NAS snapshot.
Volume name = Vol_15G
Date/Time = 2005.05.31.13h41m41s
 Chapter 5
FlashBackup configuration
This chapter includes the following topics:

■ About FlashBackup

■ FlashBackup restrictions

■ Configuring a FlashBackup policy for NetBackup Administration Console

■ Configuring FlashBackup policy for backward compatibility (UNIX only)

■ Regular recovery using FlashBackup and FlashBackup Windows policy for

NetBackup web UI

About FlashBackup
FlashBackup is a policy type that combines the speed of raw-partition backups with
the ability to restore individual files. The features that distinguish FlashBackup from
other raw-partition backups and standard file system backups are these:
■ Increases backup performance as compared to standard file-ordered backup
methods. For example, a FlashBackup of a file system completes faster than
other types of backup in the following case:
■ the file system contains a large number of files
■ most of the file system blocks are allocated

■ Enables restore of individual files from raw-partition backups.

■ Backs up the following file systems: VxFS (Solaris, HP, Linux, AIX), ufs (Solaris),
Online JFS (HP), and NTFS (Windows).
See “FlashBackup restrictions” on page 87.
■ Supports multiple data streams, to further increase the performance of
raw-partition backups when multiple devices are in the Backup Selections list.
 FlashBackup configuration 87
FlashBackup restrictions

■ For a complete list of supported platforms, snapshot methods, and data types,
see the NetBackup Snapshot Manager Compatibility document:
http://www.netbackup.com/compatibility

FlashBackup restrictions
Note the following restrictions:
■ FlashBackup policies do not support file systems that HSM manages.
■ FlashBackup policies for UNIX clients do not support Instant Recovery.
■ FlashBackup does not support VxFS storage checkpoints that the
VxFS_Checkpoint snapshot method uses.
■ FlashBackup supports the following I/O system components: ufs, VxFS, and
Windows NTFS file systems, VxVM volumes and LVM volumes, and raw disks.
Other components (such as non-Veritas storage replicators or other non-Veritas
volume managers) are not supported.
■ FlashBackup on Linux supports only the VxFS file system on VxVM volumes.
For Linux clients, no other file system is supported, and VxFS file systems are
not supported without VxVM volumes.
■ FlashBackup on AIX supports only the VxFS file system, with VxVM or LVM
volumes. For AIX clients, no other file system is supported, and the data must
be over a VxVM or LVM volume.
■ Note these restrictions for Windows clients:
■ The use of FlashBackup in a Windows Server Failover Clustering (WSFC)
environment is supported, with the following limitation: Raw partition restores
can only be performed when the disk being restored is placed in extended
maintenance mode or removed from the WSFC resource group.
■ FlashBackup-Windows and Linux policies do not support a Client Direct
restore.
■ FlashBackup-Windows policies support Instant Recovery, but only for backup
to a storage unit (not for snapshot-only backups).
■ FlashBackup-Windows policies do not support the backup of Windows
system-protected files (the System State, such as the Registry and Active
Directory).
■ FlashBackup-Windows policies do not support the backup of Windows OS
partitions that contain the Windows system files (usually C:).
 FlashBackup configuration 88
Configuring a FlashBackup policy for NetBackup Administration Console

■ FlashBackup-Windows policies do not support the backup of Windows

System database files (such as RSM Database and Terminal Services
Database).
■ FlashBackup-Windows policies do not support "include" lists (exceptions to
client "exclude" lists).
■ A restore from a FlashBackup-Windows image will not work if the destination
client is not a Windows host.
■ FlashBackup-Windows supports the backup and restore of NTFS files that
are compressed. FlashBackup-Windows does support Windows NTFS
encryption and compression, but not NetBackup's compression or encryption.

Note: The compressed NTFS files are backed up and restored as

compressed files (they are not uncompressed).

■ FlashBackup (UNIX) does not support any type of compression or encryption,

whether the encryption/compression is set in the NetBackup policy or in the
Operating System.

Restores of Windows encrypted files and hard links

When restoring individual files from FlashBackup-Windows images, note: if the files
being restored are encrypted or are hard links, the NetBackup Client Service must
be logged on as Administrator. Under services on the control panel, change the log
on for the NetBackup Client Services from Local System Account to
Administrator.

Configuring a FlashBackup policy for NetBackup

Administration Console
Use the following procedure.
 FlashBackup configuration 89
Configuring a FlashBackup policy for NetBackup Administration Console

To configure a FlashBackup policy

1 On the primary server, open the NetBackup Administration Console.
2 Click Policies.

3 In the All Policies pane, right-click and select New Policy... to create a new
policy.
 FlashBackup configuration 90
Configuring a FlashBackup policy for NetBackup Administration Console

4 On the Attributes tab, select the Policy type: FlashBackup for UNIX clients,
or FlashBackup-Windows for Windows clients.
FlashBackup-Windows supports the backup and restore of NTFS files that are
compressed.
The files are backed up and restored as compressed files (they are not
uncompressed).
5 Specify the storage unit.
FlashBackup and FlashBackup-Windows policies support both tape storage
units and disk storage units.
6 Select a snapshot method in one of the following ways:
■ Click Perform snapshot backups on the Attributes tab.
For a new policy, NetBackup selects a snapshot method when the backup
starts.
For a copy of a policy that was configured for a snapshot method, click the
Snapshot Client Options option and set the method to auto. NetBackup
selects a snapshot method when the backup starts.
■ Click Perform snapshot backups, click the Snapshot Client Options
option and select a snapshot method.
See “Selecting the snapshot method” on page 58.

7 Windows only: to enable the backup for Instant Recovery, select Retain
snapshots for Instant Recovery or SLP management.
Instant Recovery is not supported for FlashBackup with UNIX clients.
8 UNIX only: if you selected nbu_snap or VxFS_Snapshot as the snapshot
method, specify a raw partition as cache, in either of these ways:
■ Use the Host Properties node of the Administration Console to specify the
default cache device path for snapshots. Click Host Properties > Clients,
select the client, then Actions > Properties, UNIX Client > Client Settings.
■ Use the Snapshot Client Options dialog to specify the cache.
See “Entering the cache” on page 129.
The partition to be used for the cache must exist on all clients that are
included in the policy.

9 To shift backup I/O to an alternate client, or to a NetBackup media server or

third-party copy device (UNIX clients only), select Perform off-host backup.
For FlashBackup, the Use data mover option is supported for UNIX clients
only.
 FlashBackup configuration 91
Configuring a FlashBackup policy for NetBackup Administration Console

10 To reduce backup time when more than one raw partition is specified in the
Backup Selections list, select Allow multiple data streams.
11 Use the Schedules tab to create a schedule.
FlashBackup policies support full and incremental types only. User backup and
archive schedule types are not supported.
A full FlashBackup backs up the entire disk or raw partition that was selected
in the Backup Selections tab (see next step). An incremental backup backs
up individual files that have changed since their last full backup, and also backs
up their parent directories. The incremental backup does not back up files in
parent directories unless the files have changed since the last full backup.
For incremental backups, a file is considered “changed” if its Modified Time
or Create Time value was changed.
Note on FlashBackup-Windows: The NTFS Master File Table does not update
the Create Time or Modified Time of a file or folder when the following changes
are made:
■ Changes to file name or directory name.
■ Changes to file or directory security.
■ Changes to file or directory attributes (read only, hidden, system, archive
bit).

12 On the Backup Selections tab, specify the drive letter or mounted volume
(Windows) or the raw disk partition (UNIX) containing the files to back up.

For Windows

Windows examples \\.\E:

\\.\E:\mounted_volume\

where:

■ \\.\E:is a Windows disk volume mounted on a drive

letter.
■ \\.\E:\mounted_volume\ (note the trailing backslash)
is a Windows disk volume without a drive letter
mounted on a directory (Windows reparse point).
The drive must be designated exactly as shown (E:\
is not correct). Backing up the drive containing the
Windows system files (usually the C drive) is not
supported.

Solaris examples /dev/rdsk/c1t0d0s6

/dev/vx/rdsk/volgrp1/vol1
 FlashBackup configuration 92
Configuring FlashBackup policy for backward compatibility (UNIX only)

HP examples /dev/rdsk/c1t0d0
/dev/vx/rdsk/volgrp1/vol1

For UNIX Backup Selections tab must specify the raw (character)
device corresponding to the block device over which the
file system is mounted. For example, to back up /usr,
mounted on /dev/dsk/c1t0d0s6, enter raw device
/dev/rdsk/c1t0d0s6. Note the r in /rdsk.
Note: Wildcards (such as/dev/rdsk/c0*) are not
permitted. Specifying the actual device file name such as
/devices/pci@1f,0/pci@1/scsi@3/sd@1,0:d,rawis
not supported.

Note: Wildcards (such as/dev/rdsk/c0*) are not permitted. Specifying the

actual device file name such as
/devices/pci@1f,0/pci@1/scsi@3/sd@1,0:d,rawis not supported.

13 Use the Clients tab to select clients to back up.

Each client in the client list must contain all the raw partitions that are specified
in the Backup Selections tab. Exclude and include lists cannot be used to
circumvent this requirement.
14 On the policy Attributes tab: if you click Apply or OK, a validation process
checks the policy and reports any errors. If you click Close, no validation is
performed.

Configuring FlashBackup policy for backward

compatibility (UNIX only)
Before NetBackup 5.0, FlashBackup was a separate product with two built-in
snapshot methods: snapctl driver (nbu_snap) for Solaris clients and a VxFS snap
driver for HP clients. The configuration procedure for a pre-5.0 FlashBackup policy
was different from the procedure in 5.0 and later, as follows:
■ Unless FlashBackup was combined with NetBackup 4.5 ServerFree Agent, the
snapshot methods were preset to the snapctl driver (Solaris) and VxFS snap
driver (HP).
■ The cache partition for the snapctl driver and VxFS snap driver had to be
specified as a CACHE= entry in the policy’s file list.
 FlashBackup configuration 93
Configuring FlashBackup policy for backward compatibility (UNIX only)

■ To use multiple data streams, other directives had to be added to the policy’s
Backup Selections (file) list.
The following procedure and related topics explain how to configure a FlashBackup
policy with a CACHE= entry in the policy’s Backup Selections list. This means of
configuration is provided for backward compatibility.
To configure FlashBackup policy for backward compatibility (UNIX only)
1 Leave Perform snapshot backups deselected on the policy Attributes tab.
NetBackup uses nbu_snap (snapctl driver) for Solaris clients or VxFS_Snapshot
for HP.
2 On the policy’s Backup Selections tab, specify at least one cache device by
means of the CACHE directive. For example:

CACHE=/dev/rdsk/c0t0d0s1

This cache partition is for storing any blocks that change in the source data
while the backup is in progress.CACHE= must precede the source data entry.
Note the following:
■ Specify the raw device, such as /dev/rdsk/c1t0d0s6. Do not specify the
block device, such as /dev/dsk/c1t0d0s6.
■ Do not specify the actual device file name. For example, the following is
not allowed:

/devices/pci@1f,0/pci@1/scsi@3/sd@1,0:d,raw

■ Wildcards (such as /dev/rdsk/c0*) are not allowed.

■ The CACHE entry must precede the entry for the source data you want to
back up.
■ All entries in the Backup Selections list, including the source data, must
be the full path name of a raw device in the form:
On Solaris: /dev/rdsk/cxtxdxsx
On HP: /dev/rdsk/cxtxdx
where x is an integer.
■ For multiple data streams, you can include multiple entries in the Backup
Selections list.
For example:

CACHE=/dev/rdsk/c1t4d0s0
/dev/rdsk/c1t4d0s7
CACHE=/dev/rdsk/c1t4d0s1
 FlashBackup configuration 94
Configuring FlashBackup policy for backward compatibility (UNIX only)

/dev/rdsk/c1t4d0s3
/dev/rdsk/c1t4d0s4

■ See “Requirements for the cache partition” on page 95.

■ See “About the cache partition” on page 94.

About the cache partition

The snapctl driver and VxFS snap driver are copy-on-write snapshot methods that
require a cache partition. For FlashBackup clients before NetBackup 5.0, the cache
partition was specified in the policy’s Files tab as a CACHE = raw_partition entry.
(The Files tab is now called the Backup Selections tab.)

Note: CACHE entries are allowed only when the policy’s Perform snapshot
backups option is deselected. If Perform snapshot backups is selected,
NetBackup attempts to back up the CACHE entry and the backup fails.

Figure 5-1 Backup Selections list with CACHE entry

All entries must specify the raw device, such /dev/rdsk/c0t0d0s1. Do not use the
actual file name; you must use the link form of cxtxdxsx.
 FlashBackup configuration 95
Configuring FlashBackup policy for backward compatibility (UNIX only)

Requirements for the cache partition

Note the following requirements:
■ Must reside on the same host as the raw partitions containing the source data
to back up.
■ Cannot be the raw partition being backed up.
■ Cannot be a mounted file system. Any data that is configured on this device
may be overwritten by the copy-on-write process.
■ On Solaris, the same cache partition may be used simultaneously by multiple
backups (two policies can use the same cache partition at the same time). On
HP, multiple backups cannot use the same cache partition simultaneously. If
multiple policies list the same cache partition on HP systems, backups naming
those policies must run at different times to prevent a failure.
■ The cache partition must have enough space to hold all the writes to the source
data that may occur during the backup. Backups during off-peak hours normally
require a smaller cache than those during peak activity.
See “Determining a size for the cache partition” on page 127.

Directives for multiple data streams

For multiple data streams, certain directives must be added to the policy’s Backup
Selections tab.
■ The number of backups that are started depends on the directives in the Backup
Selections tab.
■ The maximum number of concurrent backups depends on the number of
available drives in the storage units and the maximum jobs parameters. An
example of a maximum jobs parameter is Limit jobs per policy.

Note: Only one data stream is created for each physical device on the client. You
cannot include the same partition more than once in the Backup Selections list.

The directives that you can use in the Backup Selections list for a FlashBackup
policy are as follows:
■ NEW_STREAM

■ CACHE=value (the CACHE directive is required)

See “Requirements for the cache partition” on page 95.
■ UNSET

■ UNSET_ALL
 FlashBackup configuration 96
Configuring FlashBackup policy for backward compatibility (UNIX only)

Each backup begins as a single stream of data. The start of the Backup Selections
list up to the first NEW_STREAM directive (if any) is the first stream. Each NEW_STREAM
entry causes NetBackup to create an additional stream or backup.
Note that all file paths that are listed between NEW_STREAM directives are in the same
stream.
Table 5-1 shows a Backup Selections list that generates four backups:

Table 5-1 Example of Backup Selections list

Example On Solaris systems: On HP systems:

1 CACHE=/dev/rdsk/c1t3d0s3 CACHE=/dev/cache_group/rvol1c
/dev/rdsk/c1t0d0s6 /dev/vol_grp/rvol1

2 NEW_STREAM NEW_STREAM
/dev/rdsk/c1t1d0s1 UNSET CACHE
CACHE=/dev/cache_group/rvol2c
/dev/vol_grp/rvol2

3 NEW_STREAM NEW_STREAM
UNSET CACHE UNSET CACHE
CACHE=/dev/rdsk/c1t3d0s4 CACHE=/dev/cache_group/rvol3c
/dev/rdsk/c1t2d0s5 /dev/vol_grp/rvol3
/dev/rdsk/c1t5d0s0 /dev/vol_grp/rvol3a

4 NEW_STREAM NEW_STREAM
UNSET CACHE UNSET CACHE
CACHE=/dev/rdsk/c0t2d0s3 CACHE=/dev/cache_group/rvol4c
/dev/rdsk/c1t6d0s1 /dev/vol_grp/rvol4

The backup streams are issued as follows. The following items correspond in order
to the numbered items inTable 5-1:
1. The first stream is generated automatically and a backup is started for
/dev/rdsk/c1t0d0s6 (Solaris) or /dev/vol_grp/rvol1 (HP). The CACHE=
entry sets the cache partition to /dev/rdsk/c1t3d0s3 (Solaris) or
/dev/cache_group/rvol1c (HP).

2. The first NEW_STREAM directive (2) starts a second stream to back up

/dev/rdsk/c1t1d0s1 (Solaris) or /dev/vol_grp/rvol2 (HP). On Solaris
systems, this backup uses the same cache partition. On HP systems, a different
cache partition must be defined for each stream
(CACHE=/dev/cache_group/rvol2c).
 FlashBackup configuration 97
Regular recovery using FlashBackup and FlashBackup Windows policy for NetBackup web UI

3. The second NEW_STREAM directive (3) starts a backup for /dev/rdsk/c1t2d0s5

and /dev/rdsk/c1t5d0s0 (Solaris) or /dev/vol_grp/rvol3 and
/dev/vol_grp/rvol3a (HP). These two partitions are backed up serially within
the stream. In addition, the UNSET CACHE directive unsets the previous cache
setting and the CACHE= directive sets a new cache partition for this backup.
4. The last NEW_STREAM directive (4) starts a backup for /dev/rdsk/c1t6d0s1
(Solaris) or /dev/vol_grp/rvol4 (HP). Like the third stream, this one also
unsets the cache directive and defines a new cache partition.
Policy-specific directives such as CACHE are passed to the client with the current
stream and all subsequent streams, until the directive is redefined or unset.
If the directive is encountered again, its value is redefined.
An UNSET or UNSET_ALL directive unsets a directive that was previously defined in
the Backup Selections list. Note the following:
■ UNSET unsets a policy-specific directive so it is not passed with additional streams.
The directive that was unset can be defined again later in the Backup Selections
list to be included in the current or a later stream.
■ UNSET_ALL has the same effect as UNSET but affects all policy-specific directives
that have been defined up to this point in the Backup Selections list. If you use
it, UNSET_ALL must appear immediately after the second or later NEW_STREAM
directive.

Regular recovery using FlashBackup and

FlashBackup Windows policy for NetBackup web
UI
Use the following procedure.
Regular recovery for FlashBackup policy
1 On the primary server, open the NetBackup web UI.
2 On the left, select Recovery.
3 On the Regular recovery card, click Start recovery.
4 Select Fashbackup from the Policy type drop-down list.
5 Select Normal backups from the Restore type drop-down list.
6 Click Select client, select the Source client. Then click Apply.
7 Click Select client, select the Destination client.
 FlashBackup configuration 98
Regular recovery using FlashBackup and FlashBackup Windows policy for NetBackup web UI

8 Click Next.
9 NetBackup automatically displays the most recent backup. To select a different
date range, click Edit.
10 Select Use backup history, select the image file. Then click Apply.
11 Select the mount files or folders that you want to restore. Then click Next.
12 Select the restore target options that you want for the recovery target.
13 Select the recovery options that you want for the restore. Then click Next.
The page will show a summary of the options which you have selected for the
recovery.
14 Click Start recovery.
If you need the raw partition backups from the Restore type drop-down list, follow
the procedure below:
Recovery using Flashbackup policy with Raw partition Backups
1 Follow from Step 1 to Step 4.
2 Select Raw partition backups from the Restore type drop-down list.
3 Follow from Step 6 to Step 10.
4 Select the volume files or folders that you want to restore. Then click Next.
Make sure root node of the hierarchy is selected.
Before selecting the volume files, you need to unmount the files.
To unmount the volume use the following command:
/opt/VRTS/bin/vxumount -o mntunlock=VCS /fbu or umount /fbu

Where /fbu is the mount directory path

5 Follow from step 12 to Step 14.
For FlashBackup-Windows
Regular Recovery for FlashBackup-Windows
1 Follow from step 1 to step 3.
2 Select FlashBackup-Windows from the Policy type drop-down list.
3 Follow from step 5 to step 14.
If you need the raw partition backups for FlashBackup Windows, select the Restore
type drop-down list for FlashBackup-Windows.
See “Recovery using Flashbackup policy with Raw partition Backups” on page 98.
 FlashBackup configuration 99
Regular recovery using FlashBackup and FlashBackup Windows policy for NetBackup web UI

Note: The special drive with the convention \\.\E: is applicable for raw partition.
Even though E is visible do not select it, as its not applicable for raw partition.
 Chapter 6
Instant Recovery
configuration
This chapter includes the following topics:

■ About Instant Recovery capabilities

■ Instant Recovery requirements

■ Instant Recovery restrictions

■ Giving full server privileges to the media server

■ About Instant Recovery

■ Configuring a policy for Instant Recovery

■ About sizing the cache for Instant Recovery copy-on-write snapshots

■ About configuring VxVM

■ Modifying the VxVM or FlashSnap resync options for point in time rollback

■ Instant Recovery for databases

■ About storage lifecycle policies for snapshots

About Instant Recovery capabilities

The Instant Recovery feature of Snapshot Manager enables high-speed data retrieval
from disk by means of the standard NetBackup user interface. Note the following
features:
■ Supports NetBackup clients on Solaris, HP, AIX, Linux, and Windows. The
primary server can be on any supported operating system.
 Instant Recovery configuration 101
Instant Recovery requirements

■ Supports NetBackup clients on Linux and Windows. The primary server can be
on any supported operating system.
■ Uses snapshot technologies to create disk images.
■ Can create a snapshot and a backup to tape or disk, from one policy.
■ Enables random-access (non-sequential) restores of dispersed files from full
backups.
■ Enables block-level restore and file promotion from VxFS_Checkpoint snapshots
(UNIX) and file promotion from NAS_Snapshot. Also enables Fast File Resync
from VxVM and FlashSnap snapshots on Windows.
■ Enables rollback from the backups that were created using the following:
VxFS_Checkpoint, VxVM, FlashSnap, NAS_Snapshot, or disk array methods.
■ Enables rollback from the backups that were created using VSO method.
■ Can restore to a different path or host.
■ Provides the resource management by means of a rotation schedule.
■ Supports Oracle, Microsoft Exchange, DB2, SAP, and SQL-Server databases.
■ Supports Oracle.

Instant Recovery requirements

Note the following requirements:
■ For snapshots using Storage Checkpoints, by means of NetBackup’s
VxFS_Checkpoint method, note that Solaris clients must have VxFS 3.4 or later
(HP clients VxFS 3.5 or later, Linux and AIX clients VxFS 4.0 or later) with the
Storage Checkpoint feature.
■ For VxVM snapshot volumes on UNIX, clients must have VxVM 3.2 or later with
the FastResync feature. Linux and AIX clients require VxVM 4.0 or later. Windows
clients must have Storage Foundations for Windows version 3.1 or later.
■ For Instant Recovery with DB2, Oracle, Exchange, SAP, or SQL-Server
databases, refer to the appropriate NetBackup database agent guide.
■ For replication hosts (using NetBackup’s VVR method), clients must have VxVM
3.2 or later with the Veritas Volume Replicator feature. Linux and AIX clients
require VxVM 4.0 or later.
■ For Instant Recovery with DB2 and Oracle refer to the appropriate NetBackup
database agent guide.
 Instant Recovery configuration 102
Instant Recovery restrictions

Instant Recovery restrictions

Note the following restrictions:
■ For snapshots using Storage Checkpoints, Instant Recovery supports file systems
with the Version 4 disk layout or later. Older disk layouts must be upgraded to
Version 4 or later.
■ No-data Storage Checkpoints (those containing file system metadata only) are
not supported.
■ Instant Recovery snapshots must not be manually removed or renamed,
otherwise the data cannot be restored.
■ Instant Recovery does not support the VxVM, FlashSnap, and VVR snapshot
methods when used with VxVM volume sets.
■ On Linux, Instant Recovery is not supported by disk-array based snapshot
methods.
■ For Instant Recovery backups of data that is configured on VxVM volumes on
Windows, the VxVM volume names must be 12 characters or fewer. Otherwise,
the backup fails.
■ Any media server that is used in an Instant Recovery backup must have full
server privileges.
See “Giving full server privileges to the media server” on page 103.
■ Instant Recovery restores can fail from a backup that a FlashSnap off-host
backup policy made.
From a policy that was configured with the FlashSnap off-host backup method
and with Retain snapshots for Instant Recovery enabled, the backups that
were made at different times may create snapshot disk groups with the same
name. As a result, only one snapshot can be retained at a time. In addition,
NetBackup may not be able to remove the catalog images for the snapshots
that have expired and been deleted. It appears that you can browse the expired
snapshots and restore files from them. But the snapshots no longer exist, and
the restore fails with status 5.
■ For Instant Recovery, Veritas recommends that a primary volume be backed
up by a single Instant Recovery policy. If the same volume is backed up by two
or more Instant Recovery policies, conflicts between the policies may occur
during snapshot rotation. Data loss could result if the policies are configured for
snapshots only (if the policies do not back up the snapshots to separate storage
devices).
Consider the following example: Two policies use the same snapshot device
(or VxFS storage checkpoint) to keep Instant Recovery snapshots of volume_1.
 Instant Recovery configuration 103
Giving full server privileges to the media server

■ Instant Recovery policy_A creates a snapshot of volume_1 on the designated

snapshot device or storage checkpoint.
■ When Instant Recovery policy_B runs, it removes the snapshot made by
policy_A from the snapshot device or storage checkpoint. It then creates its
own snapshot of volume_1 on the snapshot device or storage checkpoint.
The snapshot created by policy_A is gone.

Note: Even if each policy has its own separate snapshot devices, conflicts can
occur when you browse for restore. Among the available snapshots, it may be
difficult to identify the correct snapshot to be restored. It is therefore best to
configure only one policy to protect a given volume when you use the Instant
Recovery feature of NetBackup.

Giving full server privileges to the media server

A media server used in an Instant Recovery backup must have full server privileges.
If it does not have server privileges, the snapshots created by each backup do not
properly expire in the NetBackup catalog.
 Instant Recovery configuration 104
About Instant Recovery

To give full server privileges to the media server

1 In the NetBackup Administration Console, click Host Properties > Master
Server > double click primary server > Master Server Properties > Servers.

2 Make sure that the media server is listed under Additional Servers, not under
Media Servers.
Note: on UNIX, this procedure places a SERVER = host entry in the bp.conf
file for each host that is listed under Additional Servers. In the bp.conf file,
the media server must not be designated by a MEDIA_SERVER = host entry.

About Instant Recovery

Standard NetBackup can use disks for backup and restore. The Instant Recovery
feature of Snapshot Manager extends that capability by exploiting the speed of
snapshots. A snapshot is created with minimal effect on client access to data or on
the speed of client transactions. If snapshots are made frequently, you can restore
an accidentally deleted file in a matter of seconds.
 Instant Recovery configuration 105
About Instant Recovery

Figure 6-1 shows an example.

Figure 6-1 Instant Recovery from snapshot on disk

NetBackup master
server with Instant Snapshots on same or
Recovery policy different disk Time of creation

snapshot A Dec 9 07:30:16

2004

NetBackup Dec 9 08:30:11

Client’s working snapshot B
client 2004
data

snapshot C Dec 9 09:30:15

restore 2004

The on-disk snapshots become point-in-time versions of file systems or volumes,

to be kept or discarded as needed. The data can be restored from local disk; no
need to mount a tape or other remote storage.
NetBackup Instant Recovery creates snapshot A of the client data on disk. One
hour later, as scheduled, NetBackup creates snapshot B, also on disk, followed
one hour later with snapshot C. By using the appropriate snapshot, you can restore
data directly from disk.

Note: NetBackup Instant Recovery retains the snapshot. The snapshot can be
used for restore even if the client has been restarted.

The following sections provide some background information.

About snapshot and backup for Instant Recovery

An Instant Recovery backup creates a snapshot on disk and optionally backs up
the client’s data to a storage device. The location of the snapshot depends on the
type of snapshot method that is configured in the policy.
An Instant Recovery backup creates a snapshot on disk and optionally backs up
the client’s data to a storage device.

About NetBackup catalog maintenance

For Instant Recovery backups, NetBackup automatically updates the catalog to
keep it correlated with the snapshots on the client. If not kept up-to-date, the catalog
might refer to snapshots that no longer exist on the client, due to user activity
(snapshot replacement or deletion).
 Instant Recovery configuration 106
About Instant Recovery

NetBackup includes a maintenance program (bppficorr) that runs after backups

and restores. It can also be run manually to update the catalog if an Instant Recovery
snapshot is accidentally deleted or renamed.
For man page information on the bppficorr command, refer to the NetBackup
Commands guide.

About snapshot management

Because snapshots require disk space, they cannot be retained forever. To balance
the space consumed against the convenience of having multiple snapshots available
for instant recovery, you can specify how many snapshots to retain.
For many disk array snapshot methods, you can also specify the particular devices
on which to retain the snapshots, and the order in which they are used.

About snapshot rotation

NetBackup Snapshot Manager implements a rotation scheme for managing snapshot
resources for some snapshot methods.
In the following bulleted example, the system is configured to have three snapshots
available for instant restore ("undo") at any time:
■ The state of the client’s backup selection list is captured in the first Instant
Recovery snapshot, and the snapshot is retained. In other words, it is not deleted,
even if the backup image is also copied to a storage unit.
■ When the backup policy runs again, recent changes in the client’s backup
selection list are captured in a second snapshot. This snapshot is created on a
second device that was allocated for this purpose. The first snapshot is retained,
in case a restore is needed from that data.
■ When the backup policy runs a third time, a third snapshot is created on the
third allocated device. At this point three snapshots representing three different
states of the client data are available for restore.
■ When the policy runs a fourth time, no additional snapshot device is available:
one of the existing devices must be reused. The system "rotates" the devices,
overwriting the first snapshot with the fourth (most recent) one. Although the
earliest snapshot is now gone, the three most recent snapshots are available
for restore.
 Instant Recovery configuration 107
About Instant Recovery

Figure 6-2 Snapshot rotation, for multiple restore (undo) levels

Client’s backup selections

Oldest snapshot: Most recent snapshot:

12:00 noon 4:00 PM

Older snapshot: 2:00 PM

In this figure, the next Instant Recovery backup overwrites the snapshot that was
made at 12:00 noon.

Means of controlling snapshots

Depending on the snapshot method you have selected for the policy, one of two
means of managing snapshots is available: the Snapshot Resources pane or the
Maximum Snapshots (Instant Recovery only) parameter.
VSO snapshot method uses the Maximum snapshot parameter to manage
snapshots.

Snapshot Resources pane

The Snapshot Resources pane (on the policy’s Snapshot Options dialog box)
is available only for certain disk array snapshot methods on UNIX clients.
The Snapshot Resources pane provides the most control over Instant Recovery
snapshots. You can specify which devices to use for the snapshots, and the order
in which the devices are used. Click the Add option to display the following:

Figure 6-3 Example of Add Snapshot Resource dialog

 Instant Recovery configuration 108
About Instant Recovery

■ The serial number of the array is specified in the Array Serial # field. Contact
your array administrator to obtain the disk array serial numbers and designators
(unique IDs) for the array.
The unique ID snapshot resource or source LUN containing the primary data is
specified in the Source Device.
The maximum number of snapshots to retain is determined by the number of
configured devices in the Snapshot Device(s) field. For example, if you enter
two devices, only two snapshots can be retained. The above example specifies
three devices (0122;0123;0124), so three snapshots can be retained. When the
maximum is reached, the fourth snapshot overwrites the first one.
■ The particular devices to use for the snapshots are those named in the Snapshot
Device(s) field.
■ The order in which the devices are listed in the Snapshot Device(s) field
determines their order of use. Device 0122 is used for the first snapshot, 0123
for the second, and 0124 for the third.
Preconfiguration of the snapshot devices may be required.
See the appropriate topic for your disk array and snapshot method.

Maximum Snapshots parameter

The Maximum Snapshots parameter on the Snapshot Options dialog box sets
the maximum number of Instant Recovery snapshots to be retained at one time.
This parameter is available only for certain snapshot methods. Unlike the Snapshot
Resources pane, it cannot specify which devices to use or the order of their use.
(The Maximum Snapshots parameter and the Snapshot Resources pane are
mutually exclusive.)
When the maximum is reached, the next snapshot causes the oldest job-complete
snapshot to be deleted.
A snapshot job is considered to be complete once all its configured dependent
copies ( for example, Backup from Snapshot, Index, Replication) are complete.

Note: For Windows clients using the VSS method on disk arrays that are configured
for clones or mirrors: you must synchronize the clones or mirrors with their source
before you run the backup.

For Instant Recovery backups, it is good practice to set the backup retention level
to infinite. A retention period that is too short can interfere with maintaining a
maximum number of snapshots for restore.
 Instant Recovery configuration 109
Configuring a policy for Instant Recovery

Configuring a policy for Instant Recovery

This section explains how to configure a policy for the backups that are enabled
for Instant Recovery.
To configure a policy for Instant Recovery
1 On the primary server, open the NetBackup Administration Console.
2 Click Policies. In the All Policies pane, open a policy or create a new one.
3 For the policy type, select Standard, MS-Windows, FlashBackup-Windows,
or the database agent type appropriate for the client(s).
For the policy type, select Standard or the database agent type appropriate
for the client(s).
4 Select a storage unit (disk or tape).
If you select Snapshots only on the Schedules tab, the storage unit is not
used. NetBackup creates a snapshot only.
5 Select Perform snapshot backups.
6 Select Retain snapshots for instant recovery or SLP management.
NetBackup retains the snapshot so that Instant Recovery can be performed
from the snapshot. A normal backup to storage is also performed, if you do
not select Snapshots only on the Schedules tab.
7 To save the settings, click Apply.
8 Click the Options option to select the VSO snapshot method.
Click the Options option to select the VSO snapshot method.
For a new policy, you can skip this step to let NetBackup select the method
(auto is the default method).
■ Select a snapshot method from the pull-down list. For creating an Instant
Recovery snapshot, the available methods are:

auto NetBackup selects the snapshot method. If auto is

the method, only one snapshot can be retained at
(UNIX or Windows)
a time.
 Instant Recovery configuration 110
Configuring a policy for Instant Recovery

FlashSnap Uses the VxVM FlashSnap feature and VxVM

FastResync to create the snapshot. VxVM mirrors
(UNIX or Windows)
must be configured:

See “About configuring VxVM” on page 114.

This method can also use instant snapshots:

See “About VxVM instant snapshots” on page 134.

For Windows clients, FlashSnap can use the Fast

File Resync feature of Storage Foundation for
Windows 4.1.

NAS_Snapshot Uses the NDMP V4 snapshot extension to create

the snapshot on the NAS-attached disk.
(UNIX or Windows)
See “Setting up a policy for NAS snapshots”
on page 83.

OST_FIM The name of the snapshot method that is selected

in a policy configured for snapshot replication using
Replication Director. The name represents
OpenStorage Frozen Image Method.

Refer to the NetBackup Replication Director

Solutions Guide for more details.

VSS VSS selects the actual snapshot method depending

on which snapshot provider is configured on the
client. For example, if the client data is stored on an
EMC CLARiiON disk array, and the array
administrator has fully configured the array and its
snapshot capability: VSS selects the appropriate
EMC CLARiiON snapshot method for the backup.

VxFS_Checkpoint Uses VxFS Storage Checkpoint to create the

snapshot. A new Storage Checkpoint is created
(UNIX only)
whenever a backup using the VxFS_Checkpoint
method is executed.

VxVM Uses VxVM FastResync to create the snapshot.

VxVM mirrors must be configured:
(UNIX or Windows)
See “About configuring VxVM” on page 114.

The VxVM method can also use instant snapshots:

See “About VxVM instant snapshots” on page 134.

For Windows clients, VxVM can use the Fast File

Resync feature of Storage Foundation for Windows
4.1.
 Instant Recovery configuration 111
Configuring a policy for Instant Recovery

VVR Creates a snapshot of a VxVM volume on a Veritas

Volume Replication host.
(UNIX)

The disk array snapshot See the appropriate topic for your disk array and
methods. snapshot method.

■ Change parameter values for the method, if needed.

■ When you are finished, click OK.

9 To configure a schedule, use the Schedule tab.

■ For a snapshot only, select Snapshots only.
If Snapshots only is selected, the snapshot is not backed up to tape or
other storage. NetBackup creates a snapshot on disk only. Note that you
must deselect Snapshots only if you want to deselect Retain snapshots
for instant recovery and SLP management on the policy Attribute tab.
If the snapshot uses VxFS_Checkpoint or is a VxVM space-optimized
snapshot, it is created on the same device as the device containing the
original data. In that case, you may want to create another policy to back
up the data to a separate device.
If Snapshots and copy snapshots to a storage unit is selected,
NetBackup creates (and retains) a snapshot and backs up the client’s data
to the storage unit that is specified in the policy.
■ You can select the retention period for snapshots under Retention.
■ Make other schedule selections as desired, and click OK.

10 To enter the files and folders to be backed up, use the Backup Selections
tab.
■ When backing up Oracle database clients, refer to the NetBackup for Oracle
System Administrator’s Guide for instructions.
■ Snapshot Manager policies do not support the ALL_LOCAL_DRIVES entry
in the policy’s Backup Selections list, except for the policies that are
configured with the VMware method.
■ Snapshot Manager policies do not support the ALL_LOCAL_DRIVES entry
in the policy’s Backup Selections list.

11 To specify clients to be backed up by this policy, use the Clients tab.

12 On the policy Attributes tab: if you click Apply or OK, a validation process
checks the policy and reports any errors. If you click Close, no validation is
performed.
 Instant Recovery configuration 112
About sizing the cache for Instant Recovery copy-on-write snapshots

About sizing the cache for Instant Recovery

copy-on-write snapshots
A copy-on-write snapshot requires cache space for storing the changes that occur
on the source device during the life of the snapshot. While the snapshot is active,
any blocks that are about to be changed by user activity are copied to the cache.
Blocks that do not change on the source are not copied. Compared to a
fully-allocated snapshot (clone or mirror), a copy-on-write snapshot may consume
relatively little disk space and can be executed very quickly.
As a rule, the appropriate size for the cache depends on the amount of user activity
that occurs during the life of the snapshot. The more changes in the source data,
or the longer the life of the snapshot, the more blocks that are likely to be changed.
As a result, more data must be stored in the cache.
The size of the file system or raw partition does not determine cache size. If little
change activity occurs on the source during the life of the snapshot, little cache
space is required, even for a large file system.

Note: If the cache runs out of space, the snapshot may fail.

Cache size during restore

The size of the cache may need to increase when you restore large amounts of
data from an Instant Recovery snapshot. For instance, if you restore an entire raw
partition to a source device that has an active Instant Recovery snapshot, writing
the restore data causes the active snapshot to cache all blocks from the raw partition
that resides on the source device. A cache that was large enough when the snapshot
was first initiated may no longer be large enough. The large restore multiplies the
write-to-cache activity, increasing the space that is needed for cache.
Use the following copy-on-write snapshot methods with Instant Recovery only when
small amounts of data (individual files) are likely to be restored:
Use the VSO copy-on-write snapshot methods with Instant Recovery only when
small amounts of data (individual files) are likely to be restored.
■ VxVM space optimized instant snapshots
■ VxFS_Checkpoint
■ The following copy-on-write disk array methods if the snapshot is not fully
allocated:
■ EMC_CLARiiON_SnapView_Snapshot
■ EMC_TimeFinder_Snap
 Instant Recovery configuration 113
About sizing the cache for Instant Recovery copy-on-write snapshots

■ HP_EVA_Snapshot
■ HP_EVA_Vsnap
■ Hitachi_CopyOnWrite

Setting an adequate size for the snapshot cache

The cache must be sized appropriately in either of the following cases:
■ If a lot of write activity is expected in the source data during the life of the
copy-on-write snapshot.
■ If you expect to restore large amounts of data from an Instant Recovery snapshot.
To set an adequate size for the snapshot cache
Use the following formula:

For raw partitions: Cache size = volume size * the number of retained snapshots

For file systems: Cache size = (consumed space * the number of retained snapshots)
+ approximately 2% to 5% of the consumed space in the file system
Note:

■ Consumed space means the total size of the data allocated to

files in the file system, not the total size of the mounted volume.
■ The additional space (2% to 5%) represents a safety measure
and may not be required.

Large restores from an Instant Recovery snapshot

For restore of an entire raw partition or large file system, Veritas recommends a
fully allocated snapshot method.
Examples are the following:
■ VxVM as a snapshot mirror (not space-optimized)
■ EMC_CLARiiON_Snapview_Clone
■ EMC_TimeFinder_Clone
■ EMC_TimeFinder_Mirror
■ HP_EVA_Snapclone
■ Hitachi_ShadowImage
■ IBM_DiskStorage_FlashCopy
■ IBM_StorageManager_FlashCopy
 Instant Recovery configuration 114
About configuring VxVM

■ Any copy-on-write disk array method that is configured with a fully-allocated

snapshot.

About configuring VxVM

For Instant Recovery backups of the data that is configured on VxVM volumes on
Windows, the VxVM volume names must be 12 characters or fewer. Otherwise,
the backup fails.
Before you run an Instant Recovery policy to back up VxVM volumes, one or more
mirrors must be created. The primary volumes must be enabled for FastResync.
Note that on Windows, FastResync is enabled by default.

Creating a snapshot mirror

You can create a snapshot mirror using VxVM commands.
To create a snapshot mirror on Windows
1 For a volume that is associated with a drive letter, enter:

vxassist snapstart X:

where X is the drive letter. This command creates a snapshot mirror of the
designated drive.
2 For a volume that is not associated with a drive letter, enter:

vxdg -g disk_group dginfo

This command shows information for the specified disk group, including the
names of the volumes that are configured for that group.
■ Create the snapshot by entering the following:

vxassist snapstart \Device\HarddiskDmVolumes\disk_group\Volume_name

This command creates a snapshot mirror of the designated Windows

volume.
 Instant Recovery configuration 115
About configuring VxVM

To create a snapshot mirror on UNIX

1 Add dco (data change object) logs to the primary volume:

/usr/sbin/vxassist -g disk_group addlog volume_name logtype=dco

2 Enable FastResync on the volume:

/usr/sbin/vxvol -g disk_group set fmr=on volume_name

3 Prepare a new mirror for the Instant Recovery snapshot:

■ Create the mirror:

/usr/sbin/vxassist -g disk_group snapstart primary_volume

Wait until the mirror is synchronized (status SNAPDONE, or State field

reads Ready in the volume’s properties display).
■ To verify that the mirror is synchronized, enter:

/usr/sbin/vxprint -g disk_group -q -t -e 'assoc="primary_volume"'

About creating Instant Snapshots

The following procedures are required for Instant Recovery backups when using
the full-sized or space-optimized instant snapshot options in VxVM 4.0. For Instant
Recovery backups, VxVM 4.0 or later instant snapshots are supported by Snapshot
Manager’s FlashSnap, VxVM, and VVR methods.

Creating space-optimized snapshots

A cache object called NBU_CACHE must be created in the disk group containing
the volume to be backed up. NetBackup recognizes the cache object and uses it
to create a space-optimized snapshot.
To create space-optimized snapshots
1 Create the parent volume:

/usr/sbin/vxassist -g disk_group make volume size layout=layout

logtype=dco dcoversion=20 [drl=no|sequential|yes]
[ndcomirror=number] fastresync=on

Where:
■ Brackets [ ] indicate optional items.
 Instant Recovery configuration 116
About configuring VxVM

■ make volume specifies the name of the volume snapshot.

2 Create the cache object:

/usr/sbin/vxassist -g disk_group make cache_volume size

layout=layout init=active

3 Label the cache object:

/usr/sbin/vxmake -g disk_group cache NBU_CACHE

cachevolname=cache_volume

4 Enable the cache object:

/usr/sbin/vxcache -g disk_group start NBU_CACHE

5 Take the initial snapshot:

/usr/sbin/vxsnap -g disk_group make

source=volume/newvol

=SNAP_vol1_NBU/cache=NBU_CACHE

Creating full-sized snapshots

Unlike the space-optimized snapshot, NetBackup cannot create VxVM full-sized
instant snapshots: you must create them before running the backup, as explained
in the following procedure. You must create one full-sized instant snapshot for each
backup you want to run.
To create full-sized snapshots
1 Enter the following to create the parent volume:

/usr/sbin/vxassist -g disk_group make volume length layout=layout

logtype=dco dcoversion=20 [drl=no|sequential|yes]
[ndcomirror=number] fastresync=on

Where:
■ Brackets [ ] indicate optional items.
■ make volume specifies the name of the volume snapshot.

2 Create a volume for a full-sized instant snapshot:

■ Determine the required size for the snapshot volume:
 Instant Recovery configuration 117
About configuring VxVM

# LEN='vxprint -g disk_group -F%len volume'

■ Find the name of the DCO volume:

# DCOVOL='vxprint -g disk_group -F%dconame volume'

■ Discover the DCO volume's region size (in blocks):

# RSZ='vxprint -g disk_group -F%regionsz $DCOVOL'

■ Create a volume that is named volumename_NBU, of the required size and

redundancy.
The volume name must end with _NBU. In the following example, the volume
is named SNAP_vol1_NBU.

vxassist -g disk_group make SNAP_vol1_NBU $LEN layout=mirror

nmirror=number logtype=dco drl=no dcoversion=20
ndcomirror=number regionsz=$RSZ init=none
[storage attributes ...]

The number for nmirror should equal the number for ndcomirror.

Note: For Linux, the init value should be init=active instead of init=none.
For Solaris 10 with Storage Foundation 5.1, the init value should be
init=active instead of init=none.

■ Create the mirror:

vxsnap -g disk_group make source=volume/snapvol=SNAP_vol1_NBU/syncing=on

3 Set the Maximum Snapshots (Instant Recovery only) value on the NetBackup
Snapshot Client Options dialog.

Using the VxVM 3.5 GUI to configure VxVM mirrors

The following are the steps for using the VxVM 3.5 graphical user interface to
configure VxVM mirrors for Instant Recovery backups.
To use the VxVM 3.5 GUI to configure VxVM mirrors
1 Make sure that FastResync is enabled on the primary VxVM volume.
■ In the VEA console, right-click the volume and click Properties from the
pop-up menu.
 Instant Recovery configuration 118
Modifying the VxVM or FlashSnap resync options for point in time rollback

■ The FastResync field states whether or not FastResync is enabled.

■ Click Cancel.
■ If FastResync is disabled, right-click the volume again and select Fast
Resync > Add from the pop-up menu to enable it.

2 Prepare a new mirror for Instant Recovery backup.

■ Create a new mirror by right-clicking the volume and selecting Snap > Snap
Start.
■ Make sure FastResync is enabled on the mirror. Click OK to create the
mirror and start full synchronization.

3 On the Mirrors tab, ensure that synchronization has completed as indicated

by Snap Ready in the Status field.

Modifying the VxVM or FlashSnap resync options

for point in time rollback
Several options can be set for Instant Recovery point in time rollback when multiple
volumes are involved in the rollback. For better performance, you can modify these
options to suit the circumstances of the rollback.
The following options can be modified for rollback of a VxVM or FlashSnap snapshot:
■ Maximum number of volumes to resynchronize concurrently
■ Sync region size in MB (UNIX only)
■ Sync I/O delay in milliseconds (UNIX only)
By default, these resync options have the same values for restore as they had for
the backup. For the defaults, see the following section:
See “Configuration parameters for Snapshot Manager” on page 63.
To modify the VxVM or FlashSnap resync options for point in time rollback
1 Create the following file:

/usr/openv/netbackup/SYNC_PARAMS

2 In the file, enter the numeric values for the options, on one line. The numbers
apply to the options in the bulleted list above, in that order.
For example:

6 3 1000
 Instant Recovery configuration 119
Instant Recovery for databases

This example resets the options as follows:

■ Maximum number of volumes to resynchronize concurrently = 6
■ Sync region size in MB (UNIX only) = 3
■ Sync I/O delay in milliseconds (UNIX only) = 1000

Instant Recovery for databases

To configure an Instant Recovery policy for database clients, refer to the appropriate
NetBackup database agent guide.

About storage lifecycle policies for snapshots

A storage lifecycle policy is a storage plan for a set of backups. NetBackup uses
the lifecycle policy to determine where to store additional copies of the backup
images and how long to retain those copies. In general, short-term copies can be
kept on disk (for quick restore) and long-term copies can be kept on tape or other
storage.
NetBackup can manage snapshot-based backups for Instant Recovery through
storage lifecycle policies.. The Instant Recovery feature makes snapshots available
for quick data recovery from disk. Lifecycle policies support a lifecycle storage plan
for the storage unit copies that are made during an Instant Recovery backup.
See “Configuring a storage lifecycle policy to manage snapshot-based backups for
Instant Recovery ” on page 119.
See “Storage lifecycle polices and Snapshot Manager troubleshooting” on page 121.

Configuring a storage lifecycle policy to manage snapshot-based

backups for Instant Recovery
This section describes how to create a storage lifecycle policy to manage
snapshot-based backups for Instant Recovery. The procedure focuses on
snapshot-related details only.
Full procedures are available for creating storage lifecycle policies:
See the NetBackup Administrator’s Guide, Volume I.
To configure a storage lifecycle policy to manage snapshot-based backups
for Instant Recovery
1 Create a lifecycle policy with two or more storage destinations.
 Instant Recovery configuration 120
About storage lifecycle policies for snapshots

Use the Storage > Storage Lifecycle Policies node of the NetBackup
Administration Console. Click Actions > New > Storage Lifecycle Policies.
Click Add.
■ For snapshots, select Snapshot on the New Storage Destination dialog.
You can specify a retention period appropriate for snapshots (such as two
weeks). Click OK.
■ For backup copies to disk, select Backup on the New Storage Destination
dialog. Specify a disk storage unit and a longer retention period (such as
six months). Click OK.
■ For backup copies to tape, select Duplication on the New Storage
Destination dialog. Specify a tape storage unit and a longer retention period
(such as five years). Click OK and finish creating the lifecycle policy.

2 Create a policy for snapshots. (Use the Policies node of the Administration
Console.)
On the policy Attributes tab:
■ You can specify the lifecycle policy in the Policy storage unit / lifecycle
policy field. You can later change the lifecycle policy in the schedule, as
explained later in this procedure.
■ Select Perform snapshot backups.
■ On the Snapshot Options dialog box, the Maximum Snapshots (Instant
Recovery only) parameter sets the maximum number of snapshots to be
retained at one time. When the maximum is reached, the next snapshot
causes the oldest job-complete snapshot to be deleted.
A snapshot is considered to be job complete once all its configured
dependent copies (for example, Backup from Snapshot, Index, Replication)
are complete.
Note that if you also set a snapshot retention period of less than infinity in
the lifecycle policy, the snapshot is expired when either of these settings
takes effect (whichever happens first). For example, if the Maximum
Snapshots value is exceeded before the snapshot retention period that is
specified in the lifecycle policy, the snapshot is deleted.
The same is true for the Snapshot Resources pane on the Snapshot
Options dialog box. If the snapshot method requires snapshot resources,
the maximum number of snapshots is determined by the number of devices
that are specified in the Snapshot Device(s) field. For example, if two
devices are specified, only two snapshots can be retained at a time. Either
the Snapshot Device(s) field or the snapshot retention period in the lifecycle
policy can determine the retention period.
 Instant Recovery configuration 121
About storage lifecycle policies for snapshots

Policy validation fails if there is a mismatch of retention found on the

snapshot. For example, if the Maximum Snapshots (Instant Recovery
only) parameter is set to any value other than Managed by SLP and the
SLP used in the same policy has Fixed retention for the Snapshot job the
policy validation fails. If you have such a policy configured on a pre- 7.6
NetBackup primary server, it is advisable that you validate and correct the
policy after you upgrade to a NetBackup 10.2 primary server.

3 Create a schedule for the policy.

You can create a single schedule for backups and let the lifecycle policy govern
their destinations and retention periods, as follows:
■ Under Destination, if you selected Retain snapshots for Instant Recovery
and SLP management on the policy Attributes tab, make sure that
Snapshots and copy snapshots to a storage unit is selected on the
schedule (not Snapshots only).
Important: if you select Snapshots only on the schedule, a lifecycle policy
cannot be used.
■ In the Override policy storage selection field, select the lifecycle policy
that you created in 1.
■ Under Schedule type, set an appropriate frequency, such as 1 day.
When the Snapshot Manager policy executes this schedule, the lifecycle policy
named in the Override policy storage selection field creates images on the
destinations that are named in the lifecycle policy. The lifecycle policy also sets
the retention periods for the images it creates. In this example, the retention
is six months for backups to disk and five years for tape.
See “Storage lifecycle polices and Snapshot Manager troubleshooting” on page 121.
See “About storage lifecycle policies for snapshots” on page 119.

Storage lifecycle polices and Snapshot Manager troubleshooting

The section includes information about various error messages related to SLPs
and snapshots.
If you configure a snapshot method for a policy, and the schedule specifies a lifecycle
policy, the life cycle policy must include a snapshot destination. Otherwise, an error
such as the following appears in the NetBackup Problems report:

snapshot backup: tashina11_1204305543 cannot be used with a

lifecycle policy NoSnapshot that does not include a snapshot
destination.

Error 156 can be a result of different problems, listed below are some of them:
 Instant Recovery configuration 122
About storage lifecycle policies for snapshots

VxVM failing to get the version of the disk group, run appropriate VxVM command
outside of NetBackup to see whether you can get the version information for the
disk group in use.
Bpfis log

10:43:58.436 [28336] <32> onlfi_fim_dev_info: FTL - VfMS error 11;

see following messages:10:43:58.437 [28336] <32> onlfi_fim_dev_info:
FTL - Fatal method error was reported
10:43:58.437 [28336] <32> onlfi_fim_dev_info:
FTL - vfm_freeze: method: vxvm, type: FIM, function: vxvm_freeze
10:43:58.437 [28336] <32> onlfi_fim_dev_info: FTL - VfMS method error 10;
see following message:
10:43:58.437 [28336] <32> onlfi_fim_dev_info:
FTL - vxvm__get_dgversion: Cannot get version for disk group: dgdb001
10:43:58.437 [28336] <4> onlfi_thaw:
INF - Thawing /ora/db001/data001 using snapshot method vxvm.
10:43:58.448 [28336] <4> onlfi_thaw: INF - do_thaw return value: 0
10:43:58.454 [28336] <16> bpfis:
FTL - snapshot preparation failed, status 156

The device that is to backup by this process is being used by another process.
Check whether any other process is holding the same device.
Bpfis log

00:26:19.025 [2826] <2> onlfi_vfms_logf: INF - lock pid(2902) != pid(2826):

/usr/openv/netbackup/online_util/db_cntl/__LOCKFILE_EMC:
SYMMETRIX:970960001000
00:26:19.025 [2826] <2> onlfi_vfms_logf: INF - TimeFinder_rebuild:
Cannot get lock on device: /dev/rdsk/c3t5006048C4A85A400d1s2 ......
00:26:19.025 [2826] <32> rebuild_fim_list: FTL - TimeFinder_rebuild:
Cannot get lock on device: /dev/rdsk/c3t5006048C4A85A400d1s2
00:26:19.025 [2826] <32> splthost_rebuild: FTL - rebuild_fim_list() failed
00:26:19.037 [2826] <4> bpfis Exit:
INF - EXIT STATUS 156: snapshot error encountered

Policy validation fails for valid backup selection. If there filer’s volume is mounted
on a windows client, run NetBackup client service on the client and the alternate
client with a valid credentials to access CIFS share, and check that the filers are
up, and the volume is seen mounted on the windows client.
Bpfis log

11:49:40.727 [15240.13716] <16> bpfis main: FTL - process_fs_list() failed,

status 71
 Instant Recovery configuration 123
About storage lifecycle policies for snapshots

11:49:40.727 [15240.13716] <2> ol_cleanup:

INF - removing
C:\Program Files\Veritas\NetBackup\temp\unknown+15240+1.std_filelist
11:49:40.727 [15240.13716] <4> bpfis Exit:
INF - EXIT STATUS 71: none of the files in the file list exist
11:49:40.743 [15240.13716] <2> stop_keep_alive_thread:
INF - Stop keep_alive thread
11:49:40.743 [15240.13716] <2> bpfis Exit: INF - Close of stdout

For windows client, live browse from the snapshot fails with the following error
message. Make sure that NetBackup client service on the client and the alternate
client is running with a valid credential to access CIFS share
ERROR: permissions denied by client during rcmd.
Snapshot backup for windows client fail with status 55. Make sure that NetBackup
client service on the client and the alternate client is running with a valid credential
to access CIFS share.
Bpfis log

10:46:00.131 [2612.7880] <4> bpcd_request_mount:

get volume guid from <frag-id> failed with 55
10:46:00.131 [2612.7880] <4> bpcd_request_mount:
return mntdev NO_MOUNT_DEVICE
10:46:00.131 [2612.7880] <16> bpcd_get_fileinfo:
bpcd_request_mount failed with error[55]
10:46:00.147 [2612.7880] <2> bpcd_get_fileinfo: sent status 55 to bpdbm

Live browse or ‘backup from snapshot’ operation for windows client fail with error
43, status 156. Enable create_ucode & convert_ucode on primary volume.
Bpfis log

04:43:44.656 [3040.3900] <2> onlfi_vfms_logf:

INF - snapshot services:ostfi:Wed Aug 24 2011
04:43:44.640000 <Thread id - 3900> Failed to import snapshot [*************]
04:43:44.718 [3040.3900] <2> onlfi_vfms_logf:
INF - snapshot services: ostfi:Wed Aug 24 2011
04:43:44.718000 <Thread id - 3900> OST Library call failed with message
(STS API sts_create_export failed with
error code : 2060022)
04:43:44.718 [3040.3900] <2> onlfi_vfms_logf: INF - snapshot services:
ostfi:Wed Aug 24 2011
04:43:44.718000 <Thread id - 3900> COSTPlugin::importTreeNode -
Could not import device[************]
 Instant Recovery configuration 124
About storage lifecycle policies for snapshots

NBUAdapter log

0 RESTORE :2104 111 0 115851 2011/08/24 04:58:51

Volume name = f3070-238-15:/NetBackup_1314174973_mirror,
dest snap f270-247-156_test6
1 RESTORE :2104 44 0 115851 2011/08/24 04:58:51
share name:NBU_Share_NetBackup_1314174973_mirror_
f270-247-156_test6_2011_08_24_04_36_14
0 RESTORE :2104 6 0 115851 2011/08/24 04:58:51 add_cifs_export :
Failed to get response. Error 22 : Directory
"/vol/NetBackup_1314174973_mirror/.snapshot/f270-247-156_test6"
does not exist.
1 STRWIDE :2104 1 0 115851 LFB:
Need 111 chars to store wide copy of UTF8
'Directory "/vol/NetBackup_1314174973_mirror/.snapshot/f270-247-156_test6"
does not exist. ‘

See “Configuring a storage lifecycle policy to manage snapshot-based backups for

Instant Recovery ” on page 119.
See “About storage lifecycle policies for snapshots” on page 119.
 Chapter 7
Configuration of
software-based snapshot
methods
This chapter includes the following topics:

■ Software-based snapshot methods

Software-based snapshot methods

This topic provides notes and configuration assistance for the Snapshot Manager
methods exclusive of those designed for disk arrays.
For configuration notes on disk array methods, see the following:
See “About array-specific methods vs array-independent methods” on page 147.

About nbu_snap
The nbu_snap snapshot method is for Solaris clients only. It is for making
copy-on-write snapshots for UFS or VxFS file systems.
The information in this section applies to either Standard or FlashBackup policy
types.
nbu_snap is not supported in clustered file systems. It is not supported as the
selected snapshot method or as the default snapctl driver when you configure
FlashBackup in the earlier manner.
See “Configuring FlashBackup policy for backward compatibility (UNIX only)”
on page 92.
 Configuration of software-based snapshot methods 126
Software-based snapshot methods

An alternative copy-on-write snapshot method for clustered file systems is

VxFS_Snapshot with a FlashBackup policy.
nbu_snap does not support VxVM volumes that belong to a shared disk group.

Cache device requirements

Note the following:
■ The cache device is a raw disk partition: either a logical volume or physical disk.
The cache is used for storing the portions of the client’s data that incoming write
requests change while the copy-on-write is in progress.
■ For the cache device, do not select an active partition containing valuable data.
Any data in that partition is lost when the snapshot is complete.

Warning: Choose a cache partition carefully! The cache partition’s contents are
overwritten by the snapshot process.

■ Specify the raw partition as the full path name of either the character special
device file or the block device file. For example:

Solaris raw partition: /dev/rdsk/c2t0d3s3

Or

/dev/dsk/c2t0d3s3

VxVM volume: /dev/vx/rdsk/diskgroup_1/volume_3

Or

/dev/vx/dsk/diskgroup_1/volume_3

Note: Do not specify wildcards (such as /dev/rdsk/c2*) as paths.

■ The cache partition must be unmounted.

■ The cache partition must reside on the same host as the snapshot source (the
client’s data to back up).
■ The partition must have enough space to hold all the writes to the partition that
may occur during the backup. Note that backups during off-peak periods normally
require a smaller cache than a backup during peak activity.
 Configuration of software-based snapshot methods 127
Software-based snapshot methods

See “Determining a size for the cache partition” on page 127.

■ For the Media Server or Third-Party Copy Device method: the host containing
the snapshot source and cache must be visible to the media server or third-party
copy device.
■ For the Media Server or Third-Party Copy Device method: the disk containing
the cache must meet certain requirements.
See “Disk requirements for Media Server and Third-Party Copy methods”
on page 226.

Determining a size for the cache partition

The required size for the cache partition depends on user write activity during the
backup, not on the size of the client’s file system. If the backup occurs when user
activity is heavy, a larger cache is required.
To determine a size for the cache partition
1 Consider the period in which the backup is scheduled to occur: the more user
activity that is expected, the larger the cache required.
You should execute the following procedure at an appropriate period, when
your snapshot backups typically run. If user activity at your site is known to
vary with the time of day, a different time could bring very different results.
2 Make sure that a raw partition is available on a separate disk.
See “Cache device requirements” on page 126.
3 During the appropriate backup period, create an nbu_snap snapshot by entering
the following as root:

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/driver/snapon snapshot_source cache

where snapshot_source is the partition on which the client’s file system is

mounted, and cache is the raw partition to be used as copy-on-write cache.
For example:

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/driver/snapon /omo_cat3
/dev/vx/rdsk/zeb/cache

Example output:

matched /omo_cat3 to mnttab entry /omo_cat3

mount device: /dev/vx/dsk/omo/vol03 fstype: vxfs
snapshot 29 enabled on /omo_cat3 at 06/05/03 15:16:02
 Configuration of software-based snapshot methods 128
Software-based snapshot methods

4 In /usr/openv/netbackup/bin/driver, enter the snaplist and

snapcachelist commands.

snaplist shows the following:

■ Id of each snapshot
■ Size of the partition containing the client file system
■ Amount of file system write activity in 512-byte blocks that occurred during
the nbu_snap snapshot (under the cached column).
The more blocks that are cached as a result of user activity, the larger the
cache partition required.
snapcachelist shows each cache device in use and what percentage has
been used (busy). For each cache device that is listed, busy shows the total
space that is used in the cache. This value indicates the size of the raw partition
that may be required for nbu_snap cache.
More details are available on the snap commands.
See “nbu_snap commands” on page 289.
The snap commands can be used in a script.
If the cache partition is not large enough, the backup fails with status code 13,
"file read failed." The /var/adm/messages log may contain errors such as the
following:

Mar 24 01:35:58 bison unix: WARNING: sn_alloccache: cache

/dev/rdsk/c0t2d0s3 full - all snaps using this cache are now
unusable

5 Using the information that snaplist and snapcachelist provide, you have
several options:
■ Specify a larger (or smaller) partition as cache, depending on the results
from snaplist and snapcachelist.
■ Reschedule backups to a period when less user activity is expected.
 Configuration of software-based snapshot methods 129
Software-based snapshot methods

■ If multiple backups use the same cache, reduce the number of concurrent
backups by rescheduling some of them.

6 When you are finished with the snapshot, you can remove it by entering the
following:

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/driver/snapoff snapid

where snapid is the numeric id of the snapshot that was created earlier.
NetBackup policies do not control any snapshots that you create manually with
the snapon command. When snapon is run manually, it creates a copy-on-write
snapshot only. The snapshot remains on the client until it is removed by entering
snapoff or the client is restarted.

Entering the cache

For the nbu_snap and VxFS_Snapshot methods, you must identify a raw partition
that the copy-on-write process uses, in any of the following ways.
To enter the cache
1 If manually selecting the snapshot method on the Snapshot Client Options
dialog, you have two options for specifying the raw cache partition:
■ Under Host Properties > Clients > Client Properties dialog > UNIX Client
> Client Settings, specify the raw partition in the Default cache device
path for snapshots field. For example: /dev/rdsk/c1t0d0s6. This setting
applies to the client in all policies.
■ Or, under Policies > Attributes > Snapshot Client Options dialog, specify
the raw partition in the Cache device path field. This cache setting applies
to all clients in the current policy, and overrides the cache setting in the
Client Settings dialog.

2 If you want NetBackup to select the nbu_snap or VxFS_Snapshot methods by

means of the auto method, specify the cache on the Host Properties > Clients
> Client Properties dialog > UNIX Client > Client Settings.
3 In a FlashBackup policy: if Perform snapshot backups is NOT selected, you
must use a CACHE= directive in the Backup Selections tab.
This cache setting applies to all clients in the current policy and overrides the
cache setting in the Host Properties dialog. (This means of configuring the
cache will be discontinued in a future release.)
 Configuration of software-based snapshot methods 130
Software-based snapshot methods

About VxFS_Checkpoint
The VxFS_Checkpoint snapshot method is for making copy-on-write snapshots.
This method is one of several snapshot methods that support Instant Recovery
backups. Note that for VxFS_Checkpoint, the Instant Recovery snapshot is made
on the same disk file system that contains the client’s original data.
For VxFS_Checkpoint, VxFS 3.4 or later with the Storage Checkpoints feature must
be installed on the NetBackup clients. HP requires VxFS 3.5; AIX and Linux require
VxFS 4.0.

Note: On the Red Hat Linux 4 platform, VxFS_Checkpoint snapshot method supports
Storage Foundation 5.0 MP3 RP3 HF9 or later versions.

Note the following:

■ The VxFS_Checkpoint method is not supported for backing up raw partitions
(whether FlashBackup or Standard policies).
■ Make sure that enough disk space is available for the checkpoint. The file system
containing the snapshot source should have at least 10% free space to
successfully implement the checkpoint.

VxFS multi-volume system

VxFS_Checkpoint and VxVM are the only snapshot methods in Snapshot Manager
that support the multi-volume file system (MVS) feature of VxFS 4.0.
The multi-volume file system feature requires a VxVM 4.0 volume set. With volume
sets, you can group related volumes into one volume set, and mount a VxFS file
system on it. This means that a VxFS file system can be mounted on more than
one volume. This feature allows file systems to make best use of the different
performance and availability characteristics of the underlying volumes. For example,
file system metadata can be stored on volumes with higher redundancy, and user
data on volumes with better performance.
For background and configuration assistance with multi-volume file systems, refer
to the Veritas File System 4.0 Administrator’s Guide and the Veritas Volume Manager
4.0 Administrator’s Guide.

Note: Off-host backup is not supported for a VxFS 4.0 multi-volume system.
 Configuration of software-based snapshot methods 131
Software-based snapshot methods

Storage Checkpoint disk usage

The ls command does not list Storage Checkpoint disk usage. This means that
the primary volume may appear to have available space even if it is full. You must
use the fsckptadm list command to show Storage Checkpoint disk usage. Refer
to the Veritas File System Administrator’s Guide for more information on fsckptadm.
A new Storage Checkpoint is created whenever a VxFS_Checkpoint policy is
executed.

Checkpoint retention schedules

For Instant Recovery storage checkpoints, no data is moved between the client
and the media server. Instead, a VxFS Storage Checkpoint is created on the client.
For Oracle clients, the file names and directory names are sent to the server for
the catalog. In the case of file systems (non-database clients), only the directory
name is sent, not the file data.
Changes in the files on the client’s primary fileset are reflected in the Storage
Checkpoint until the backup policy runs again, creating another Storage Checkpoint.
Storage Checkpoints are created and retained until the maximum checkpoints
threshold is exceeded, when the oldest checkpoint is removed.
Figure 7-1 shows the Instant Recovery checkpoint expiration schedule. If the
maximum checkpoint value is set to 2 and a third checkpoint is created, the oldest
is removed.

Figure 7-1 Instant Recovery Retention Schedule for Storage Checkpoints

Client’s 1st (oldest)
primary 3rd checkpoint 2nd checkpoint is
fileset (most recent) checkpoint removed

A new Storage Checkpoint is created each time a backup is started.

Block-Level restore
If only a small portion of a file system or database changes on a daily basis, full
restores are unnecessary. The VxFS Storage Checkpoint mechanism keeps track
of the data blocks that were modified since the last checkpoint was taken. Block-level
restores take advantage of this feature by restoring only changed blocks, not the
entire file or database. The result is faster restores when you recover large files.
See “About Instant Recovery: block-level restore” on page 233.
 Configuration of software-based snapshot methods 132
Software-based snapshot methods

About VxFS_Snapshot
The VxFS_Snapshot method is for making copy-on-write snapshots of local Solaris
or HP clients. Off-host backup is not supported with this snapshot method.
Note the following:
■ VxFS_Snapshot supports the FlashBackup policy type only.
■ The VxFS_Snapshot method can only be used to back up a single file system.
If multiple file systems are specified in the policy’s Backup Selections list when
you use this method, the backup fails.
■ In a FlashBackup policy, if the Backup Selections list contains CACHE= entries,
FlashBackup does support the backup of multiple file systems from a single
policy. For each file system, a separate cache must be designated with the
CACHE= entry. Make sure you create a separate policy for each file system.
See “Configuring FlashBackup policy for backward compatibility (UNIX only)”
on page 92.
■ You must designate a raw partition to be used for copy-on-write cache.
Raw partition example:

Solaris: /dev/rdsk/c1t0d0s3

Or

/dev/dsk/c1t0d0s3

HP: /dev/rdsk/c1t0d0

Or

/dev/dsk/c1t0d0

See “Cache device requirements” on page 126.

See “Entering the cache” on page 129.
■ VxFS_Snapshot is the default snapshot method for FlashBackup clients running
HP, when Perform snapshot backup is not selected for the backup policy.

About VxVM
The VxVM snapshot method is for making mirror snapshots with Veritas Volume
Manager 3.1 or later snapshot mirrors. (On Windows, make sure that VxVM has
the latest VxVM service packs and updates.)
 Configuration of software-based snapshot methods 133
Software-based snapshot methods

Note: On the Red Hat Linux 4 platform, VxVM snapshot method supports Storage
Foundation 5.0 MP3 RP3 HF9 or later versions.

The VxVM snapshot method works for any file system that is mounted on a VxVM
volume. However, before the backup is performed, the data must be configured
with either of the following: a VxVM 3.1 or later snapshot mirror or a VxVM 4.0 or
later cache object. Otherwise, the backup fails.
Note the following:
■ See “Creating a snapshot mirror of the source” on page 133.
Or refer to your Veritas Volume Manager documentation.
■ Help is available for configuring a cache object.
See “About VxVM instant snapshots” on page 134.
Or refer to your Veritas Volume Manager documentation.
■ For Instant Recovery backups of the data that is configured on VxVM volumes
on Windows, the VxVM volume names must be 12 characters or fewer.
Otherwise, the backup fails.
■ VxVM and VxFS_Checkpoint are the only snapshot methods in Snapshot
Manager that support the multi-volume file system (MVS) feature of VxFS 4.0.
■ Since VxVM does not support fast mirror resynchronization on RAID 5 volumes,
VxVM must not be used with VxVM volumes configured as RAID 5. If the VxVM
snapshot method is selected for a RAID 5 volume, the backup fails.

Creating a snapshot mirror of the source

To use the VxVM snapshot method with VxVM volumes in the third-mirror
(split-mirror) configuration, you must create a snapshot mirror. Use one of the
following methods on the client.
To create a snapshot mirror of the source
1 In the Volume Manager Storage Administrator interface:
■ UNIX: select the source (primary) volume, right-click it, and select Snapshot
from the pop-up menu. In the Volume Snapshot dialog, select Enable
FMR (if available: see the following note) and click the Snapstart option.
■ Windows: select the source volume, right-click it, select Snap, and choose
Snapstart.
For details, refer to your Veritas Volume Manager documentation.

2 Or for UNIX, enter the following commands:

 Configuration of software-based snapshot methods 134
Software-based snapshot methods

/usr/sbin/vxassist -g disk_group snapstart volume_name

/usr/sbin/vxvol -g disk_group set fmr=on volume_name

where:
■ disk_group is the Volume Manager disk group to which the volume belongs.
■ volume_name is the name of the volume that is designated at the end of
the source volume path (for example, vol1 in /dev/vx/rdsk/dg/vol1).
■ fmr=on sets the Fast Mirror Resynchronization attribute, which
resynchronizes the mirror with its primary volume. This attribute copies only
the blocks that have changed, rather than performing a full
resynchronization. Fast mirror resynchronization can dramatically reduce
the time that is required to complete the backup.
Fast Mirror Resynchronization (FMR) is a separate product for Veritas
Volume Manager.

3 With the Media Server or Third-Party Copy method, the disks that make up
the disk group must meet certain requirements.
See “Disk requirements for Media Server and Third-Party Copy methods”
on page 226.

About VxVM instant snapshots

Snapshot Manager supports two additional kinds of snapshot volumes that are
included in Volume Manager 4.0: full-sized instant snapshots and space-optimized
instant snapshots. These types of volumes offer some advantages over traditional
third-mirror snapshots, such as immediate availability and easier configuration and
administration:
■ Full-sized instant snapshot
This type of snapshot volume is a variation on the VxVM third-mirror volume
snapshot model. It makes a snapshot volume available for access as soon as
the snapshot plexes have been created. Like traditional third-mirror volumes,
this volume after resynchronization can be moved into a separate disk group or
turned into an independent volume.
■ Space-optimized instant snapshot
This type of snapshot volume contains only the blocks that changed during the
snapshot and uses a storage cache (cache object) to store them. The size of
this cache may be configured when the snapshot is created. This volume can
be created very quickly and uses a minimum of disk space. Note that it cannot
be moved into a separate disk group or turned into an independent volume.
Refer to Veritas Volume Manager 4.0 Administrator’s Guide for complete
descriptions of instant snapshot volumes and for configuration assistance.
 Configuration of software-based snapshot methods 135
Software-based snapshot methods

About NetBackup snapshot methods

The instant snapshot feature of VxVM 4.0 is supported by NetBackup’s VxVM,
FlashSnap, and VVR methods. Note the following:
■ FlashSnap supports VxVM full-sized instant snapshots, but not space-optimized
snapshot. Additionally, FlashSnap supports VxVM volumes in a shared disk
group.
■ For alternate client backup, only the VVR method supports space-optimized
snapshots.
Apart from configuring the VxVM volumes and selecting VxVM, FlashSnap, or VVR
as the NetBackup snapshot method, no special parameters in NetBackup are
required.

Space-Optimized instant snapshots

To use the space-optimized snapshot feature of VxVM, you must create a cache
object for the snapshot.
See “Creating space-optimized snapshots” on page 115.

About FlashSnap
FlashSnap uses the Persistent FastResync and Disk Group Split and Join features
of Veritas Volume Manager (VxVM).
The FlashSnap snapshot method can be used for alternate client backups only, in
the split mirror configuration.
See “Alternate client backup split mirror examples” on page 28.
FlashSnap supports VxVM full-sized instant snapshots, but not space-optimized
snapshot. Additionally, FlashSnap supports VxVM volumes in a shared disk group.
For support configurations, please refer to the NetBackup 7.x Snapshot Client
Compatibility List.

Testing volumes for FlashSnap

Before you run an alternate client backup with the FlashSnap snapshot method,
test your FlashSnap volume configuration as described in this section. You must
ensure that the disk(s) containing the volume can be moved (deported and imported)
to the alternate client without errors.
For instance, the backup disks cannot be split off into a new disk group and deported,
if the disks containing the backup volumes contain some part of a volume that has
another part on a disk that is not in the backup disks. Deporting a disk group means
disabling access to that disk group.
 Configuration of software-based snapshot methods 136
Software-based snapshot methods

See the Volume Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information on deporting
disk groups.
The following steps are described in more detail in the Veritas FlashSnap
Point-In-Time Copy Solutions Administrator’s Guide.
To test volumes for FlashSnap on UNIX
1 On the primary host:
■ Add a DCO log to the volume:

vxassist -g diskgroup addlog volume logtype=dco

■ Enable FastResync on the volume:

vxvol -g diskgroup set fastresync=on volume

■ Create a new snapshot mirror:

vxassist -g diskgroup -b snapstart volume

■ Create a snapshot volume from the primary volume:

For disk groups that were created with VxVM 5.x:

vxassist -g diskgroup snapshot volume snap_volume

Note: Choose a volume name that is fewer than 15 characters. Volume

names are prefixed or suffixed with characters, which increases the volume
name. Lengthy volume names can cause snapshot jobs to fail.

For disk groups that were created with VxVM 4.x:

vxsnap -g diskgroup snapshot volume snap_volume

For disk groups that were created with VxVM 3.x:

vxassist -g diskgroup snapshot volume snap_volume

■ Move the disks containing the snapshot volume to a separate (split) disk
group:

vxdg split diskgroup split_diskgroup snap_volume

If the volume has not been properly configured, you may see an error similar
to the following:
 Configuration of software-based snapshot methods 137
Software-based snapshot methods

host-name# vxdg split lhdvvr lhdvvr_split SNAP-emc_concat

vxvm:vxdg: ERROR: vxdg split lhdvvr lhdvvr_split failed
vxvm:vxdg: ERROR: emc_dis05 : Disk moving, but not all
subdisks on it

■ Re-examine the layout of the disks and the volumes that are assigned to
them, and reassign the unwanted volumes to other disks as needed.
Consult the Veritas FlashSnap Point-In-Time Copy Solutions Administrator’s
Guide for examples of disk groups that can and cannot be split.
■ Deport the split disk group:

vxdg deport split_diskgroup

2 On the secondary host:

■ Import the disk group that was deported from the primary:

vxdg import split_diskgroup

■ Enable the imported volume:

vxrecover -g split_diskgroup -m snap_volume

■ Start the volume:

vxvol -g split_diskgroup start snap_volume

If these commands execute successfully, the volume setup is correct.

3 After this test, you must re-establish the original configuration to what it was
before you tested the volumes.
■ Deport the disk group on the alternate client.
■ Import the disk group on the primary client.
■ Recover and join the original volume group.
See “Identifying and removing a left-over snapshot” on page 270.
To test volumes for FlashSnap on Windows
1 On the primary host:
■ If not already done, create a snapshot mirror:

vxassist snapstart \Device\HarddiskDmVolumes\diskgroup\volume

■ Create a snapshot volume from the primary volume:

 Configuration of software-based snapshot methods 138
Software-based snapshot methods

vxassist snapshot \Device\HarddiskDmVolumes\diskgroup\volume

DrivePath=C:\Temp\Mount SNAP-Volume

■ Move the disks containing the snapshot volume to a separate (split) disk
group.
The disk group is also deported after this command completes:

vxdg -g DskGrp -n SPLIT-DskGrp split

\Device\HarddiskDmVolumes\diskgroup\snap_volume

2 On the secondary host:

■ Rescan to make the deported disk group visible on the secondary host:

vxassist rescan

■ Import the disk group that was deported from the primary:

vxdg -g split_diskgroup import

■ Assign the snapshot volume to an empty NTFS directory.

This example uses C:\Temp\Mount.

vxassist assign \Device\HarddiskDmVolumes\split_diskgroup

\snap_volume DrivePath=C:\Temp\Mount

If these commands execute successfully, the volume setup is correct.

About VVR
The VVR snapshot method (for UNIX clients only) relies on the Veritas Volume
Replicator, which is a licensed component of VxVM. The Volume Replicator
maintains a consistent copy of data at a remote site. Volume Replicator is described
in the Veritas Volume Replicator Administrator’s Guide.
The VVR snapshot method can be used for alternate client backups only, in the
data replication configuration.
See “Alternate client backup through data replication example (UNIX only)”
on page 31.
VVR makes use of the VxVM remote replication feature. The backup processing
is done by the alternate client at the replication site, not by the primary host or client.
VVR supports VxVM instant snapshots.
See “About VxVM instant snapshots” on page 134.
 Configuration of software-based snapshot methods 139
Software-based snapshot methods

VVR volume replication configuration

Before you do a replication backup with VVR, make sure to configure the Volume
Replicator as explained in the Volume Replicator Administrator’s Guide.

VVR name registration

Inband Control (IBC) messages are used to exchange control information between
primary and secondary hosts. A name has to be registered at both the primary and
secondary hosts for each replicated volume group before IBC messaging can be
used. The VVR snapshot method assumes that the application name is
APP_NBU_VVR. To avoid an initial backup failure, you should register that name.
See “Testing the replication setup with VVR” on page 139.
If APP_NBU_VVR is not registered, NetBackup registers the name when the first
backup is attempted, but the backup fails. Subsequent backups, however, succeed.

Primary and secondary disk group and volume names for

VVR
For the VVR snapshot method, the disk group and volume must have the same
name on both the primary host and secondary host. If the names are different, the
VVR backup fails.

Testing the replication setup with VVR

Before you run an alternate client backup with VVR, test your replication setup as
follows.
To test your replication setup with VVR
1 On both primary host and secondary host, register the APP_NBU_VVR name:

vxibc -g diskgroup register APP_NBU_VVR replicated_group

This command must be executed twice, once on each host.

2 On the primary host, send an IBC message to the secondary host:

vxibc -g diskgroup send APP_NBU_VVR replicated_group

replication_link
 Configuration of software-based snapshot methods 140
Software-based snapshot methods

3 On the secondary host, receive the IBC message from the primary host:

vxibc -g diskgroup -R10 receive APP_NBU_VVR replicated_group

4 On the secondary host, restart replication:

vxibc -g diskgroup unfreeze APP_NBU_VVR replicated_group

If these commands execute successfully, the replication setup is correct.

About NAS_Snapshot
NetBackup can make point-in-time snapshots of data on NAS (NDMP) hosts using
the NDMP V4 snapshot extension. The snapshot is stored on the same device that
contains the NAS client data. From the snapshot, you can restore individual files
or roll back a file system or volume by means of the Instant Recovery feature.

Note: NetBackup for NDMP software is required on the server, and the NAS vendor
must support the NDMP V4 snapshot extension.

You can control snapshot deletion by means of the Maximum Snapshots (Instant
Recovery Only) parameter. This parameter is specified on the Snapshot Options
dialog of the policy.
For detailed information about NAS snapshots, setting up a policy for NAS snapshots
and format of NAS snapshot name, check the 'Network Attached Storage (NAS)
snapshot configuration' chapter of this guide.
See “Means of controlling snapshots” on page 107.

About VSS
VSS uses the Volume Shadow Copy Service of Microsoft Windows and supports
Instant Recovery. VSS is for local backup or alternate client backup.
For the most up-to-date list of Windows operating systems and disk arrays supported
by this method, see the NetBackup 7.x Snapshot Client Compatibility List document
available on the Veritas support site:
http://www.netbackup.com/compatibility
For alternate client backup, the client data must reside on either a disk array such
as EMC, HP, or Hitachi with snapshot capability, or a Veritas Storage Foundation
for Windows 4.1 or later volume with snapshots enabled. VSS supports file system
backup of a disk partition (such as E:\) and backup of databases.
 Configuration of software-based snapshot methods 141
Software-based snapshot methods

Note: VSS-based snapshot methods offer a general interface to Windows Shadow

Copy Services. VSS selects the actual snapshot method depending on which
snapshot provider is configured on the client. For instance, if the data resides on
an EMC CLARiiON array and the array administrator configured the array and its
snapshot capability, the Volume Shadow Copy Service selects the appropriate
CLARiiON VSS hardware provider to take the snapshot.

For configuration assistance, refer to your Microsoft documentation.

Disk array reconfiguration steps

The following preconfiguration steps may be required, depending on the make and
model of your disk array:
■ For arrays in the EMC CLARiiON and DMX series, and for the HP EVA series,
see the appropriate topic for your array.
■ For backup of a disk array using the Windows VSS snapshot method with Instant
Recovery, be sure to configure NetBackup disk array credentials (if required by
the array) before you run the backup. A Point in Time Rollback fails if NetBackup
did not have credentials to access the array during the backup.
See the appropriate credentials topic for your disk array and snapshot method.
■ For Hitachi arrays that are set up for mirror-based backup, see Hitachi and HP
arrays in the NetBackup Snapshot Client Configuration document. This document
may be accessed from the following location:
http://www.veritas.com/docs/000081320

Configuration and testing of volumes with VSS

Before you run an alternate client backup with VSS, configure and test volumes.
See “Testing volumes for FlashSnap” on page 135.

Notes and restrictions on VSS

The following notes apply to local backup and to alternate client backup:
■ Supports backup of Storage Foundation for Windows 4.1 or later logical volumes
OR backup of file systems on supported disk arrays.
■ Supports backup of Windows NTFS file systems on a disk partition, and backup
of data in a database. The policy type can be MS-Exchange-Server or
MS-Windows.
■ Does not support the backup of Windows system-protected files (the System
State, such as the Registry and Active Directory). If the volume containing the
 Configuration of software-based snapshot methods 142
Software-based snapshot methods

data to back up includes Windows system files, that volume cannot be backed
up with the VSS snapshot method.
■ Does not support the backup of Windows system database files (such as RSM
Database and Terminal Services Database).
 Chapter 8
Support for Cluster
Volume Manager
Environments (CVM)
This chapter includes the following topics:

■ About support for CVM environments

■ Note on NetBackup and CVM

■ About enabling VxVM or FlashSnap snapshots in a CVM environment

■ About enabling the NetBackup client to execute VxVM commands on the CVM
master node

About support for CVM environments

The cluster functionality of the Veritas Volume Manager (VxVM) called CVM allows
the nodes in a Veritas Cluster Server (VCS) environment to simultaneously access
and manage disks under Veritas Volume Manager control.
The supported snapshot methods are VxVM, FlashSnap, and VxFS_Checkpoint.
Note the following:
■ For the FlashSnap and VxVM snapshot methods, snapshots can be created on
a client that is on a secondary node of the CVM cluster.
■ Instant Recovery point-in-time rollback can be performed even if the virtual name
of the client to be restored has failed over to a different node. NetBackup obtains
the required restore information from the primary server.
 Support for Cluster Volume Manager Environments (CVM) 144
Note on NetBackup and CVM

■ For the FlashSnap and VxVM snapshot methods, mirror synchronization of

multiple volumes completes faster.
■ For the FlashSnap snapshot method, the alternate client can be a CVM node.
If the alternate client is a CVM node and the
/usr/openv/netbackup/NB_SNC_ALLOW_SNAP_DG touch file exists on that node,
the snapshot disk group is imported as a shared disk group. Otherwise by default
the snapshot disk group is imported as a private disk group.
For details on the cluster capabilities in the Volume Manager, refer to the Veritas
Volume Manager Administrator’s Guide.
Note that the cluster functionality of Veritas Volume Manager requires a separate
license.
This chapter does not discuss Veritas Storage Foundation Cluster File System
(SFCFS) or cluster management software such as Veritas Cluster Server (VCS).
Such products are separately licensed, and are not included with Veritas Volume
Manager. See the documentation that is provided with those products for more
information about them.

Note on NetBackup and CVM

When adding clients to the NetBackup policy Client list, use the application's virtual
name in the cluster, not an actual node name. The virtual name allows the same
host to be backed up by the policy after it has failed over to another node. Otherwise,
the backup attempts to access a node that is no longer accessible.

About enabling VxVM or FlashSnap snapshots in

a CVM environment
To create a FlashSnap or VxVM snapshot on a client that is on a secondary node
of the cluster, enable the NetBackup client to execute commands on the CVM
master node.
See “About enabling the NetBackup client to execute VxVM commands on the CVM
master node” on page 145.
 Support for Cluster Volume Manager Environments (CVM) 145
About enabling the NetBackup client to execute VxVM commands on the CVM master node

About enabling the NetBackup client to execute

VxVM commands on the CVM master node
To back up a VxVM volume that is in a shared disk group on a CVM secondary
node, certain VxVM commands may have to be executed remotely on the CVM
master node. Therefore, you must enable the NetBackup client to execute the
commands on any node. (This requirement applies to the FlashSnap or VxVM
snapshot methods only.)
For further instructions, see Enabling the NetBackup client to execute VxVM
commands on the CVM master node in the following Veritas tech note:
http://www.veritas.com/docs/000081320
 Chapter 9
Configuration of snapshot
methods for disk arrays
This chapter includes the following topics:

■ About the new disk array snapshot methods

■ Disk array configuration tasks

■ OS-specific configuration tasks

■ About VSS configuration (Windows)

■ About EMC CLARiiON arrays

■ About EMC Symmetrix arrays

■ About HP EVA arrays

■ About IBM DS6000 and DS8000 arrays

■ About IBM DS4000 array

■ About Hitachi SMS/WMS/AMS, USP/NSC, USP-V/VM

■ About HP-XP arrays

■ About array troubleshooting

About the new disk array snapshot methods

These topics describe NetBackup's disk array snapshot methods. These methods
take advantage of high-speed mirroring and other snapshot capabilities that are
provided by particular disk arrays.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 147
About the new disk array snapshot methods

The following snapshot methods support only English locale. They do not support
I18N (internationalization).
■ EMC_CLARiiON_Snapview_Clone
■ EMC_CLARiiON_Snapview_Snapshot
■ EMC_TimeFinder_Clone
■ EMC_TimeFinder_Mirror
■ EMC_TimeFinder_Snap
■ Hitachi_ShadowImage
■ Hitachi_CopyOnWrite
■ HP_EVA_Vsnap
■ HP_EVA_Snapshot
■ HP_EVA_Snapclone
■ HP_XP_BuisinessCopy
■ HP_XP_Snapshot
■ IBM_DiskStorage_FlashCopy
■ IBM_StorageManager_FlashCopy

About array-specific methods vs array-independent methods

Some snapshot methods are disk array independent. These methods are described
in the following topic:
See “Software-based snapshot methods” on page 125.
For these methods, the client platform or the presence of a particular file system
or volume manager might determine or limit selection of the snapshot method.
However, if the client data resides on an array, the make of the array does not
determine the choice of the snapshot method.
The array methods in the current chapter, however, are each written for a particular
model of disk array. For instance, the EMC_CLARiiON_SnapView_Clone method
is designed for the EMC CLARiiON CX 300/500 and CX3 series arrays. Regardless
of client platform or storage stack, you cannot use EMC_CLARiiON_SnapView_
Clone on a non-EMC array, or even on a different model of EMC array.
For an up-to-date list of supported disk arrays, refer to the NetBackup 7.x Snapshot
Client Compatibility document. This document may be accessed from the following
link:
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 148
About the new disk array snapshot methods

http://www.netbackup.com/compatibility

Advantages of the new array-specific methods

The snapshot methods that are described in this chapter offer advantages over
software-based methods. Note the following when choosing between the
array-specific methods in this chapter and the snapshot methods that are described
in other chapters of this guide.
The new array-specific methods enable a variety of snapshot capabilities that the
disk arrays provide:
■ All data movement is within the array, saving network bandwidth.
■ The Instant Recovery feature of NetBackup Snapshot Manager.
See “About Instant Recovery” on page 20.
The legacy array-specific methods (TimeFinder, ShadowImage, BusinessCopy)
do not support Instant Recovery.
■ Clone and copy-on-write snapshot methods, in addition to full mirror methods
(depending on the array). The legacy array methods support only mirrors.
■ Automatic provisioning (LUN masking) of snapshot devices on the NetBackup
clients. With the legacy array-specific methods, a mirror device had to be
manually provisioned before it can be used in a backup. That preconfiguration
step is no longer necessary.

About types of disk array methods

Two types of snapshots are designed for each supported disk array. One type
creates a full-sized, fully allocated copy (a clone or mirror). Another type uses a
copy-on-write system, which is not a full copy and saves disk space. The methods
go by various names, depending on the disk array vendor.
All methods are listed in the following topic.
See “Disk array methods at a glance” on page 150.

Note: Some disk array vendors use the term snapshot to refer to a certain kind of
point-in-time copy made by the array. In other chapters of this guide, however,
snapshot refers more generally to all kinds of point-in-time copies, disk-array based
or otherwise. Refer to your array documentation for the definition of array vendor
terminology.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 149
About the new disk array snapshot methods

Important disk array method notes and restrictions

Note the following:
■ The disk array methods support the Veritas File System (VxFS). With a few
exceptions, these methods do not support software-based volume managers
such as the Veritas Volume Manager (VxVM) or any native Linux or Solaris
volume managers. If your client data is configured in Veritas VxVM volumes,
use either the legacy array-specific methods for UNIX clients (TimeFinder,
ShadowImage, BusinessCopy) or a software-based snapshot method such as
VxVM or FlashSnap.

Note: The following array methods support Veritas Volume Manager (VxVM)
volumes: Hitachi_CopyOnWrite and Hitachi_ShadowImage. The
IBM_DiskStorage_FlashCopy method (on the IBM DS6000) supports VxVM on
the AIX platform.

■ Use caution with Instant Recovery rollback. An Instant Recovery point-in-time

rollback overwrites the entire LUN (source disk) with the contents of the snapshot
or mirror disk. If you have multiple file systems or multiple partitions configured
on the hardware array LUN (the source disk), one or more of those file systems
or partitions sharing the snapshot disk or mirror disk may have older data that
you do not want to write back to the source. When the rollback takes place, any
older data on the snapshot disk or mirror disk replaces the newer data on the
source.
■ In a clustered environment, Instant Recovery point-in-time rollback is not
supported.
■ Except for required preconfiguration as explained in this chapter, do not perform
manual operations on any snapshot resources that NetBackup uses. After the
preconfiguration is completed as explained in this chapter, NetBackup
automatically manages the required LUNs, snapshots, clones, and mirrors.

Warning: If you make other changes to the snapshot resources, the NetBackup
catalog may be invalidated. For instance, restores may fail from backups
consisting of the snapshots that have been deleted outside the view of
NetBackup.

For example, DO NOT do the following:

■ Do not remove a snapshot resource that NetBackup created.
■ Do not create a snapshot resource in a storage group.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 150
About the new disk array snapshot methods

■ Do not change the state of a snapshot resource, such as by manually

resynchronizing it.
■ You should not use array device targets in more than one policy. If you want
to reuse devices after destroying an old policy, you need to manually expire
the backup images, which exist for that policy.

Disk array methods at a glance

Table 9-1 is an alphabetical listing of the disk array snapshot methods.
For up-to-date information on the arrays and on supported software versions, refer
to the NetBackup Snapshot Client Configuration document. This document may be
accessed from the following link:
http://www.veritas.com/docs/000081320

Table 9-1 Snapshot methods at a glance

Snapshot method Description and notes

EMC_CLARiiON_Snapview_Clone For full-volume mirror snapshots with EMC

CLARiiON disk arrays with Navisphere. (An EMC
CLARiiON clone is actually a full-volume copy
mirror, like a Symmetrix BCV.)

See “About EMC CLARiiON arrays” on page 163.

EMC_CLARiiON_SnapView_Snapshot For space-optimized, copy-on-write snapshots with

EMC CLARiiON disk arrays with Navisphere.

See “About EMC CLARiiON arrays” on page 163.

EMC_TimeFinder_Clone For full-volume copy (clone) snapshots with EMC

disk arrays with Solutions Enabler.

See “About EMC Symmetrix arrays” on page 177.

EMC_TimeFinder_Mirror For full-volume copy (mirror) snapshots with EMC

disk arrays with Solutions Enabler.

See “About EMC Symmetrix arrays” on page 177.

EMC_TimeFinder_Snap For space-optimized, copy-on-write snapshots with

EMC disk arrays with Solutions Enabler.

See “About EMC Symmetrix arrays” on page 177.

 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 151
About the new disk array snapshot methods

Table 9-1 Snapshot methods at a glance (continued)

Snapshot method Description and notes

Hitachi_CopyOnWrite For space-optimized, copy-on-write snapshots with

Hitachi SMS/WMS/AMS, USP/NSC, and
USP-V/VM series of arrays.

See “About Hitachi SMS/WMS/AMS, USP/NSC,

USP-V/VM” on page 201.

Hitachi_ShadowImage For full-volume copy (mirror) snapshots with

Hitachi SMS/WMS/AMS, USP/NSC, and
USP-V/VM series of arrays.

See “About Hitachi SMS/WMS/AMS, USP/NSC,

USP-V/VM” on page 201.

HP_EVA_Snapclone For full-volume copy (clone) snapshots with

Hewlett-Packard EVA disk arrays with
CommandView SSSU.
Note: this method is the only EVA disk array
method that supports Instant Recovery.

See “About HP EVA arrays” on page 185.

HP_EVA_Snapshot For space-optimized, fully allocated copy-on-write

snapshots with Hewlett-Packard EVA disk arrays
with CommandView SSSU.

See “About HP EVA arrays” on page 185.

HP_EVA_Vsnap For space-optimized, on-demand copy-on-write

snapshots with Hewlett-Packard EVA disk arrays
with CommandView SSSU.

See “About HP EVA arrays” on page 185.

IBM_DiskStorage_FlashCopy For full-volume copy (clone) snapshots on IBM

DS6000 and DS8000 series of arrays with DSCLI
version.

See “About IBM DS6000 and DS8000 arrays”

on page 190.

IBM_StorageManager_FlashCopy For full-volume copy (clone) snapshots on the IBM

DS4000 series of arrays (excluding 4100), with
SMcli.

See “About IBM DS4000 array” on page 196.

 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 152
Disk array configuration tasks

Table 9-1 Snapshot methods at a glance (continued)

Snapshot method Description and notes

HP_XP_BusinessCopy For mirror-based snapshots with HP-XP arrays

See “About HP-XP arrays” on page 206.

HP_XP_Snapshot For COW-based snapshots with HP-XP arrays

See “About HP-XP arrays” on page 206.

OST_FIM The name of the snapshot method that is selected

in a policy configured for snapshot replication using
Replication Director. The name represents
OpenStorage Frozen Image Method.

Refer to the NetBackup Replication Director

Solutions Guide for more details.

Disk array configuration tasks

Note the following tasks.

Configuration tasks for the array administrator

Before you configure a backup, your array administrator or network administrator
must do several tasks. Assistance with these tasks may be found in your array
documentation or Windows documentation.
The array administrator must do the following tasks:
■ Install the disk array and its software (such as Web) interface, including
appropriate licenses.
■ Install supported HBAs on the NetBackup primary client and alternate clients.
■ If not already done, zone the client HBAs through the Fibre Channel switch, so
the array is visible to the primary client and any alternate clients.
■ Register your NetBackup primary client and any alternate clients with the array.
■ Install NetBackup and array vendor snapshot management software on the
NetBackup primary client and any alternate clients.
■ Configure source and snapshot devices on the array (such as LUNs).
■ For Microsoft Windows primary clients and any alternate clients, install the
appropriate VSS provider for your array.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 153
Disk array configuration tasks

Configuration tasks for the NetBackup administrator

The NetBackup administrator must do the following tasks:
■ If necessary, configure target devices on the array.
See the topic for your array.
See “Initial configuration of certain arrays” on page 159.
■ For certain arrays, configure NetBackup disk array host credentials, which are
required to access the array snapshot management software.
See the topic for your array.

EMC CLARiiON See “Configuring NetBackup to access the

CLARiiON array” on page 167.

EMC Symmetrix See “About configuring NetBackup to

access the Symmetrix array” on page 181.

HP EVA See “Configuring NetBackup to access the

EVA array” on page 189.

IBM DS6000 and DS8000 See “Configuring NetBackup to access the

IBM DS6000 or DS8000 array” on page 191.

IBM DS4000 See “Configuring NetBackup to access the

IBM DS4000 array” on page 199.

Hitachi SMS/WMS/AMS, USP/NSC, See “About communication between

USP-V/VM NetBackup and the Hitachi array”
on page 202.

HP-XP See “Determining if the HP-XP command

devices are visible” on page 207.

■ Create a NetBackup Snapshot Manager policy for the array.

See the topic on the NetBackup policy for your array.

EMC CLARiiON See “Configuring a NetBackup policy for a

CLARiiON array method” on page 176.

EMC Symmetrix See “Configuring a policy for

EMC_TimeFinder methods” on page 183.

HP EVA See “Configuring a NetBackup policy for an

HP EVA array method” on page 189.

IBM DS6000 and DS8000 See “Configuring a NetBackup policy for

IBM_DiskStorage_FlashCopy” on page 195.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 154
Disk array configuration tasks

IBM DS4000 See “Configuring a NetBackup policy for

IBM_StorageManager_FlashCopy”
on page 200.

Hitachi SMS/WMS/AMS, USP/NSC, See “Configuring a NetBackup policy for

USP-V/VM Hitachi_ShadowImage or
Hitachi_CopyOnWrite” on page 204.

HP-XP See “Configuring a NetBackup policy for

HP_XP_BusinessCopy and
HP_XP_Snapshot” on page 208.

Disk array configuration tasks diagram

The following diagram shows the major components and tasks that are required
for a snapshot backup of a disk array. Some of these tasks must be performed by
the array administrator.

Figure 9-1 Components for backup of disk array on Fibre Channel

NetBackup NetBackup
master server: media server
Define
NetBackup policy

LAN

Zone the client

HBAs; see your
hardware
documentation

SAN Fibre Channel SAN

HBA HBA

Disk array: Disk array NetBackup

NetBackup
Configure virtual host: Configure client: Install
alternate client
devices (LUNs) on NetBackup login HBA and array
(optional)
array; see your array credentials for CLI software;
documentation. this host * see your
hardware
documentation
* Some arrays do not have a separate front-end host; NetBackup credentials must be
defined for the array itself. The array validates the NetBackup credentials.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 155
OS-specific configuration tasks

OS-specific configuration tasks

This topic describes the configuration tasks that are related to the NetBackup client
host operating system.

About dynamic multi-pathing

In a SAN fabric, it is advantageous (for redundancy reasons) for multiple pathways
to exist from a host computer to a device on a disk array. The purpose of dynamic
multi-pathing software is the following:
■ Manage these pathways so that only one is in use at a time
■ Switch to another pathway if the one in use fails
Snapshot Manager supports EMC PowerPath dynamic multi-pathing software on
Solaris and Windows. Due to limitations that prevent the dynamic importing of
devices, PowerPath is not supported on Linux.
For certain arrays, Snapshot Manager works in a multipath configuration with or
without PowerPath installed, because all visible device paths provide equal access
to the array device. EMC Symmetrix and HP-EVA arrays behave in this manner.
For other arrays, if multiple device paths exist to an array device, Snapshot Manager
can use only one of those paths. In this case, PowerPath must be used to ensure
that Snapshot Manager always uses the active device path. EMC CLARiiON behaves
in this manner. If PowerPath is not in use and the disk array is EMC CLARiiON,
the Fibre Channel switch must be configured so that only one path is zoned to the
NetBackup client.

HBA configuration
The supported HBAs are Emulex and QLogic. The JNI HBA is not supported.

HBA persistent target bindings

Persistent target bindings must be configured for every HBA. Without persistent
bindings, the array’s target number cannot be guaranteed on the host. A persistent
device target number ensures that snapshots appear at the same device location
if a NetBackup client host restarts. Refer to your HBA vendor documentation for
help configuring persistent bindings.

Note: Persistent target bindings are not needed if you use Leadville drivers on
Solaris.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 156
OS-specific configuration tasks

About Solaris sd.conf file

The /kernel/drv/sd.conf file must have sufficient entries to allow for the dynamic
import of snapshot devices. Snapshot devices are created when the backup starts,
and must be made visible on the NetBackup client without restarting the operating
system. Entries should be added to the sd.conf file for the persistent target numbers
that were configured for the HBA.

Note: The sd.conf file does not have to be modified if you use Leadville drivers.

Veritas recommends that you add LUNs 0-15 for all disk array targets on which
snapshots are to be created. This creates 16 host-side LUNs on each target that
can be used for importing the snapshots (clones, mirrors, and copy-on-write
snapshots) required for backups. If 16 host-side LUNs are not enough for a particular
disk array target, add more LUNs for that target. Note that snapshots are imported
to a NetBackup client in sequential order starting with the lowest unused host-side
LUN number. The host-side LUN number pool is managed on the disk array. The
disk array cannot determine which host-side LUN numbers have been configured
in sd.conf. The array can only determine which host-side LUN number it has not
yet assigned to the host. If the array adds a device at a host-side LUN number that
has not been configured in sd.conf, that device is not visible on the host. Also, if
alternate client backups are being used, be sure to properly configure sd.conf on
the alternate client.
You must restart after modifying sd.conf.
Symmetrix arrays pre-assign host-side LUN numbers (that is, the LUN numbers
are not set at the time the device is imported). These pre-selected LUN numbers
must be entered into sd.conf for the Symmetrix target number.

Note: If you use EMC Control Center interface (ECC) to determine Symmetrix
host-side LUN numbers, note that ECC shows host-side LUN numbers in
hexadecimal format. Since the LUN entries in sd.conf must be in decimal format,
convert the hexadecimal value to decimal before adding it to sd.conf.

If the Symmetrix array was persistently bound at target 5, and the host-side LUN
numbers of the Symmetrix devices are 65, 66, 67, then the following entries should
be added to sd.conf.

name="sd" class="scsi" target=5 lun=65;

name="sd" class="scsi" target=5 lun=66;
name="sd" class="scsi" target=5 lun=67;
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 157
OS-specific configuration tasks

Solaris sd.conf file (Hitachi arrays only)

Before running backups, you must configure a sufficient number of static devices
(array LUNs) in the /kernel/drv/sd.conf file on the client (and any alternate
client) to accommodate the number of snapshot devices that backups require.

Note: Hitachi arrays do not support dynamic import of snapshot devices.

Linux modprobe.conf file

The /etc/modprobe.conf file must be set to allow the Fibre Channel HBA driver
to scan for LUNs greater than 0. Make sure the following line (or something similar)
appears in the modprobe.conf file:

options scsi_mod max_luns=255

If the line is not present, add it to the modprobe.conf and enter the following:

#mv /boot/initrd-linux_kernel_version.img
/boot/initrd-linux_kernel_version.img.bak

#mkinitrd -v /boot/initrd-linux_kernel_version.img
linux_kernel_version

where the linux_kernel_version is the value that is returned from uname -r (for
example, 2.6.9-34.ELsmp).

Verifying NetBackup client access, zoning, and LUN masking

You can use the nbfirescan command to verify that the NetBackup clients have
access to the array devices and that the arrays are properly zoned and LUNs are
LUN masked. Note that nbfirescan only displays LUNs that have actually been
LUN masked to the host.
To verify NetBackup client access, zoning, and LUN masking
Enter the following on the client:
■ UNIX

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/nbfirescan

■ Windows

\Program Files\Common Files\Veritas

Shared\VxFI\4\Bin\nbfirescan.exe
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 158
OS-specific configuration tasks

This command queries the host’s SCSI bus for all the SCSI (or Fibre) attached
devices that are visible.
Note the following regarding CLARiiON:
■ If there are LUNs in the client’s CLARiiON storage group, the LUNs are included
in the output.
■ If there are no LUNs visible but the array is zoned to allow the host to see it, the
output includes the entry DGC LUNZ. This entry is a special LUN that the
CLARiiON uses for communication between the client and the array. The LUNZ
entry is replaced by another disk entry as soon as one is put in the storage group
which has been presented to the client.
Example Solaris output, followed by a description:

DevicePath Vendor Product ID EnclosureId DeviceId [Ctl,Bus,Tgt,Lun]

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/dev/rdsk/c3t4d57s2 EMC SYMMETRIX 000187910258 013C [00,00,00,00]
/dev/rdsk/c3t6d10s2 HP HSV200 5000-1FE1-5007-0020
6005-08B4-0010-5F49-0000-5000-408F-0000 [00,00,00,00]

Note: The last line of output is wrapped.

DevicePath Represents the actual access point for the device as it exists on
the client host.

EnclosureId Unique for each physical disk array.

DeviceId Unique for a physical disk or virtual disk in an enclosure. The

Enclosure ID/DeviceID pair constitutes a client host-independent
designation of a particular physical or virtual disk within a disk
array.

Ctl,Bus,Tgt,Lun Controller, bus, target, and LUN numbers are the elements that
designate a particular physical or virtual disk from the perspective
of the client host computer.

Example Linux output (wrapped to fit page):

DevicePath Vendor Product ID EnclosureId DeviceId [Ctl,Bus,Tgt,Lun]

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/dev/sdb DGC RAID 5 APM00050602951 60:06:01:60:83:B0:11:00:4D:C4:8A:1D:
35:EC:DA:11 [01,00,00,00]
/dev/sdc DGC RAID 5 APM00050602951 60:06:01:60:83:B0:11:00:4C:C4:8A:1D:
35:EC:DA:11 [01,00,00,01]
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 159
About VSS configuration (Windows)

/dev/sdd DGC RAID 5 APM00050602951 60:06:01:60:83:B0:11:00:4B:C4:8A:1D:

35:EC:DA:11 [01,00,00,02]
/dev/sde DGC RAID 5 APM00050602951 60:06:01:60:83:B0:11:00:4A:C4:8A:1D:
35:EC:DA:11 [01,00,00,03]
/dev/sdf HP HSV200 5000-1FE1-5007-0020 6005-08B4-0010-5F49-0000-5000-22F8-0000
[01,00,01,01]
/dev/sdg HP HSV200 5000-1FE1-5007-0020 6005-08B4-0010-5F49-0000-5000-22FF-0000
[01,00,01,02]

■ Most of the output lines are wrapped.

■ DGC designates a CLARiiON device.

About VSS configuration (Windows)

On Windows clients, VSS is used during backups to create snapshots on disk
arrays. Certain preconfiguration steps may be required as described in these
sections.

Note on NetBackup array credentials

For certain disk arrays, you must supply NetBackup with logon credentials so that
it can access the array. See the appropriate section in this chapter to configure
NetBackup to access the array.

Note: For backup of a disk array using the Windows VSS snapshot method with
Instant Recovery, be sure to configure NetBackup disk array credentials (if required
by the array) before you run the backup. A Point in Time Rollback fails if NetBackup
did not have credentials to access the array during the backup.

Initial configuration of certain arrays

Certain arrays require some initial configuration to use the VSS method for a backup.

CLARiiON No VSS-related preconfiguration is needed, except installation

of the required array software and the VSS provider.

See “Veritas support for VSS Snapshot and EMC CLARiiON”

on page 164.

HP EVA No VSS-related preconfiguration is needed, except installation

of the required array software and the VSS provider. For any
other configuration requirements, see the section in this
chapter for your array.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 160
About VSS configuration (Windows)

Symmetrix You must associate the source device in the array with the
target device(s) that are to be used for the differential
(copy-on-write) or plex-based (clone or mirror) backup.
Note: For Symmetrix arrays, NetBackup supports VSS with
differential (copy-on-write) backup but not plex-based (clone
or mirror) backup.

EMC TimeFinder Snap See “Creating EMC disk groups for VSS differential snapshots
that use EMC TimeFinder Snap” on page 160.

See “Verifying that VSS can make a snapshot” on page 161.

See “Testing the EMC TimeFinder Snap backup” on page 163.

Creating EMC disk groups for VSS differential snapshots

that use EMC TimeFinder Snap
Use the following procedure.
To create EMC disk groups for VSS differential snapshots that use EMC
TimeFinder Snap
1 Create a disk group to contain any number of primary and secondary disks.

symdg create nbfim_test

Creates a disk group named nbfim_test.

2 Add primary disks to the disk group.

symld -g nbfim_test add dev 02A

Adds a primary disk 02A to disk group nbfim_test.

3 Add a VDEV disk to the disk group.

symld -g nbfim_test add dev 08C -vdev

Adds the VDEV disk 08C to the nbfim_test disk group.

When these commands are successfully entered, NetBackup can make
snapshot backups with primary device 02A and its target VDEV 08C.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 161
About VSS configuration (Windows)

Verifying that VSS can make a snapshot

Before you finish preconfiguration or run a backup with the Windows VSS method,
verify that the Volume Shadow Copy Service can make and delete a snapshot on
the array.
The command that is used in the following procedure is available with Microsoft
Volume Shadow Copy SDK 7.2.
On the NetBackup client, you can use the commands in the following procedure.

Note: If these commands do not succeed, consult your Windows documentation

or your array administrator.

To verify that VSS can make or delete a snapshot

1 To create a snapshot, enter one of the following commands .
■ For a differential (copy-on-write) snapshot:

vshadow.exe -ad -nw -p source_drive

■ For a plex (clone or mirror) snapshot:

 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 162
About VSS configuration (Windows)

vshadow.exe -ap -nw -p source_drive

2 To display information on all existing snapshots on the client, enter the following
command:

vshadow.exe -q

Example output:

VSHADOW.EXE 2.2 - Volume Shadow Copy sample client

Copyright ©) 2005 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
(Option: Query all shadow copies)
- Setting the VSS context to: 0xffffffff

Querying all shadow copies in the system ...

* SNAPSHOT ID = {ae445cc3-e508-4052-b0f6-a5f02cf85f1e} ...

- Shadow copy Set: {6665f5f7-6468-4a22-bd73-29ef8a30a760}
- Original count of shadow copies = 1
- Original Volume name:
\\?\Volume{0db3bc15-53b1-4d63-94dc-7c7d28b172cb}\ [K:\]

- Creation Time: 4/10/2007 2:02:13 PM

- Shadow copy device name:
\\?\Volume{55226978-3131-4a12-8246-97ace27cf976}
- Originating machine: oil.fun.com
- Service machine: oil.fun.com
- Not Exposed
- Provider id: {21e5ab69-9685-4664-a5b2-4ca42bddb153}
- Attributes: No_Auto_Release Persistent Hardware
No_Writers
Plex

3 To delete snapshots, do the following:

■ Look in the vshadow.exe -q command output for the Shadow copy Set
ID of a snapshot that you created above.
■ Enter the following command to delete a particular snapshot:

vshadow.exe -dx = {Shadow_copy_set_ID}

■ Enter the following command to delete all snapshots on the client:

vshadow.exe -da
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 163
About EMC CLARiiON arrays

Testing the EMC TimeFinder Snap backup

After you complete the Symmetrix configuration steps as described in this chapter
and run a backup, you can verify that the snapshot was successful.
To test the EMC TimeFinder Snap backup
Enter the following command to verify that the snapshot was successful.

symsnap -g nbfim_test query -multi

The -multi option shows multiple snapshots.

For example:

C:\Program Files\EMC\SYMCLI\bin\symsnap -g dmx-5D query -multi

where dmx-5D is the name of the Symmetrix device group.

Sample output:

Device Group (DG) Name: dmx-5D

DG's Type : REGULAR
DG's Symmetrix ID : 000187910258

Source Device Target Device State Copy

------------------------- ------------------- ---------- ------------ ----
Protected Changed
Logical Sym Tracks Logical Sym G Tracks SRC <=> TGT (%)
------------------------- ------------------- ---------- ------------ ----

DEV001 005D 273108 VDEV001 01A8 X CopyOnWrite 0

276208 VDEV002 01A9 X 2 CopyOnWrite 0

Total -------- ----------

Track(s) 552417 3
MB(s) 17263.0 0.1

If the SRC <=> TGT value reads CopyOnWrite, the snapshot was created
successfully.

About EMC CLARiiON arrays

The following sections include background information and configuration tasks for
NetBackup Snapshot Manager backups using EMC CLARiiON arrays. These tasks
must be completed before you run a backup.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 164
About EMC CLARiiON arrays

EMC CLARiiON software requirements for UNIX

Table 9-2 shows the required EMC software.
For software versions used in test configurations, see the NetBackup Snapshot
Client Configuration document at:
http://www.veritas.com/docs/000081320

Table 9-2 Software that is required for EMC CLARiiON

Software Where to install

Navisphere Secure CLI NetBackup clients

Navisphere Agent NetBackup clients

CLARiiON SnapView software EMC disk array

CLARiiON FLARE operating environment EMC disk array

Veritas support for VSS Snapshot and EMC CLARiiON

Veritas has an open support policy for VSS Snapshot for NetBackup Snapshot
Manager. If a vendor supports a VSS provider for a Windows platform, Veritas
provides support for local snapshot, alternate client, FlashBackup local snapshot,
and FlashBackup alternate client methods. To use a CLARiiON disk array with
VSS, contact EMC Corporation for the required software and versions. EMC supplies
this software as a bundle, to ensure that the software components are at the right
level and function correctly.
Note that the open support policy for VSS providers is not applicable to Instant
Recovery. To use VSS along with the NetBackup Instant Recovery feature, refer
to the NetBackup 7.x Snapshot Client Compatibility List for the components that
NetBackup supports for Instant Recovery with the array. The compatibility list is
available at the following URL:
http://www.netbackup.com/compatibility

Diagram of installed software for EMC CLARiiON

Figure 9-2 shows the software components on the NetBackup clients and the
CLARiiON array for UNIX, and indicates the control function of each.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 165
About EMC CLARiiON arrays

Figure 9-2 Software on NetBackup clients and CLARiiON array

UNIX client

NetBackup Snapshot
Client

Create Restore
snapshot data
Create snapshot or restore
Navisphere Secure
CLI EMC CLARiiON
Register host array
with array
Navisphere Agent FLARE OS
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 166
About EMC CLARiiON arrays

Verifying connectivity from client to array

NetBackup communicates with the array by means of the EMC Navisphere Secure
CLI. To verify that the CLI is installed and that NetBackup can communicate with
the EMC CLARiiON array, enter the following command on each NetBackup client.
Note that if a Navisphere security file has been created, the user name, password,
and scope do not have to be supplied with the command.
To verify connectivity from client to array
1 Enter the following:
■ On UNIX:

/opt/Navisphere/bin/naviseccli –h CLARiiON_hostname -user

array_admin_username -password array_admin_password -scope 0
getagent

■ On Windows:

Program Files\EMC\Navisphere CLI\naviseccli –h CLARiiON_hostname

-user array_admin_username -password password -scope 0 getagent

Sample output from this command:

Agent Rev: 6.19.1 (2.6)

Name: K10
Desc:
Node: A-APM041147024
Physical Node: K10
Signature: 1218092
Peer Signature: 1099522
Revision: 2.19.500.5.027
SCSI Id: 0
Model: CX500
Model Type: Rackmount
Prom Rev: 3.60.00
SP Memory: 2048
Serial No: APM041147024
SP Identifier: A
Cabinet: DPE2

If the command fails, you must address the problem before you do any further
array configuration.
This problem could be due to the following:
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 167
About EMC CLARiiON arrays

■ The Navisphere Secure CLI or other array interface is not installed.

■ The installed Navisphere Secure CLI is not a supported version.
See Table 9-2 on page 164.
■ The array credentials are invalid.

Note: On AIX or some UNIX host the Snapshot creation can fail for
EMC_CLARiiON array, if the Navisphere Secure CLI location entries are
incorrect in the /usr/openv/lib/vxfi/configfiles/emcclariionfi.conf
file.

For example, on the AIX host naviseccli is found at the following location
/usr/lpp/NAVICLI/naviseccli. Verify the correct naviseccli path and
add the following file path and name entries to the
/usr/openv/lib/vxfi/configfiles/emcclariionfi.conf file.

■ FILEPATH_NAVISEC_EXE"="filepath"

■ FILENAME_NAVISEC_EXE"="filename"

2 For further troubleshooting information, consult your array documentation.

About resolving host names on the network

All NetBackup clients to be used with Snapshot Manager must be resolvable by
means of your network naming service (such as DNS). NetBackup uses the network
naming service to look up the client’s host name, its fully qualified domain name,
and IP address. NetBackup then looks for any of those three in a CLARiiON storage
group when attempting to do LUN masking.

Configuring NetBackup to access the CLARiiON array

You must supply logon credentials that allow the NetBackup client to access each
storage processor on each EMC CLARiiON array.
IMPORTANT: For single path configurations, you must add credentials for the
CLARiiON storage processor that owns the source LUNs and any clone LUNs. For
multipath configurations, you must add credentials for both storage processor A
and storage processor B. The storage processor that owns the LUN may be changed
by the multipath software. (For single path configurations, all CLARiiON LUNs must
be owned by only one storage processor.)
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 168
About EMC CLARiiON arrays

To configure NetBackup to access the CLARiiON array

1 In the NetBackup Administration Console, click the Media and Device
Management > Credentials > Disk Array Hosts node.
2 Right-click in the Disk Array Hosts pane and select New Disk Array Host.
3 Enter the host name of the EMC CLARiiON array.
4 Select EMC CLARiiON in the Disk Array Host Type pull-down menu.
5 Enter the user name and password for the storage processor.
6 Clear (uncheck) the Connect using port number checkbox.

About using a local scope CLARiiON administrator account

By default, NetBackup uses a global scope CLARiiON administrator account, not
a local scope account. To specify a local scope CLARiiON administrator account,
you must use the Navisphere security file to supply the account information (see
the following note, however). The Navisphere security file contains a user name,
password, and scope for the CLARiiON administrator. The CLARiiON snapshot
provider uses the Navisphere security file if the file exists. To create the security
file, see the EMC Navisphere documentation.

Note: You must also enter credentials by means of the Disk Array Hosts dialog
box in the NetBackup Administration Console. The disk array host name is not
provided in the Navisphere security file.

Adding clients to a CLARiiON storage group

All NetBackup primary clients and any alternate clients must exist in a CLARiiON
storage group. NetBackup does not automatically add clients to a CLARiiON storage
group.

Warning: Veritas strongly recommends that every NetBackup client be given its
own CLARiiON storage group on the array. Data corruption could result if more
than one client (host) exists in a single storage group. If it is necessary to have
multiple hosts in a single storage group, you must make certain that only one host
in the storage group is actually using the device at any given time. (Only one host
should mount the disk.) A Windows host may actually write to a LUN masked device
even if the device is not mounted. Therefore, a Windows host should always be in
its own storage group.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 169
About EMC CLARiiON arrays

To add clients to a CLARiiON storage group

1 Register your clients (hosts) with the array.
2 Create storage groups.
3 Add the NetBackup primary and any alternate clients to the storage groups.
For more detail, see your array administrator or array documentation.

Configuring for EMC_CLARiiON_SnapView_Clone

The following must be completed before NetBackup can use the clone capabilities
of the CLARiiON array. The following steps are described in the topics that follow.

Table 9-3 Configuration process for EMC_CLARiiON_SnapView_Clone

Step Action Related topic

Step 1 Array administrator creates clone See “Creating a clone private LUN
private LUNs. with the EMC Navisphere Web
interface” on page 170.

Step 2 Array administrator creates a clone See “Creating a clone group and
group and selects a LUN as select a LUN as source”
source. on page 170.

Step 3 Array administrator adds clone See “Adding clone LUNs to the
LUNs to the clone group. clone group” on page 171.

Step 4 Array administrator supplies source See “Obtaining the device identifier
and target devices. for each source and clone LUN”
on page 173.

See “About configuration for

EMC_CLARiiON_SnapView_Snapshot”
on page 174.

See “Configuring a reserved LUN

pool for the storage processors”
on page 175.

Step 5 NetBackup administrator See “Configuring a NetBackup

configures a NetBackup policy for policy for a CLARiiON array
the array, using the device that are method” on page 176.
identifiers supplied by the array
administrator.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 170
About EMC CLARiiON arrays

Note: For Windows clients and the VSS method, you must synchronize the clone
with its source.

Note: These steps are separate from those taken by NetBackup to create the
backup. When the backup begins, NetBackup synchronizes the clones with the
source (if necessary) and splits (fractures) the clones to make them available for
the backup.

For more information on the EMC array terminology in this section, see your EMC
CLARiiON documentation.

Creating a clone private LUN with the EMC Navisphere Web interface
You must configure a clone private LUN for each CLARiiON storage processor that
owns a clone source LUN. Clone private LUNs store the portions of the client’s data
that incoming write requests change while the clone is in use. Clone private LUNs
are used while a clone LUN is fractured and when a synchronization occurs.
A clone private LUN can be any bound LUN that is at least 250,000 blocks in size.
To create a clone private LUN with the EMC Navisphere Web interface
1 Right-click the array name.
2 Right-click the Snapview node and select Clone Feature Properties.
3 Choose the LUNs you want to label as Clone Private LUNs.
Choose a clone private LUN for each storage processor that contains clone
source LUNs. (You must know which storage processor owns a given LUN.)
Only one clone private LUN is required per storage processor. You can add
more clone private LUNs later if more space is needed.

Creating a clone group and select a LUN as source

Use the following procedure to create a clone group and select a LUN as source.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 171
About EMC CLARiiON arrays

To create a clone group and select a LUN as source

1 In the EMC Navisphere Web interface, right-click the Snapview node and
select Create Clone Group.

2 Enter a name for the clone group.

3 Choose the source LUN to be cloned (the source LUN to associate with this
group). This LUN contains the data that is copied to the clones.

Adding clone LUNs to the clone group

Use the following procedure.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 172
About EMC CLARiiON arrays

To add clone LUNs to the clone group

1 In the EMC Navisphere Web interface, on the SnapView > Clones node,
right-click the name of the clone group and select Add Clone.

2 Select a LUN from the list to be added to the clone group.

Accept the defaults for Advanced Parameters, Recovery Policy, and
Synchronization Rate.
■ Do not choose a LUN that contains valuable data. Any data on the LUN is
overwritten by this procedure.
■ The number of clones to add depends on how many point-in-time copies
of the source LUN you want to retain at one time. The limit is 8 clones per
source LUN.
This value should match the Maximum Snapshots setting in the
EMC_CLARiiON_Snapview_Clone configuration parameters in the
Snapshot Options dialog in a NetBackup policy.
See “Maximum Snapshots parameter” on page 108.

3 When you click Apply, Navisphere begins to copy data from the source LUN
to the LUN you have selected, creating a clone LUN.
Any previous data on the clone LUN is lost.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 173
About EMC CLARiiON arrays

Obtaining the device identifier for each source and clone LUN
The NetBackup policy requires entry of the array’s Unique ID. If your array
administrator provided LUN numbers for the devices, you must convert those LUN
numbers into Unique IDs for entry in the NetBackup policy Snapshot Resources
pane. You can obtain the LUN Unique IDs in either of two ways, as follows.
To obtain the device identifier for each source and clone LUN
1 Enter the following command on the NetBackup client:

/opt/Navisphere/bin/naviseccli -address CLARiiON_hostname -user

array_admin_username -password password -scope 0 getlun
lun_number -uid

2 Note the exact UID string that this command returns. This UID is the unique
ID of the LUN.
For example, to obtain the unique ID of LUN 67, enter:

/opt/Navisphere/bin/naviseccli -address CLARiiON_hostname -user

array_admin_username -password password -scope 0 getlun 67
-uid

Example output:

UID: 60:06:01:60:C8:26:12:00:4F:AE:30:13:C4:11:DB:11

3 To obtain the number of the LUN to use on the naviseccli command, find the
clone group and examine the LUN list.
4 Copy the unique ID into the NetBackup policy, as follows:
■ If the LUN specified on the naviseccli command is the source LUN for the
clone group, copy the unique ID into the Source Device field of the Add
Snapshot Resource dialog box of the NetBackup policy. Help is available
for that dialog box.
See “Configuring a policy using EMC_CLARiiON_Snapview_Clone method”
on page 176.
■ If the LUN specified on the naviseccli command is a clone LUN, copy the
unique ID into the Snapshot Device(s) field.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 174
About EMC CLARiiON arrays

To use the Navisphere Web interface

1 To find the unique ID of a LUN, right-click the LUN in the Navisphere Web
interface and select Properties.
2 See the Unique ID field.
As of this writing, you cannot copy and paste the Unique ID from the Navisphere
web interface. Use the naviseccli command to copy and paste the ID.

Unique ID field

Storage processor

About configuration for EMC_CLARiiON_SnapView_Snapshot

You must configure a reserved LUN pool for each storage processor that owns a
source LUN for which you want to create a SnapView snapshot. (Starting at FLARE
version x.24, one combined reserved LUN pool exists for both storage processors.)
The reserved LUN pool stores the portions of the client’s data that incoming write
requests change while the snapshot is active.
Note the following before you configure a reserved LUN pool.
■ The reserved LUN pool must contain at least one LUN for each source LUN
that is the subject of (participates in) the snapshot. Any available LUN can be
added to the reserved LUN pool if the LUN is owned by the storage processor
that owns the source LUN.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 175
About EMC CLARiiON arrays

■ LUNs in the reserved LUN pool are private LUNs, which cannot belong to a
storage group. The storage processor manages its reserved LUN pool and
automatically assigns one or more private LUNs to a source LUN. This
assignment is based on how much snapshot activity takes place in the source
LUN. This activity can result from one busy snapshot or multiple snapshots.
■ While the snapshot is active, client write activity on the source consumes more
space in the reserved LUN pool. Adding more LUNs to the reserved LUN pool
increases the size of the reserved LUN pool. The storage processor automatically
uses a LUN if one is needed.
■ All snapshots share the reserved LUN pool. If two snapshots are active on two
different source LUNs, the reserved LUN pool must contain at least two private
LUNs. If both snapshots are of the same source LUN, the snapshots share the
same private LUN (or LUNs) in the reserved LUN pool.

Configuring a reserved LUN pool for the storage processors

In the EMC Navisphere Web interface, do the following.
To configure a reserved LUN pool for the storage processors
1 Under the node for your array, right-click Reserved LUN Pool and choose
Configure.
2 In the Configure Reserved LUN Pool dialog box, under Available LUNS,
select the LUNs to be added to the reserved LUN pool.
The reserved LUN pool must contain at least one LUN for each source LUN.
3 For FLARE versions before 2.24, click the Add to SPA LUN Pool for storage
processor A or Add to SPB LUN Pool for storage processor B.
Check the properties of the source LUN to determine the storage processor
that owns it.
4 Click Ok or Apply.
Each reserved LUN pool node shows how much space is free in the pool.
The amount of space that the reserve LUN pool requires depends on how
many unique blocks change in the source LUN during the life of the snapshot.
If little space remains in an existing LUN pool, add new LUNs to the LUN pool.
Generally, the more snapshots that are created, the more space that is required
in the reserved LUN pool. If the LUN pool space is used up, snapshots attached
to backups may become inactive and future snapshot backups fail.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 176
About EMC CLARiiON arrays

Configuring a NetBackup policy for a CLARiiON array method

General help for setting up a NetBackup policy is available.
See “Configuring a Snapshot Manager policy” on page 50.
To configure a NetBackup policy for a CLARiiON array method
1 In the NetBackup Administration Console, click the Perform snapshot backups
box on the policy Attributes tab.
2 Click the Options option to display the Snapshot Options dialog box.
3 In the Snapshot method pull-down list, select a CLARiiON method. To
configure the method, see one of the following topics.

Configuring a policy using

EMC_CLARiiON_Snapview_Clone method
In the Snapshot Options dialog box of the policy, you must specify the following
information in the Snapshot Resources pane. NetBackup uses this information to
correctly rotate through the clone LUNs when performing a SnapView clone backup.
After all clone LUNs have been used in a backup, NetBackup automatically
determines which clone is the oldest. NetBackup expires the oldest clone so that
it can be reused for the current backup.
To configure a policy using EMC CLARiiON Snapview Clone method
1 Obtain the following source and clone LUN information:
■ Array serial number (in the EMC Navisphere Web interface, right-click the
array name and select Properties).
■ Unique ID for the source LUN containing the primary data.
■ Unique ID for the target LUN(s) used for snapshots.
See “Obtaining the device identifier for each source and clone LUN” on page 173.
Or see your array administrator.
2 Copy and paste (or type) these values into the appropriate field of the
NetBackup policy’s Add Snapshot Resource dialog box, as explained below.
The policy Backup Selections specify a set of one or more source LUNs for
which snapshots are taken for backup. For each source LUN that is specified
in the policy Backup Selections list, the procedure is as follows.
See “Configuring the EMC_CLARiiON_Snapview_Clone method” on page 177.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 177
About EMC Symmetrix arrays

Configuring the EMC_CLARiiON_Snapview_Clone method

Use the following procedure to configure the EMC_CLARiiON_Snapview_Clone
method.
To configure the EMC_CLARiiON_Snapview_Clone method
1 After you select EMC_CLARiiON_Snapview_Clone on the Snapshot Options
dialog box, click Add.
2 In the Add Snapshot Resource dialog box, enter the array’s serial number in
the Array Serial # field.
3 Enter the unique ID for the source LUN in the Source Device field.
4 Enter the unique IDs for the clone LUNs in the Snapshot Device(s) field. To
enter multiple IDs, place a semicolon between them.
For Instant Recovery backups, the Snapshot Device(s) entries determine where
and in what order the snapshots are retained.
See “Snapshot Resources pane” on page 107.

EMC_CLARiiON_Snapview_Snapshot method
In the Snapshot Options dialog box of the policy, you can set the Maximum
snapshots (Instant Recovery only) parameter for the
EMC_CLARiiON_Snapview_Snapshot method. The maximum value is 8.
See “Maximum Snapshots parameter” on page 108.

Common CLARiiON array configuration problems

Note the following regarding the CLARiiON array:
Do not use the EMC_CLARiiON_Snapview_Clone method and the
EMC_CLARiiON_Snapview_Snapshot method to back up the same source LUN.
If you attempt a rollback restore from a EMC_CLARiiON_Snapview_Snapshot
snapshot, the restore fails if a clone associated with the source LUN is currently
synchronized.

About EMC Symmetrix arrays

The following topics include background information and configuration tasks for
snapshot backups using EMC Symmetrix arrays. These tasks must be completed
before you run a backup.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 178
About EMC Symmetrix arrays

EMC Symmetrix DMX software requirements

Table 9-4 shows the required EMC software.

Table 9-4 Software that is required for EMC Symmetrix

Software Where to install Versions

EMC Solutions Enabler NetBackup clients For versions used in test configurations, see NetBackup Snapshot
Client Configuration, at:

http://www.veritas.com/docs/000081320

Symmetrix Solutions NetBackup clients For versions used in test configurations, see Veritas NetBackup
Enabler license Snapshot Client Configuration, at:

http://www.veritas.com/docs/000081320

Clone emulation flag can cause snapshots to fail

Clone emulation flag can cause snapshots to fail:
■ The operating system is Windows.
■ An EMC DMX array is used.
■ The BCV relationships were created with the clone emulation flag set to TRUE.
Given this situation, snapshots may fail if the EnableCloneEmulation Windows
registry entry is not set to TRUE. For snapshots to succeed, set the entry to TRUE.
This registry entry is found in the following
location:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\EMC\ShadowCopy
Registry details:
■ Name: EnableCloneEmulation
■ Type: REG_SZ
Possible values include:
■ TRUE: Enables Symmetrix array clone emulation.

■ FALSE: Disables Symmetrix array clone emulation.

EMC snapshot operation fails

Snapshot fails if the EnforceStrictBCVPolicy registry entry is not set to TRUE. For
snapshots to succeed, set the entry to TRUE. This registry entry is found at the
following location:
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 179
About EMC Symmetrix arrays

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\EMC\ShadowCopy

Registry details:
■ Name: EnforceStrictBCVPolicy
■ Type: REG_SZ
Possible values include:
■ TRUE: Indicates that EMC VSS Provider enforces a strict BCV rotation policy,
where a BCV should only be used if it is not currently part of a snapshot.
■ FALSE: Indicates that EMC VSS Provider does not enforce a BCV rotation
policy, leaving enforcement to the VSS requestor.

Support for EMC Symmetrix with Volume Shadow Copy Service

To use an EMC Symmetrix disk array with Volume Shadow Copy Service, contact
EMC Corporation for the required software and versions. EMC supplies this software
as a bundle, to ensure that the software components are at the right level and
function correctly.

Prerequisites for using EMC Symmetrix disk arrays

Note the following prerequisites before using EMC Symmetrix disk arrays:
■ The array administrator must allocate source and target devices before you
create any NetBackup policies. See the array administrator for the device
identifiers.
■ The array administrator must allocate a gatekeeper device and a VCMDB
(Volume Configuration Management Database) for all of the NetBackup clients.
Storage servers should also have the appropriate number of gatekeeper devices
configured.

Note: Gatekeeper devices are not mandatory for UNIX clients.

A VCMDB is a virtual LUN database that keeps track of which LUNs the client
can see. A gatekeeper is a small disk that the DMX uses to pass commands
between the client and the array.

Configuring NetBackup clients to use EMC Symmetrix

Use the following procedure to configure NetBackup clients to use EMC Symmetrix
disk arrays.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 180
About EMC Symmetrix arrays

To configure NetBackup clients to use EMC Symmetrix disk arrays

1 On Windows hosts that will be used to monitor devices, install the EMC
Solutions Enabler and the gatekeeper devices. In general, NetBackup
production clients are not assigned gatekeepers and are monitored from a
remote host.
The EMC Solutions Enabler is not needed on UNIX clients. Gatekeeper devices
are not mandatory for UNIX clients.
2 Register your EMC license keys using the symlmf command.
3 Discover the HBAs in the NetBackup client, to allow the NetBackup client to
perform LUN masking operations in the array.
To discover host HBAs, run the following Solutions Enabler SYMCLI command:

symmask.exe discover hba

Example output:

Symmetrix ID : 000292603831
Device Masking Status : Success

Identifier Type User-generated Name

---------------- ----- ---------------------------------
2100001b3212c04f Fibre 2100001b3212c04f/2100001b3212c04f

Symmetrix ID : 000492600276
Device Masking Status : Success

Identifier Type User-generated Name

---------------- ----- ---------------------------------
2100001b3212c04f Fibre 2100001b3212c04f/2100001b3212c04f

If no Symmetrix ID appears in the output, there is a connectivity problem.

If the command fails, you must address the problem before doing any further
array configuration. This problem can be due to (but is not necessarily limited
to) the following:
■ The Solutions Enabler interface is not installed.
■ Your NetBackup client may not be properly zoned to see the array.
For further troubleshooting information, consult your array documentation.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 181
About EMC Symmetrix arrays

About configuring NetBackup to access the Symmetrix array

You do not need to configure array credentials for the Symmetrix. All communication
between NetBackup and the array is done by means of SYMCLI. If multiple
Symmetrix arrays are connected to a NetBackup client, NetBackup automatically
sends the SYMCLI command to the correct Symmetrix.

About configuration for EMC_TimeFinder_Mirror

The EMC_TimeFinder_Mirror method uses the Symmetrix Business Continuance
Volume (BCV) to allow NetBackup to perform mirror backups. For this method, the
Snapshot Manager source devices are assumed to be STD devices and the target
snapshot resources are assumed to be BCV devices. BCV devices are normally
created by your EMC technical representative. The EMC_TimeFinder_Mirror method
requires that the source device or standard device (STD) be fully synchronized
(established) with the snapshot device (BCV). BCV devices must already exist
before they can be synchronized and used in a NetBackup backup.

Fully synchronizing STD/BCV mirror pairs

Make sure that each target (BCV) disk is fully synchronized with its source (STD).
One way to accomplish this synchronization is as follows.
To fully synchronize STD/BCV mirror pairs
1 Create a temporary file that contains only the source and target device IDs
separated by a space. (Only one source-target pair can exist in a temporary
file.)
For example, if the source (STD) device ID is 0050 and the target (BCV) device
ID is 0060, the temporary file should contain the following:

0050 0060

2 Use the symmir command to fully establish the mirror pair.

symmir -sid 000187910258 establish -f temp_file -full

When the pair is synchronized, it can be used in a NetBackup policy.

Synchronization can take a long time. For example, it may take between 5 and
10 minutes for an 8GB STD/BCV pair to enter the synchronized state.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 182
About EMC Symmetrix arrays

3 Check the status of the mirror pair:

symmir -sid 000187910258 query -file temp_file

Make sure the temp_file name matches the temp_file name you used above.
4 In the output, look for Synchronized under the State column. When the pair
enters the synchronized state, it is ready to be used for backup.

About configuration for EMC_TimeFinder_Clone

The EMC_TimeFinder_Clone method uses Symmetrix standard devices (STD) as
the NetBackup Snapshot Manager source devices and TimeFinder Clone copies
as the snapshot devices. Any Symmetrix STD or BCV device can be used as an
EMC_TimeFinder_Clone method snapshot resource.
This method does not require the establishment of a clone relationship between
the primary and secondary before the backup. NetBackup automatically manages
the primary-secondary clone relationship in the context of a Symmetrix copy session.

Verifying that the clone is complete before doing a point

in time rollback
NetBackup initiates clone creation on the array. For large source devices, clone
creation may take a long time to complete. The Symmetrix array, however, makes
the new clone immediately available for normal restore. This availability allows
individual files or directories to be restored as soon as the NetBackup Activity
Monitor marks the job as finished, even if the clone has not been fully created.
Although you can restore individual files or directories before the clone is completely
copied, you cannot perform a point in time rollback. Clone creation must be complete
before a point in time rollback can succeed.
If a point in time rollback begins before the clone is finished, the restore fails without
a failure notification in the Activity Monitor. In this case, the bpfis log contains the
phrase Invalid clone state, cannot restore from device-ID to device-ID,
where the first device ID is the source and the second is the clone.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 183
About EMC Symmetrix arrays

To verify that the clone is complete before doing a point in time rollback
1 Create a temporary file that contains only the source and target device IDs
separated by a space.
For example, if the source device ID is 0050 and the target (clone) device ID
is 0060, the temporary file should contain the following:

0050 0060

2 Check the status of the clone with the symclone command. For example:

symclone -sid 58 query -file /tmp/0050_0060.txt

where 58 is a short version of a Symmetrix ID ending in 58, such as

000187910258, and /tmp/0050_0060.txt is the temporary file.

3 In the output, look for Copied under the State column. When the clone pair is
in the copied state, it is ready for point-in-time rollback.

About configuration for EMC_TimeFinder_Snap

The EMC_TimeFinder_Snap method uses Symmetrix virtual devices (VDEV) to
allow NetBackup to perform copy-on-write snapshot backups. This method does
not require the establishment of a source-snapshot relationship between the primary
and the VDEV devices before the backup. NetBackup automatically manages the
source-snapshot relationship.
VDEV devices must already exist before they can be used in a NetBackup backup.
Normally virtual devices are created by your EMC technical representative.

Configuring a policy for EMC_TimeFinder methods

Use the following instructions for the EMC TimeFinder array methods
(EMC_TimeFinder_Snap, EMC_TimeFinder_Clone, EMC_TimeFinder_Mirror).
Help for setting up a NetBackup policy is available.
See “Configuring a Snapshot Manager policy” on page 50.
To configure a policy for EMC_TimeFinder methods
1 In the NetBackup Administration Console, click the Perform snapshot backups
box on the policy Attributes tab.
2 Click the Options option to display the Snapshot Options dialog box.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 184
About EMC Symmetrix arrays

3 In the Snapshot method pull-down list, select a TimeFinder method.

Enter a value in the Value field for the SAVE Device Pool. You can also use
the default pool.
When you use the default pool for all operations, the device space is quickly
consumed and backups can fail. But when you use a separate pool to configure
the policy, there is less chance of backup failure.
4 In the Snapshot Options dialog box of the policy, you must specify the following
information:
■ Symmetrix ID.
■ Unique ID for the snapshot resource from which the TimeFinder_Mirror,
Clone, or Snapshot is created.
■ Unique ID for the target device(s) where the mirror, clone, or snapshot is
created.
NetBackup uses this information to correctly rotate through the snapshot, clone,
or mirrors when performing a backup. After all the snapshots, clones, or mirrors
have been used in a backup, NetBackup automatically determines which is
the oldest. NetBackup expires the oldest snapshot, clone, or mirror so that it
can be reused for the current backup.
5 See your array administrator for these values.
6 Copy and paste (or type) these values into the appropriate field of the
NetBackup policy’s Add Snapshot Resource dialog box. The procedure is
as follows.
7 After selecting an EMC_TimeFinder method on the Snapshot Options dialog
box, click Add.
8 In the Add Snapshot Resource dialog box, enter the Symmetrix ID in the
Array Serial # field.
9 Enter the unique ID for the source device in the Source Device field.
10 Enter the unique IDs for the target devices in the Snapshot Device(s) field.
To enter multiple IDs, place a semicolon between them. The ID should be a
four-digit value.
■ For EMC_TimeFinder_Mirror, the target devices are BCV devices.
■ For EMC_TimeFinder_Snap, the target devices are VDEV devices.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 185
About HP EVA arrays

■ For EMC_TimeFinder_Clone, the target devices are the STD devices that
were allocated to be used as clones.

11 Enter source and target device IDs exactly as they appear on the Symmetrix.
For example, if device 4c appears as 004C, then enter it as 004C (case does
not matter). The symdev show command can be used to determine how a
device ID appears on Symmetrix. Refer to your SymCLI documentation for
more information on this command.
For Instant Recovery backups, the Snapshot Device(s) entries determine where
and in what order the snapshots are retained.
See “Snapshot Resources pane” on page 107.

About HP EVA arrays

The following sections describe configuration steps for supported HP arrays. These
steps must be completed before you run a backup.

Prerequisites for working with HP EVA arrays

Note the following prerequisites for the tasks in this section. See your array
administrator for further assistance.
■ Add your host (HBA) to the EVA array. All NetBackup primary clients and any
alternate clients must be "added" to the EVA array. You can use the SSSU for
HP StorageWorks Command View EVA utility or the StorageWorks Command
View EVA Web interface. Refer to your HP EVA documentation for details.
The EVA array requires that the NetBackup client’s world-wide port name (not
the world-wide node name) be used when you add the host entry to the array.

HP EVA software requirements for UNIX

Table 9-5 shows the required HP software.

Table 9-5 Software that is required for HP EVA

Software Where to install Versions

SSSU for HP NetBackup clients For versions used in test configurations, see Veritas NetBackup
StorageWorks Command Snapshot Client Configuration, at:
View EVA (CLI)
http://www.veritas.com/docs/000081320
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 186
About HP EVA arrays

Table 9-5 Software that is required for HP EVA (continued)

Software Where to install Versions

HP StorageWorks HP Command View For versions used in test configurations, see Veritas NetBackup
Command View EVA EVA server Snapshot Client Configuration, at:
Web interface
http://www.veritas.com/docs/000081320

Diagram of installed software for HP EVA

Figure 9-3 shows the software components on the NetBackup clients and the HP
EVA Command View server for UNIX and indicates the control function of each.

Figure 9-3 Software components on NetBackup clients and HP EVA

UNIX client
HP EVA array
NetBackup Snapshot
Client HP StorageWorks
Command View
Create Restore EVA
snapshot data
Register host with array
SSSU CLI
HP StorageWorks
Create snapshot or restore Command View
EVA server

StorageWorks
Command View
Web interface

Veritas support for VSS Snapshot and HP EVA

Veritas has an open support policy for VSS Snapshot for NetBackup Snapshot
Manager. If a vendor supports a VSS provider for a Windows platform, Veritas
provides support for local snapshot, alternate client, FlashBackup local snapshot,
and FlashBackup alternate client methods. To use an HP EVA disk array with VSS,
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 187
About HP EVA arrays

contact Hewlett Packard Enterprise for the required software and versions. HP
supplies this software as a bundle, to ensure that the software components are at
the right level and function correctly.
Note that the open support policy for VSS providers is not applicable to Instant
Recovery. To use VSS along with the NetBackup Instant Recovery feature, refer
to the NetBackup 7.x Snapshot Client Compatibility List for the components that
NetBackup supports for Instant Recovery with the array. The compatibility list is
available at the following URL:
http://www.netbackup.com/compatibility

Verifying connectivity from clients to array using SSSU 5.0

NetBackup communicates with the array by means of the SSSU for HP
StorageWorks Command View EVA utility or the StorageWorks Command View
EVA Web interface. To verify that the CLI is installed and that NetBackup can
communicate with the array, use the following procedure on each NetBackup client.
To verify connectivity from clients to array using SSSU 5.0
1 Connect to the disk array host:

/opt/hp/sssu/sssu_sunos

Example output:

SSSU for HP StorageWorks Command View EVA 5.0 [v5.0.12]

2 Log on to the disk array host:

NoSystemSelected> select manager manager_host

user=manager_username password=manager_password

3 Verify that you can see the EVA arrays that are managed by the host:

NoSystemSelected> ls cell

Example output:

Systems available on this Manager:

HPEVA4000
VRTS.EVA.ROS

See “Troubleshooting the SSSU procedure” on page 188.

 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 188
About HP EVA arrays

To verify connectivity from clients to array using SSSU 6.0

1 Connect to the disk array host:

/opt/hp/sssu/sssu_sunos

Example output:

SSSU for HP StorageWorks Command View EVA

Version: 6.0
Build: 34

2 At the prompts, log on to the disk array host:

Manager:disk array host name

Username:username
Password:password

3 Verify that you can see the EVA arrays that are managed by the host:

NoSystemSelected> ls cell

Example output:

Systems available on this Manager:

hpeva_2200nc07

See “Troubleshooting the SSSU procedure” on page 188.

Troubleshooting the SSSU procedure

If the SSSU command fails, you must address the problem before you do any further
array configuration. This problem could be due to the following:
■ The SSSU for HP StorageWorks Command View EVA utility is not installed.
■ The SSSU for HP StorageWorks Command View EVA utility is not a supported
version.
■ The array manager credentials are invalid.
For further troubleshooting information, consult your EMC Storage Scripting System
Reference manual.

Policy validation failure for the SSSU command

Policy validation fails when the SSSU CLI is not present at the expected path. The
logs display the message
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 189
About HP EVA arrays

Unable to locate the CLI tool /opt/hp/sssu/ at path sssu_hpux,

The cause of the error message is the CLI path, which is different from the default
CLI path.
To fix the policy validation, add the following entry into the hpevafi.conf file:
[CLI_TOOL_INFO]

"FILEPATH"="<SSSU CLI path>"

"FILENAME"="<SSSU CLI tool file name>"

For example, for the HP platform the path would be:

/usr/openv/lib/vxfi/configfiles/hpevafi.conf

The entry would be:

[CLI_TOOL_INFO]

"FILEPATH"="/opt/hp/sssu"

"FILENAME"="sssu_hpux_parisc"

After you manually add these inputs to the hpevafi.conf file, the validation is
successful.

Configuring NetBackup to access the EVA array

You must configure logon credentials on the NetBackup primary server that allow
the NetBackup client to access the array, as follows.
To configure NetBackup to access to the array
1 In the NetBackup Administration Console, click the Media and Device
Management > Credentials > Disk Array Hosts node.
2 Right-click in the Disk Array Hosts pane and select New Disk Array Host.
3 Enter the host name through which the array management service is to be
accessed. For some arrays, the array management service runs on a separate
host; for other arrays it runs in the array itself.
4 Select HP EVA in the Disk Array Host Type pull-down menu.
5 Enter the user name and password for the array management service.
6 Clear (uncheck) the Connect using port number box.

Configuring a NetBackup policy for an HP EVA array method

Help is available for setting up a NetBackup policy in the NetBackup Administration
Console.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 190
About IBM DS6000 and DS8000 arrays

See “Configuring a Snapshot Manager policy” on page 50.

To configure a NetBackup policy for an HP EVA array method
1 In the NetBackup Administration Console, click the Perform snapshot backups
box on the policy Attributes tab.
2 Click the Options option to display the Snapshot Options dialog box.
3 In the Snapshot method pull-down list, select an HP EVA method.
4 You can set the Maximum snapshots (Instant Recovery only) parameter.
The maximum value is 16 snapshots or vsnaps per source device.
See “Maximum Snapshots parameter” on page 108.

HP EVA restrictions
Note the following array configuration restrictions. In essence, you cannot use two
or more EVA snapshot methods for a given source disk.

Table 9-6
Array Restrictions

VSnaps Note the following restrictions:

■ If any VSnaps exist, you cannot create Snapshots or

Clones of the source until existing VSnaps are deleted.
■ A maximum of 16 VSnaps can exist for any VDisk.
■ You cannot perform a rollback restore from a VSnap or
a Snapshot. Rollback only works with clones.

Snapshots Note the following restrictions:

■ If any Snapshots exist, you cannot create VSnaps or

Clones of the source until existing Snapshots are deleted.
■ A maximum of 16 snapshots can exist for any VDisk.
■ You cannot perform a rollback restore from a VSnap or
a Snapshot. Rollback only works with clones.

SnapClones Any number of clones can be created for a VDisk, as long

as disk space exists in the disk group.

About IBM DS6000 and DS8000 arrays

The following sections include background information and configuration tasks for
NetBackup Snapshot Manager backups using IBM DS6000 and DS8000 arrays.
These tasks must be completed before you run a backup.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 191
About IBM DS6000 and DS8000 arrays

IBM DS6000 and DS8000 software requirements

The following IBM software is required.

Table 9-7 Software that is required for IBM DS6000 and DS8000

Software Where to install Version

DSCLI Default location 5.2.2.224 or higher

For instructions on installing the software, refer to your IBM documentation.

Preconfiguration for IBM arrays

No preconfiguration steps are required for IBM DS6000 and DS8000 arrays.

Configuring NetBackup to access the IBM DS6000 or DS8000 array

You must supply logon credentials that allow the NetBackup client to access the
IBM array.
To configure NetBackup to access the IBM DS6000 or DS8000 array
1 In the NetBackup Administration Console, click the Media and Device
Management > Credentials > Disk Array Hosts node.
2 Right-click in the Disk Array Hosts pane and select New Disk Array Host.
3 For the IBM DS6000 or DS8000 array, enter the name of the host management
console (the system where the Storage Manager resides).
4 Select IBM System Storage in the Disk Array Host Type pull-down menu.
5 Enter the user name and password for the array.
6 Clear (uncheck) the Connect using port number box.

Configuring array access for NetBackup hosts not named

in a policy
Certain NetBackup hosts that are not named as clients in a policy must be explicitly
enabled to access array credentials. An example is a media server that is used for
off-host backup processing but is not included in any policy’s Clients list.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 192
About IBM DS6000 and DS8000 arrays

To configure array access for NetBackup hosts not named in a policy

1 In the NetBackup Administration Console, click Host Properties > Master
servers > double click name of primary server > Properties > Credential
Access.
2 Click Add to enter the name of the client. Then click OK.

Configuring the IBM array for NetBackup

You must add each NetBackup client and alternate client to the IBM array and make
array devices available to the clients. In brief, the steps are the following:
To configure the IBM array for NetBackup
1 On the IBM array, provide host name and port information for the NetBackup
client.
Note the following:
■ The nickname (on the IBM DS6000 or DS8000) can be the same as the
NetBackup client name.
■ In the IBM DS6000 or DS8000 Storage Manager interface, the host type
for AIX may not be obvious. Select IBM pSeries.
■ As part of the host definition, select the WWPN of the NetBackup client.
Your NetBackup client must be properly zoned on the SAN to allow
communication between it and the array.

2 Repeat step 1 for each NetBackup client or alternate client that uses the array.
3 Create a volume group and associate the volume group with the NetBackup
host you have defined on the array. For details, refer to your IBM
documentation.
4 Create logical volumes (or logical drives) for the volume group. This step makes
the volumes or drives visible to the NetBackup client. For details, refer to your
IBM documentation.

Using DSCLI commands to obtain unique IBM identifiers

The NetBackup policy requires entry of the array’s Unique ID. If your array
administrator provided LUN numbers for the devices, you must convert those LUN
numbers into unique IDs for entry in the NetBackup policy Snapshot Resources
pane. You can obtain the LUN unique IDs in either of two ways, as described in
this topic.
The LUN ID of the primary and snapshot (clone) logical volume can be found from
the array by means of DSCLI commands or the IBM Storage Manager interface.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 193
About IBM DS6000 and DS8000 arrays

To use DSCLI commands to obtain unique IBM identifiers

1 Find the host connection and its corresponding volume group by entering the
following:

lshostconnect -dev enclosure_ID

Example:

dscli> lshostconnect -dev IBM.1750-6866123

Date/Time: December 17, 2007 4:18:02 PM IST IBM DSCLI Version: 5.2.2.224 DS:
IBM.1750-6866123
Name ID WWPN HostType Profile portgrp volgrpID
ESSIOport
======================================================================================
oigtsol05 0000 10000000C956A9B4 Sun SUN - Solaris 0 V11
all
oigtaix03 0022 10000000C969F60E pSeries IBM pSeries - AIX 0 V46
all
oigtaix02 0023 10000000C94AA677 pSeries IBM pSeries - AIX 0 V47
all

2 Find the volumes presented to this volume group and to the host:

showvolgrp -dev enclosure_ID

volume_group

Example:

dscli> showvolgrp -dev IBM.1750-6866123 V47

Date/Time: December 17, 2007 4:21:01 PM IST IBM DSCLI Version: 5.2.2.224 DS:
IBM.1750-6866123
Name oigtaix02
ID V47
Type SCSI Mask
Vols 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 0031

The values listed for Vols are the LUN ids.

3 Find out which device on the host corresponds to a given logical volume.
Enter the following:

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/nbfirescan
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 194
About IBM DS6000 and DS8000 arrays

To use the IBM Storage Manager web interface to obtain the device identifiers
1 In the Storage Manager, click Real-time manager > Manage hardware >
Host systems.

2 Click the host for which you need to find the volumes presented.
The volume groups that are associated with the host are displayed.
3 Click the volume group to get the list of the logical volumes that are configured
in this volume group.
The Number column indicates the LUN ID.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 195
About IBM DS6000 and DS8000 arrays

Configuring a NetBackup policy for IBM_DiskStorage_FlashCopy

For general help setting up a NetBackup policy in the NetBackup Administration
Console, refer to the NetBackup Administrator’s Guide, Volume I.
The following procedure focuses on the IBM_DiskStorage_FlashCopy method and
its parameters.
To configure a NetBackup policy for IBM_DiskStorage_FlashCopy
1 In the NetBackup Administration Console, click the Perform snapshot backups
box on the policy Attributes tab.
2 Click the Options option to display the Snapshot Options dialog box.
3 In the Snapshot method pull-down list, select IBM_DiskStorage_FlashCopy.
4 If needed, set Wait for flashcopy operation to complete to 1.
By default (0), the backup does not wait for the FlashCopy operation to
complete. If the backup begins before the FlashCopy operation completes,
database performance on the client (such as Oracle) may be affected until the
FlashCopy is complete. A setting of 1 means that NetBackup waits for the
FlashCopy to complete before the backup begins, to avoid any performance
issues on the client.
Note that a setting of 1 may cause the backup elapsed time to increase
significantly. The primary (production) volume may not be accessible until the
FlashCopy command completes.
5 On the Snapshot Options dialog box in the Snapshot Resources pane, click
Add.
NetBackup uses the information in the Snapshot Resources pane to correctly
rotate through the clone LUNs when performing a FlashCopy clone backup.
After all clone LUNs have been used in a backup, NetBackup automatically
determines which clone is the oldest. NetBackup expires the oldest clone so
that it can be reused for the current backup. If that clone represents the only
backup image copy, NetBackup also expires the backup image associated
with the clone.
Note that the policy Backup Selections determine one or more source LUNs
for which snapshots are taken for backup. For each source LUN that is specified
in the policy Backup Selections list, you must provide the information detailed
in the following steps.
See “Using DSCLI commands to obtain unique IBM identifiers” on page 192.
6 In the Add Snapshot Resource dialog box, enter the array's serial number in
the Array Serial Number field.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 196
About IBM DS4000 array

7 Enter the unique ID for the source LUN in the Source Device field.
8 Enter the unique IDs for the clone LUNs in the Snapshot Device(s) field. To
enter multiple IDs, place a semicolon between them.
Note the following:
■ The clone LUNs must be unmasked to the client (or alternate client) before
you start a backup.
■ For Instant Recovery backups, the Snapshot Device(s) entries determine
where and in what order the snapshots are retained.

For further reference on IBM arrays

The following IBM documents may be helpful:
■ The IBM System Storage DS6000 Series: Copy Services
http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/redpieces/abstracts/sg246782.html
http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/abstracts/sg246783.html
■ The IBM System Storage DS8000 Series: Copy Services
http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/abstracts/sg246787.html
http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/abstracts/sg246788.html

About IBM DS4000 array

The following sections include background information and configuration tasks for
NetBackup Snapshot Manager backups using IBM DS4000 arrays. These tasks
must be completed before you run a backup.
Table 9-8 describes the snapshot method for the IBM DS4000.

Table 9-8 New snapshot method for the IBM DS4000 disk array

Method name Description

IBM_StorageManager_FlashCopy For full-volume copy (clone) snapshots on

the IBM DS4000 series of arrays (excluding
4100), with SMcli version 9.60.

Array preconfiguration tasks

Before you configure a NetBackup policy, make sure that the following tasks have
been completed.
Table 9-9 describes the tasks.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 197
About IBM DS4000 array

Table 9-9 Array preconfiguration tasks

Array administration tasks Where described

Install the disk array and its software, See your array documentation.
including appropriate licenses.
See “IBM 4000 software requirements”
on page 197.

Install supported HBAs on the NetBackup See your HBA documentation.

primary client and alternate clients.

Zone the client HBAs through the Fibre See your Fibre Channel documentation.
Channel switch, so the array is visible to the
primary client and to any alternate clients.

Install NetBackup, and array vendor snapshot See the appropriate installation
management software, on the NetBackup documentation.
primary client and any alternate clients.

Create and configure the Access Logical See your array documentation.
Drive for the host connection at the array.
Configure logical drives on the array and
make them visible to the host.

IBM 4000 software requirements

The following IBM software is required.

Table 9-10 Software that is required for IBM 4000

Software Where to install Version

SMclient Default location on NetBackup client: 9.60 or higher

/opt/IBM_DS4000/

SMruntime Default location on NetBackup client: 9.16 or higher

/opt/IBM_DS4000/

For instructions on installing the software, refer to your IBM documentation.

Verifying NetBackup client access, zoning, and LUN masking

You can use the nbfirescan command to verify the following: that NetBackup clients
have access to the array devices, and that the arrays are properly zoned and LUNs
are unmasked. Note that nbfirescan only displays LUNs that have been unmasked
and mapped to the host.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 198
About IBM DS4000 array

To verify NetBackup client access, zoning, and LUN masking

Enter the following on the client:

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/nbfirescan

This command queries the host’s SCSI bus for all the SCSI (or Fibre) attached
devices that are visible.
Example output from an AIX host, for Hitachi and IBM arrays, followed by a
description:

DevicePath Vendor Product ID EnclosureId DeviceId [Ctl,Bus,Tgt,Lun]

-------------------------------------------------------------------------
/dev/hdisk8 HITACHI OPEN-V-CM 10266 241 [00,00,144640,00]
/dev/hdisk9 HITACHI OPEN-V 10266 840 [00,00,144640,01]
/dev/hdisk45 IBM 1814 FAStT IBM.1814-600A0B800042212
2000000004804132760:0A:0B:80:00:42:33:6E:00:00:16:EF:48:DC:3C:1F [00,00
,327936,01]
/dev/hdisk46 IBM 1814 FAStT IBM.1814-600A0B800042212
2000000004804132760:0A:0B:80:00:42:33:6E:00:00:16:F7:48:DC:57:F3 [00,00
,327936,02]
/dev/hdisk43 IBM 1814 FAStT IBM.1814-600A0B800042212
2000000004804132760:0A:0B:80:00:42:33:6E:00:00:14:A4:48:AA:52:87 [00,00
,327936,03]
/dev/rdsk/c2t6d11s6 HITACHI DF600F 6484 48 [00,00,00,00]
/dev/rdsk/c2t6d10s6 HITACHI DF600F 6484 46 [00,00,00,00]
/dev/rdsk/c2t10d3s6 HITACHI OPEN-V -SUN 45027 18 [00,00,00,00]
/dev/rdsk/c2t10d0s6 HITACHI OPEN-V-CM 45027 0 [00,00,00,00]

Note the following descriptions:

DevicePath Represents the actual access point for the device as it

exists on the client host.

EnclosureId Unique for each physical disk array.

DeviceId Unique for a physical disk or virtual disk in an enclosure.

The EnclosureId/DeviceId pair constitutes a
host-independent designation of a particular physical or
virtual disk within a disk array.

Ctl,Bus,Tgt,LUN Controller, bus, target, and LUN numbers are the elements
that designate a particular physical or virtual disk from the
perspective of the client host computer.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 199
About IBM DS4000 array

Configuring NetBackup to access the IBM DS4000 array

You must supply logon credentials that allow the NetBackup client to access the
IBM array.
To configure NetBackup to access the IBM DS4000 array
1 In the NetBackup Administration Console, click the Media and Device
Management > Credentials > Disk Array Hosts node.
2 Right-click in the Disk Array Hosts pane and select New Disk Array Host.
3 Enter a dummy (substitute) host name for the IBM 4000 array. Do not enter
the actual host name of the array.
4 Select IBM System Storage in the Disk Array Host Type pull-down menu.
5 Enter a user name and the correct password for the array.
The actual user name is not required for disk array operations. You can enter
a dummy user name. The password, however, must be valid.
6 Clear (uncheck) the Connect using port number box.

Configuring the IBM 4000 array for NetBackup

You must add each NetBackup client and alternate client to the IBM array and make
array devices available to the clients. In brief, the steps are the following.
To configure the IBM 4000 array for NetBackup
1 On the IBM array, provide host name and port information for the NetBackup
client. Note the following:
■ Define the host and host group.
A given host group must have a single host, and host name(s) must exist
for every HBA port on the host.
■ The host name and host group name on the IBM 4000 must be the same
as the NetBackup client name. If more than one host-HBA port entry exists,
the host name can differ from the client name.
■ In the IBM Storage Manager interface, select AIX as the host type.
■ As part of the host definition, select the WWPN of the NetBackup client.
Your NetBackup client must be properly zoned on the SAN to allow
communication between it and the array.

2 Repeat step 1 for each NetBackup client or alternate client that uses the array.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 200
About IBM DS4000 array

3 For every client and host group added, map an Access Logical Drive on LUN
number 7 or 31.
4 Create logical drives and map them to the host group. This step makes the
logical drives visible to the NetBackup client. For details, refer to your IBM
documentation.

Configuring a NetBackup policy for IBM_StorageManager_FlashCopy

For general help setting up a NetBackup policy, refer to the NetBackup
Administrator’s Guide, Volume I.
The following procedure focuses on the IBM_StorageManager_FlashCopy method
and its parameters.
To configure a NetBackup policy for IBM_StorageManager_FlashCopy
1 In the NetBackup Administration Console, click the Perform snapshot backups
box on the policy Attributes tab.
2 Click Options to display the Snapshot Options dialog box.
3 In the Snapshot method pull-down list, select
IBM_StorageManager_FlashCopy.
4 You can set the following parameters:

Maximum snapshots The maximum value is 4 snapshots per source device.

(Instant Recovery
only) parameter

Repository % of Base Determines the size of the IBM repository logical drive as a
(100 for Instant percentage of the primary device (base logical drive). The size
Recovery) can range from 1% to 100%. The more write activity that
occurs on the primary drive, the more space the repository
logical drive requires.

If the size of the primary is 500 GB and you set this parameter
to 30%, the repository drive is set to 150 GB (30% of 500).

For Instant Recovery backups, the percentage is set to 100%

regardless of any value that is entered here. The default (0)
does not mean 0%: it means that the array determines the
size of the repository drive (usually 20%).

For more details about the repository logical drive, refer to the
IBM System Storage DS4000 Series and Storage Manager
document.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 201
About Hitachi SMS/WMS/AMS, USP/NSC, USP-V/VM

About Hitachi SMS/WMS/AMS, USP/NSC,

USP-V/VM
The following sections include background information and configuration tasks for
NetBackup Snapshot Manager backups using Hitachi SMS/WMS/AMS, USP/NSC,
and USP-V/VM series of arrays.
These tasks must be completed before you run a backup.

Hitachi array software requirements

The following Hitachi software is required.

Table 9-11 Software that is required for Hitachi arrays

Software Where to install Version

RAID Manager/LIB 64-bit NetBackup client 01-12-03/04 or later.

Note: To determine the RAID
Manager version, run the following:

/usr/lib/RMLIB/bin/whatrmver

See “Determining the current RAID

Manager version” on page 201.

For instructions on installing the software, refer to your Hitachi documentation.

Determining the current RAID Manager version

Use the following procedure.
To determine the current RAID Manager version
Enter the following:

/usr/lib/RMLIB/bin/whatrmver

Example output:

Model :RAID-Manager/LIB/Solaris
Ver&Rev:01-12-03/04
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 202
About Hitachi SMS/WMS/AMS, USP/NSC, USP-V/VM

Preconfiguration for Hitachi

Before running backups, you must configure the arrays and appropriate volumes.
Refer to your Hitachi array documentation.

Pair status must be PSUS After creating volume pairs, you must split each
pair and leave the status of the pair at PSUS.

You can use the following CCI command:

pairsplit -g dg_name -d device_name -l

where dg_name and device_name are the names

specified in the CCI configuration file for the
primary device.

Configure command devices on The Hitachi command devices must be visible to

NetBackup client and alternate client the NetBackup client as well as to any alternate
client. To configure command devices, refer to your
Hitachi documentation.

About communication between NetBackup and the Hitachi array

You do not need to configure array credentials for the Hitachi array. All
communication between NetBackup and the array is done by means of command
devices. If multiple Hitachi arrays are connected to a NetBackup client, NetBackup
sends the NetBackup command to the correct Hitachi array.
To determine if the command devices are visible, see the following topic:
See “Determining if the Hitachi command devices are visible” on page 202.

Determining if the Hitachi command devices are visible

Use the following procedure to determine if the Hitachi command devices are visible.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 203
About Hitachi SMS/WMS/AMS, USP/NSC, USP-V/VM

To determine if the Hitachi command devices are visible

Enter the following:

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/nbfirescan

Example output:

nbfirescan v7.0 - Copyright (c) 2016 Veritas Technologies LLC.

Rescanning devices..............................................Complete.
Device count: 1
Device count: 1

DevicePath Vendor Product ID EnclosureId DeviceId [Ctl,Bus,Tgt,Lun]

--------------------------------------------------------------------
/dev/sda VMware Virtual disk - - [00,00,00,00]

The last line of the example shows a command device (DF600F-CM).

See “About communication between NetBackup and the Hitachi array” on page 202.

About configuring the Hitachi array for NetBackup

You must add each NetBackup client and alternate client to a host group on the
Hitachi array.
Note the following:
■ The name of the host group must match the host name or fully qualified domain
name of the client as specified in the NetBackup policy. The name should not
be more that 16 characters in length.
■ For host entries in the host groups, specify the WWNN/WWPN of each host.
For legacy disk snapshot methods for hitachi, see the NetBackup Snapshot Client
Configuration document.http://www.veritas.com/docs/000081320

Obtaining the Hitachi array serial number and the unique device
identifiers
The NetBackup policy requires the Hitachi array's serial number and the unique
IDs (device identifiers) for the source and clone LUNs. Use the following procedure
to obtain that information.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 204
About Hitachi SMS/WMS/AMS, USP/NSC, USP-V/VM

To obtain the Hitachi array serial number and the unique device identifiers
Enter the following command:

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/nbfirescan

Example output:

DevicePath Vendor Product ID EnclosureId DeviceId [Ctl,Bus,Tgt,Lun]

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/dev/rdsk/c2t6d15s HITACHI F600F 6484 53 [00,00,00,00]
/dev/rdsk/c2t6d14s6 HITACHI F600F 6484 52 [00,00,00,00]

The Enclosure ID is the serial number and the Device ID is the array’s device
ID.

Configuring a NetBackup policy for Hitachi_ShadowImage or

Hitachi_CopyOnWrite
For general help setting up a NetBackup policy in the NetBackup Administration
Console, refer to the NetBackup Administrator’s Guide, Volume I.
The following procedure focuses on the Hitachi_ShadowImage and
Hitachi_CopyOnWrite methods and their parameters.

Note: The term "clone LUNs," as used in this procedure, refers to the
Hitachi_ShadowImage method. For the Hitachi_CopyOnWrite method, the term
"clone LUNs" can be replaced with "snapshot LUNs."

To configure a NetBackup policy for Hitachi_ShadowImage or

Hitachi_CopyOnWrite
1 In the NetBackup Administration Console, click the Perform snapshot backups
box on the policy Attributes tab.
2 Click the Options option to display the Snapshot Options dialog box.
3 In the Snapshot method pull-down list, select Hitachi_ShadowImage or
Hitachi_CopyOnWrite.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 205
About Hitachi SMS/WMS/AMS, USP/NSC, USP-V/VM

4 In the Snapshot Resources pane, click Add.

NetBackup uses the information in the Snapshot Resources pane to correctly
rotate through the designated LUNs when performing a ShadowImage (or
CopyOnWrite) backup. After all clone LUNs have been used in a backup,
NetBackup automatically determines which clone is the oldest. NetBackup
expires the oldest clone so that it can be reused for the current backup. If that
clone represents the only backup image copy, NetBackup also expires the
backup image associated with the clone.
Note that the policy’s Backup Selections list must specify one or more source
LUNs for which snapshots are created for the backup. For each source LUN
in the policy Backup Selections list, you must supply a serial number and
unique IDs.

Note: If the snapshot resources specified in the Snapshot Resources pane

do not match with the LUN IDs specified through the backup selection entries
then the NetBackup Hitachi storage array plug-in will discover the available
target device and use it for snapshot.

See “Obtaining the Hitachi array serial number and the unique device identifiers”
on page 203.
5 In the Add Snapshot Resource dialog box, enter the array's serial number in
the Array Serial # field.
6 Enter the unique ID for the source LUN in the Source Device field.
The ID must be entered without leading zeroes. For example, if the LUN ID is
0110, enter 110 in the Source Device field.
7 Enter the unique IDs for the clone LUNs (for Hitachi_ShadowImage method)
or the snapshot LUNs (for Hitachi_CopyOnWrite) in the Snapshot Device(s)
field. To enter multiple IDs, place a semicolon between them.
The ID must be without leading zeroes. For example, if the LUN ID is 0111,
enter 111 in the Snapshot Device(s) field.
Note the following:
■ The LUNs must be unmasked to the client (or alternate client) before you
start a backup.
■ For Instant Recovery backups, the Snapshot Device(s) entries determine
where and in what order the snapshots are retained.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 206
About HP-XP arrays

About HP-XP arrays

The following sections include background information and configuration tasks for
NetBackup Snapshot Manager backups using HP-XP series of arrays.
These tasks must be completed before you run a backup.

HP-XP array software requirements

The following HP-XP software is required.

Table 9-12 Software that is required for HP-XP arrays

Software Where to install Version

RAID Manager/LIB NetBackup client 01-12-03/04 or later

64-bit
Note: To determine the RAID Manager
version, run the following:

/usr/lib/RMLIB/bin/whatrmver

See “Determining the current RAID

Manager version” on page 201.

For instructions on installing the software, refer to your HP-XP documentation.

Preconfiguration for HP-XP

Before running backups, you must configure the arrays and appropriate volumes.
Refer to your HP-XP array documentation.

Pair status After creating volume pairs, you must split

each pair and leave the status of the pair at
PSUS.

You can use the following CCI command:

pairsplit -g dg_name -d device_name -l

where dg_name and device_name are the

names specified in the CCI configuration file
for the primary device.

Configure command devices on NetBackup The HP-XP command devices must be visible
client and alternate client to the NetBackup client as well as to any
alternate client. To configure command
devices, refer to your HP-XP documentation.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 207
About HP-XP arrays

About communication between NetBackup and the HP-XP array

You do not need to configure array credentials for the HP-XP array. All
communication between NetBackup and the array is done by means of command
devices. If multiple HP-XP arrays are connected to a NetBackup client, NetBackup
sends the NetBackup command to the correct HP-XP array.
To determine if the command devices are visible, see the following topic:
See “Determining if the HP-XP command devices are visible” on page 207.

Determining if the HP-XP command devices are visible

Use the following procedure to determine if the command devices are visible.
To determine if the command devices are visible
Enter the following:

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/nbfirescan

About configuring the HP-XP array for NetBackup

You must add each NetBackup client and alternate client to a host group on the
HP-XP array.
Note the following:
■ The name of the host group must match the host name or fully qualified domain
name of the client as specified in the NetBackup policy. The name should not
be more that 16 characters in length.
■ For host entries in the host groups, specify the WWNN/WWPN of each host.

Obtaining the array serial number and unique HP-XP identifiers

The NetBackup policy requires the HP-XP array's serial number and the unique
IDs (device identifiers) for the source and clone LUNs. Use the following procedure
to obtain that information.
To obtain the array serial number and unique HP-XP identifiers
Enter the following command:

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/nbfirescan
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 208
About HP-XP arrays

Configuring a NetBackup policy for HP_XP_BusinessCopy and

HP_XP_Snapshot
For general help setting up a NetBackup policy in the NetBackup Administration
Console, refer to the NetBackup Administrator's Guide, Volume I.
The following procedure focuses on the HP_XP_BusinessCopy and
HP_XP_Snapshot methods and their parameters.

Note: The term "clone LUNs," as used in this procedure, refers to the
HP_XP_BusinessCopy method. For the HP_XP_Snapshot method, the term "clone
LUNs" can be replaced with "snapshot LUNs."

To configure a NetBackup policy for HP_XP_BusinessCopy and

HP_XP_Snapshot
1 In the NetBackup Administration Console, click the Perform snapshot backups
box on the policy Attributes tab.
2 Click the Options option to display the Snapshot Options dialog box.
3 In the Snapshot method pull-down list, select HP_XP_BusinessCopy or
HP_XP_Snapshot.
4 In the Snapshot Resources pane, click Add.
NetBackup uses the information in the Snapshot Resources pane to correctly
rotate through the designated LUNs when performing a BusinessCopy (or
Snapshot) backup. After all clone LUNs have been used in a backup, NetBackup
automatically determines which clone is the oldest. NetBackup expires the
oldest clone so that it can be reused for the current backup. If that clone
represents the only backup image copy, NetBackup also expires the backup
image associated with the clone.
See “Obtaining the array serial number and unique HP-XP identifiers”
on page 207.
5 In the Add Snapshot Resource dialog box, enter the array's serial number in
the Array Serial # field.
6 Enter the unique ID for the source LUN in the Source Device field.
The ID must be entered without leading zeroes. For example, if the LUN ID is
0110, enter 110 in the Source Device field.
7 Enter the unique IDs for the clone LUNs (for HP_XP_BusinessCopy method)
or the snapshot LUNs (for HP_XP_Snapshot) in the Snapshot Device(s) field.
To enter multiple IDs, place a semicolon between them.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 209
About array troubleshooting

The ID must be without leading zeroes. For example, if the LUN ID is 0111,
enter 111 in the Snapshot Device(s) field.
Note the following:
■ The LUNs must be unmasked to the client (or alternate client) before you
start a backup.
■ For Instant Recovery backups, the Snapshot Device(s) entries determine
where and in what order the snapshots are retained.

About array troubleshooting

These topics provide troubleshooting assistance for array-related issues.

Troubleshooting issues pertaining to all arrays

Note the following issues:
■ See “Important disk array method notes and restrictions” on page 149.
■ Backups fail with the following message in the bpfis log:

snapshot services: snapshot method analysis failed: no combos

generated: stack elements not capable of any split or quiesce.

This message can appear in the following cases:

■ The source device or target devices were incorrectly specified in the policy.
■ The wrong type of disk array method was selected. For example, if you
selected an EMC CLARiiON method for an EMC Symmetrix device.

Troubleshooting Solaris issues

Backups fail on non-Leadville Solaris systems and the following message appears
in the bpfis log:

devicefi: Failed to the initialize the import node

"UDID##HP##HSV##5000-1FE1-5007-0020##6005-08B4-0010-5F49-0000-5
000-901E-0000", device could not be found.

In this example, an HP-EVA snapshot was not found on the backup host. The
/kernel/drv/sd.conf file probably has insufficient lun= entries. Add lun= entries
for the HP-EVA target in sd.conf and restart the system. More information is
available about LUN entries in sd.conf.
See “About Solaris sd.conf file” on page 156.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 210
About array troubleshooting

Troubleshooting host OS type specification

Some arrays (such as HP EVA) require that you specify the OS type of the host. If
the OS type is not set, or is not set properly, unpredictable behavior may result.

Troubleshooting NetBackup and EMC CLARiiON arrays

Note the following issues:

Table 9-13 Issues with NetBackup and EMC CLARiiON arrays

Issue Explanation/Recommended Action

Backups fail and the following message appears in the

In this example, the message appears because LUN 1 is
bpfis log: owned by a CLARiiON storage processor for which
credentials have not been supplied. In a single path
emcclariionfi: Unable to find SP that owns
configuration, all LUNs must be owned by one storage
LUN 1. Verify that credentials have been
processor and credentials must be supplied for at least
supplied for the SP that owns LUN 1.
that storage processor. It is okay to supply credentials for
both storage processors because NetBackup automatically
determines which set of credentials should be used. In a
multipath configuration, credentials for both storage
processors should be supplied because multipathing
software may automatically change which storage
processor owns the LUN.

Backups fail and the following message appears in the Credentials must be added for the CLARiiON array by
bpfis log: means of the NetBackup Administration Console.
emcclariionfi: WARNING: Unable to import See “Configuring NetBackup to access the CLARiiON
any login credentials for any appliances. array” on page 167.

Backups fail and one or both of the following messages NetBackup searches the CLARiiON's storage groups for
appear in the bpfis log: the import host. (For a local backup, the import host is the
host where the source device is mounted. For an off-host
emcclariionfi: The host hostname was not
backup, the import host is the alternate client.) When the
found in any storage groups. To import a
host is found, the snapshot device is assigned to that
snapshot to host hostname, hostname must
storage group, thus making it visible to the import host
be in a Clariion storage group.
where the backup can proceed. If the import host is not in
emcclariionfi: LUN masking failed. Could any storage groups, the backup fails.
not find a storage group containing the
hostname [hostname].
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 211
About array troubleshooting

Table 9-13 Issues with NetBackup and EMC CLARiiON arrays (continued)

Issue Explanation/Recommended Action

Backups fail and the following message appears in the The device cannot be imported to the host, because the
bpfis log: maximum number of devices from the array is already
imported to this host. Expire any unneeded backup images.
emcclariionfi: No more available HLU
numbers in storage group. LUN LUN number
cannot be LUN masked at this time

EMC_CLARiiON_Snapview_Clone backups fail and the The clone target device does not exist in the clonegroup
following message appears in the bpfis log: belonging to the source device. Either correct the target
list in the policy or use Navisphere to add the target device
emcclariionfi: Could not find LUN LUN
to the source device's clone group.
number in clonegroup clonegroup name

Both types of CLARiiON backups fail with the following in These messages appear when the Snapview software is
the bpfis log: not installed on the CLARiiON array. Snapview must be
installed on the array before CLARiiON clone or snapshot
emcclariionfi: CLIDATA: Error: snapview
backups can succeed. Please see the array documentation
command failed emcclariionfi: CLIDATA: This
or contact EMC for more information.
version of Core Software does not support
Snapview

Backups fail and the following message appears in the NetBackup uses naviseccli to send commands to the
bpfis log: CLARiiON array. If naviseccli encounters an error, it is
captured and placed in the bpfis log. The lines immediately
execNAVISECCLI: CLI Command [CLI command]
following the above line should contain the output from
failed with error [error number]
naviseccli that indicates why the command failed.

After a point-in-time rollback from a Windows VSS backup As a best practice, avoid performing a point-in-time rollback
that was made with the EMC CLARiiON Snapview Clone from a Windows VSS backup that was made with the EMC
snapshot provider, all clones are fractured (split from the CLARiiON Snapview Clone snapshot provider, if one of
primary) the clones is configured for the policy has not been used
for an Instant Recovery backup. After a rollback, all the
clones are placed in a “fractured” state. (Fractured clones
are no longer synchronized with the primary.) As a result,
any clone that had not already been used for a backup is
no longer available for a future Instant Recovery backup.

If you must perform a point-in-time rollback before all

clones have been used for backups, note which clones
are still synchronized before you do the rollback. After the
rollback, you can manually resynchronize the clones.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 212
About array troubleshooting

Table 9-13 Issues with NetBackup and EMC CLARiiON arrays (continued)

Issue Explanation/Recommended Action

Policy validation fails for Standard policy with the following Policy validation for a Standard policy created with the
message: EMC_CLARiiON_Snapview_Snapshot fails with error 4201.

The error message is Incorrect snapshot method The policy validation fails when the CLI is installed at a
configuration or snapshot method not location where NetBackup fails to identify it. The CLI must
compatible for protecting backup selection be installed in the /sbin/naviseccli. If the CLI is
entries. installed at another location, NetBackup fails to identify
that location and policy validation fails.

To fix the policy validation, add the following entry into the
emcclariionfi.conf file:

[CLI_TOOL_INFO]

"FILEPATH_NAVISEC_EXE"="<NAVI CLI path>"

"FILENAME"="<NAVI CLI tool file name>"

For example, for the HP platform the path would be:

/usr/openv/lib/vxfi/configfiles/emcclariionfi.conf

The entry would be:

[CLI_TOOL_INFO]

"FILEPATH_NAVISEC_EXE"="/opt/Navisphere/bin"

"FILENAME_NAVISEC_EXE"="naviseccli"

Troubleshooting NetBackup and EMC Symmetrix arrays

Note the following issues:

Table 9-14 Issues with NetBackup and EMC Symmetrix arrays

Issue Explanation/Recommended Action

Point in time rollback fails and the following message See “Verifying that the clone is complete before doing a
appears in the bpfis log: point in time rollback” on page 182.

Invalid clone state, cannot restore from

device-ID to device-ID, where the first device ID
is the source and the second is the clone.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 213
About array troubleshooting

Table 9-14 Issues with NetBackup and EMC Symmetrix arrays (continued)

Issue Explanation/Recommended Action

If all Save Device space is consumed on the Symmetrix, Check the symapi log (often found at /var/symapi/log
a backup with EMC_TimeFinder_Snap or EMC_ on UNIX) to determine the exact error. If the log indicates
TimeFinder_Clone fails with the following error in the bpfis there is no Save Device space, add Save Devices to the
log: Save Device pool on your Symmetrix array.
An internal Snap or Clone error has
occurred. Please see the symapi log file

EMC_TimeFinder_Mirror backups fail and the following This message indicates that the STD-BCV pair is not in a
message appears in the bpfis log: state that allows the mirror to be created. Verify that the
pair were fully synchronized before the backup attempt.
emcsymfi: Invalid STD-BCV pair state
See “Fully synchronizing STD/BCV mirror pairs”
on page 181.

TimeFinder backups fail and a message similar to the

Device 00A4 has not been mapped to any Symmetrix
following appears in the bpfis log: director ports that are zoned to the host. All Symmetrix
devices (source devices and target devices) must be
device 00A4 to director/port that is not
mapped to an array director port that is zoned to the import
accessible to the HBA port 210000e08b86b34f
host. For a local backup policy, the import host is the host
emcsymfi: 2 of 2 HBA WWNs assigned to
where the source device is mounted. For an off-host
director/port combinations for accessing
backup policy, the import host is the alternate client.
device 00A4 are not accessible due to
misconfiguration of the array.

emcsymfi: Since there were no valid

mappings the device import will fail. To
resolve this issue you must reconfigure
your array 000187910258 to bind device 00A4
to director ports accessible to host.

Troubleshooting NetBackup and HP EVA arrays

Table 9-15 Issues with NetBackup and HP EVA arrays

Issue Explanation/Recommended
Action

Backups fail with the following warning message Credentials must be added for the EVA
in the bpfis log: array by means of the NetBackup
Administration Console.
WARNING: No credentials found for HP
HSV
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 214
About array troubleshooting

Table 9-15 Issues with NetBackup and HP EVA arrays (continued)

Issue Explanation/Recommended
Action

Snapshot job fails when the client has VxVM Uninstall the VxVM software from the
software installed, but the underlying disk in client.
Snapshot Manager backup is not configured on
stack. The following error message is displayed:

client/server handshaking failed (26)"

for HP_EVA_Snapclone FIM

See “Configuring NetBackup to access the EVA array” on page 189.

Troubleshooting IBM DS6000 and DS8000 arrays

This section provides explanations and recommended actions, as well as log entries
that may help identify the problem.
Note the following important items:
■ Before you start a backup, the snapshot device (clone) must be visible
(unmasked) to the NetBackup client or alternate client.
■ For backup and Instant Recovery rollback restore: you must supply logon
credentials that allow the NetBackup client to access the IBM array. For
NetBackup hosts not named in a policy (such as alternate clients), you must
also configure NetBackup so that the host can access the credentials.
Backups may appear to succeed, but the bprd log on the server contains
messages similar to the following:

09:02:17.999 [4292.3092] <2> is_disk_client_configured:

db_cred_allowed(host1.enterprise.com, 1) failed: 227
09:02:17.999 [4292.3092] <2> read_text_file:
is_disk_client_configured(host1.enterprise.com) failed: 227
09:02:17.999 [4292.3092] <2> process_request: read_text_file
failed - status = client is not validated to use the server
(131)

Until credential access is enabled, a backup or a point-in-time rollback fails with

NetBackup status 5.
See “Configuring NetBackup to access the IBM DS6000 or DS8000 array”
on page 191.
See “Configuring array access for NetBackup hosts not named in a policy”
on page 191.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 215
About array troubleshooting

Snapshot errors with IBM DS6000 and DS8000 arrays

(NetBackup status code 156)
Note these possible explanations:

Table 9-16 Issues encountered with Snapshot (NetBackup status code 156)

Issue Explanation/Recommended Action

The snapshot device (clone) is not visible (unmasked) to Make the clone device visible to the NetBackup client or
the NetBackup client or alternate client. alternate client before you retry the backup. Contact IBM
technical support or refer to your IBM array documentation.

The snapshot device (clone) is also a source device in Reconfigure source and clone devices so that the clone
another device pair. required for this backup is not a source device for another
clone. Contact IBM technical support or refer to your IBM
The following message may appear in the
array documentation.
/usr/openv/netbackup/logs/bpfis/ibmtsfi.log.date
log:

CMUN03041E mkflash: Copy Services operation

failure: already a FlashCopy source

The snapshot device (clone) and source device are not of Reconfigure source and clone devices to be identical in
equal size. size. Contact IBM technical support or refer to your IBM
array documentation.
The following message may appear in the
/usr/openv/netbackup/logs/bpfis/ibmtsfi.log.date
log:

CMUN03049E mkflash: Copy Services operation

failure: incompatible volumes

The source device is already recording enabled for

Verify whether the source device has a FlashCopy
FlashCopy. relationship with some device other than the snapshot
device (clone) specified in the policy. If a FlashCopy
The following message may appear in the
relationship exists with some other device, delete the
/usr/openv/netbackup/logs/bpfis/ibmtsfi.log.date
relationship and start the backup again.
log:

CMUN03027E mkflash: FlashCopy operation

failure: action prohibited by current
FlashCopy state. Contact IBM technical
support for assistance.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 216
About array troubleshooting

Table 9-16 Issues encountered with Snapshot (NetBackup status code 156)
(continued)

Issue Explanation/Recommended Action

The IBM FlashCopy license is not installed. Install the FlashCopy license on the storage subsystem.
Contact IBM technical support or refer to your IBM array
The following message may appear in the
documentation.
/usr/openv/netbackup/logs/bpfis/ibmtsfi.log.date
log:

CMUN03035E mkflash: Copy Services operation

failure: feature not installed.

The FlashCopy relationship is not recording enabled. ■ Make sure a FlashCopy relationship exists for the
device pair.
The following message may appear in the
If the FlashCopy relationship is not recording enabled,
/usr/openv/netbackup/logs/bpfis/ibmtsfi.log.date ■
remove the FlashCopy relationship and then re-run the
log:
backup.
CMUN03027E resyncflash: FlashCopy operation
failure: action prohibited by current
FlashCopy state. Contact IBM technical
support for assistance

A FlashCopy relationship does not exist. Verify that a FlashCopy pair does not exist, and then
re-execute the backup.
The following message may appear in the
/usr/openv/netbackup/logs/bpfis/ibmtsfi.log.date
log:

CMUN03027E resyncflash: FlashCopy operation

failure: action prohibited by current
FlashCopy state. Contact IBM technical
support for assistance.

A resynchronize operation was attempted on a FlashCopy

pair that does not exist.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 217
About array troubleshooting

Table 9-16 Issues encountered with Snapshot (NetBackup status code 156)
(continued)

Issue Explanation/Recommended Action

Incremental Copy is in progress. Allow the background copy or maintenance activity to

complete. Then re-run the backup.
The following message may appear in the
/usr/openv/netbackup/logs/bpfis/ibmtsfi.log.date
log:

CMUN02498E resyncflash: The storage unit

is busy.
This message can appear for the following reasons:

■ A background copy is in progress for the given pair of

devices on the array.
■ Some maintenance activity is currently in progress on
the array.

Troubleshooting IBM4000 arrays

These sections provide explanations and recommended actions, as well as log
entries that may help identify the problem.

Snapshot errors encountered with IBM4000 arrays

(NetBackup status code 156)
The following table lists explanations and recommended actions for status code
156.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 218
About array troubleshooting

Table 9-17 Explanations and recommended actions for status code 156

Problem Description and recommended action for status code 156

The array does not FlashCopy logical drives are created under the same logical array as is the base or primary
have enough free logical drive. The storage subsystem might have free space, but if the logical array has
space. insufficient space, the FlashCopy operation fails.

The following messages may appear in the /usr/openv/netbackup/logs/bpfis log:

23:44:48.007 [655588] <2> onlfi_vfms_logf: INF - snapshot services: ibmdsfi:Wed Mar 12

2008 23:44:48.007721 <Thread id - 1> FlashCopy could not be created. command [create
FlashCopyLogicalDrive baseLogicalDrive="angela_javelin_4"
userLabel="angela_javelin_4_flcp_4";].23:44:48.012 [655588] <2> onlfi_vfms_logf: INF -
snapshot services: ibmdsfi: FlashCopy creation failed for source volume angela_javelin_4
on storage unit ibmds4700.

In addition, the following messages may appear in

/usr/openv/netbackup/logs/bpfis/ibmdsfi.log.date:

Mon Mar 31 2008 14:25:23.036588 <Pid - 1065104 / Thread id - 1> FlashCopy could not be
created. command [create FlashCopyLogicalDrive baseLogicalDrive="drive-claix11-1"
userLabel="drive-claix11-1_flcp";]. Mon Mar 31 2008 14:25:23.037164 <Pid - 1065104 /
Thread id - 1> OUTPUT=[Unable to create logical drive "drive-claix11-1_flcp" using the Create
FlashCopy Logical Drive command at line 1. Error - The operation cannot complete because
there is not enough space on the array. The command at line 1 that caused the error is:
create FlashCopyLogicalDrive baseLogicalDrive="drive-claix11-1"
userLabel="drive-claix11-1_flcp";

Recommended action: Make sure that the array has enough space available for the snapshot.

The maximum number The following messages may appear in /usr/openv/netbackup/logs/bpfis/ibmdsfi.log.date:

of FlashCopies (4)
Mon Mar 31 2008 14:25:23.036588 <Pid - 1065104 / Thread id - 1> FlashCopy could not be
already exist on the
created. command [create FlashCopyLogicalDrive baseLogicalDrive="drive-claix11-1"
array.
userLabel="drive-claix11-1_flcp";]. Mon Mar 31 2008 14:25:23.037164 <Pid - 1065104 /
Thread id - 1> OUTPUT=[Could not create a flashcopy logical drive using the Create
FlashCopyLogicalDrive command at line 1. Error 129 - The operation cannot complete
because the maximum number of flashcopy logical drives have been created for this base
logical drive.

Recommended action: Delete any FlashCopies that NetBackup did not create.

The Access Logical On the IBM DS4000, the Access Logical Drive communicates with the storage subsystem.
Drive is not mapped for Any client that is connected to and needs to communicate with the storage subsystem should
the NetBackup client or have an Access Logical Drive mapped to it. If an Access Logical Drive is not mapped to the
alternate client at LUN client, the client is unable to communicate with the array. As a result, any NetBackup client
31 or 7. operation involving the array fails.

Recommended action: Create and map an Access Logical Drive. Contact IBM technical
support or refer to your IBM array documentation.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 219
About array troubleshooting

Table 9-17 Explanations and recommended actions for status code 156
(continued)

Problem Description and recommended action for status code 156

The DAR driver is not Recommended action: Make sure that the RDAC package is installed on the AIX host.
functional.

For further reference on IBM System Storage DS4000

The following IBM documents may be helpful:
■ IBM System Storage DS4000 Series and Storage Manager
http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/abstracts/sg247010.html
■ IBM System Storage DS Storage Manager Version 10.30: Copy Services User’s
Guide
http://www.filibeto.org/unix/aix/lib/hardware/ds4800/copy-services-ug-gc53113600.pdf
■ IBM System Storage DS4000 Storage Manager Version 9 Installation and
Support Guide

Troubleshooting Hitachi arrays

This section provides explanations and recommended actions, as well as log entries
that may help identify the problem.
Note the following important items:
■ RAID Manager version 01-12-03/04 or later is required.
See “Determining the current RAID Manager version” on page 201.
■ Before you start a backup, the snapshot device (clone LUN or snapshot LUN)
must be visible (unmasked) to the NetBackup client or alternate client.
■ For the NetBackup policy Snapshot Resource configuration, specify device IDs
in decimal and without leading zeros.
For example, if your source device ID is 0100 and the snapshot device ID is
0101, enter 100 and 101 in the Snapshot Resources dialog box.
See “Configuring a NetBackup policy for Hitachi_ShadowImage or
Hitachi_CopyOnWrite” on page 204.

NetBackup policy validation fails with Hitachi arrays

Note these possible explanations:
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 220
About array troubleshooting

Table 9-18 NetBackup policy validation fails

Issue Explanation/Recommended Action

Look for the following error in the Make sure that the RMLIB 64-bit library is installed. This
/usr/openv/netbackup/logs/bpfis/hitachi.log.<date> requirement applies when you upgrade from a 6.5.x system
log: (requires 32-bit RMLIB) to a 7.1 system, and when you
install a fresh 7.1 system.
Library RMLIB init failed

The Hitachi command device is not unmasked. Refer to Hitachi documentation for creating and unmasking
command devices.
See the sample log messages in the next row.

The Hitachi command device is unmasked but is not visible Make sure that the command device is recognized by the
to client, or the enclosure ID specified in the policy’s operating system and that the enclosure ID is entered
Snapshot Resources is invalid. correctly in the policy's Snapshot Resources.

The To determine if the command device is recognized by the

/usr/openv/netbackup/logs/bpfis/hitachi.log.<date> operating system, try device discovery commands such
log may contain messages similar to the following: as the following:

Fri Mar 21 2008 16:26:46.431046 <Pid - 9477 devfsadm

/ Thread id - 1> Entering Function
delayedInit [110, cfgadm -al
providers/hitachi/hitachi_plugin.cpp] Fri
Mar 21 2008 16:26:49.173893 <Pid - 9477 / A log message for the enclosure ID would include an entry
Thread id - 1> <Device such as the following:
name="/dev/rdsk/c4t50060E801029F700d2s6" c3t50060E801029F700d28
udid="UDID##HITACHI##HDS##75040816##3" <HITACHI-DF600F-CM-0000 cyl 52 alt 2 hd 50
bus="0" target="0" lun="0" vendor="HITACHI" sec 768>
product="DF600F-CM" /> Fri Mar 21 2008
16:26:49.174493 <Pid - 9477 / Thread id - which shows that the device is visible as
c3t50060E801029F700d28.
1> Exiting Function delayedInit [110,
providers/hitachi/hitachi_plugin.cpp]

If the delayedInit message does not include at least

one entry for the enclosure ID that was entered in the
policy’s Snapshot Resources, the command device is not
unmasked or is not visible to NetBackup client (host).

A mismatch exists between the policy’s snapshot method Specify the correct snapshot method or snapshot devices.
and the type of LUNs specified for the Snapshot Devices.
For example, if you select the Hitachi_ShadowImage
method but specify snapshot LUNs instead of clone LUNs
for the Snapshot Devices, an error occurs.

See the sample log messages in the next bullet.

 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 221
About array troubleshooting

Table 9-18 NetBackup policy validation fails (continued)

Issue Explanation/Recommended Action

A disk pair was not created for the source device and Set up a disk pair (primary and secondary) for the source
snapshot device specified in the NetBackup policy’s device and snapshot device that are specified in the
Snapshot Resources. policy’s Snapshot Resources. Refer to the Hitachi
documentation.
The
/usr/openv/netbackup/logs/bpfis/hitachi.log.<date>
log may contain messages similar to the following.

If the snapshot method is Hitachi_CopyOnWrite:

Fri Mar 21 2008 16:26:49.173893 <Pid - 9477

/ Thread id - 1> HITACHI_FIM_SNAPSHOT not
supported for 10

If the snapshot method is Hitachi_ShadowImage:

Fri Mar 21 2008 16:26:49.173893 <Pid - 9477

/ Thread id - 1> HITACHI_FIM_SHADOW_IMAGE
not supported for 10

In the policy’s Snapshot Resources, the device identifier Recommended action: Make sure that the identifiers are
for the source device or snapshot device is invalid. correctly entered in the policy’s Snapshot Resources.
Specify source and snapshot IDs without leading zeros.
The
/usr/openv/netbackup/logs/bpfis/hitachi.log.<date> See “Configuring a NetBackup policy for
log may contain messages similar to the following: Hitachi_ShadowImage or Hitachi_CopyOnWrite”
on page 204.
Fri Mar 21 2008 16:26:49.173893 <Pid - 9477
/ Thread id - 1> getrminfo failed. Fri Mar
21 2008 16:26:49.173893 <Pid - 9477 /
Thread id - 1> operation failed with error
number <> with message <msg>'.

The above message may indicate that a device ID in the

policy’s Snapshot Resources is incorrect or does not exist.
For example, if the specified snapshot device ID does not
exist:

Mon May 12 2008 21:32:32.088876 <Pid - 8040

/ Thread id - 1> getrminfo is called for
'9999'. Mon May 12 2008 21:32:32.089736
<Pid - 8040 / Thread id - 1> getrminfo
failed. Mon May 12 2008 21:32:32.090003
<Pid - 8040 / Thread id - 1> operation
failed with error number '-1' with message
'[EL_CMDRJE] An order of the control
command rejected.'.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 222
About array troubleshooting

Table 9-18 NetBackup policy validation fails (continued)

Issue Explanation/Recommended Action

The RAID Manager library libsvrrm.so software is not Recommended action: Install the RAID Manager package
installed in the /usr/lib/ directory. in /usr/lib/. See the Hitachi documentation.

The installed version of RAID Manager library Recommended action: Look for the Library RMLIB
libsvrrm.so is not supported. version message in the
/usr/openv/netbackup/logs/bpfis/hitachi.log.<date>
log.

See “Determining the current RAID Manager version”

on page 201.

Backup or restore or image expiration fails with Hitachi

arrays
The following table lists possible explanations:
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 223
About array troubleshooting

Table 9-19 Backup or restore or image expiration fails

Issue Explanation/Recommended Action

These messages indicate that the instance number is not

available. A problem may exist with the instance number
management logic.

■ Remove the following file.

/usr/openv/lib/vxfi/cachefiles/hitachi/
UDID##HITACHI##HDS##enclosure id##*
The enclosure id is the array's serial number that is
specified in the policy’s Snapshot Resources.
■ Gather the appropriate Hitachi logs and contact Veritas
customer support for NetBackup.
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 224
About array troubleshooting

Table 9-19 Backup or restore or image expiration fails (continued)

Issue Explanation/Recommended Action

A problem occurred that involved the Hitachi instance

number. For example, the Hitachi snapshot provider did
not receive the instance number for the command device.
The instance number is needed to connect to the array.

The
/usr/openv/netbackup/logs/bpfis/hitachi.log.<date>
log contains the following message:

Couldn't get instance no failed with

message ....

The log may contain the following additional messages:

Fri Mar 21 2008 16:26:49.818233 <Pid - 9477

/ Thread id - 1> Entering Function
attachCmd [156,
providers/hitachi/hitachi_rmlibintf.cpp]
Fri Mar 21 2008 16:26:49.173893 <Pid - 9477
/ Thread id - 1> attachcmddev is called
with cmd dev /dev/dsk/c1t0d0s2 and instance
number 0. Fri Mar 21 2008 16:26:49.818308
<Pid - 9477 / Thread id - 1> Exiting
Function attachCmd [156,
providers/hitachi/hitachi_rmlibintf.cpp]

The attachcmddev message should list the Hitachi

command device (for the enclosure ID that was specified
in the policy) and the instance number. If the Hitachi
command device is not included in the message, then the
instance number was not received. A limited number of
instance numbers are allowed per command device. If the
maximum number of processes is using the same
command device, no more instance numbers are available.
This situation may indicate a problem with the instance
number management logic of the Hitachi provider.

Note also the following potential messages:

Fri Mar 21 2008 16:26:49.818233 <Pid - 9477

/ Thread id - 1> Entering Function
attachCmd [156,
providers/hitachi/hitachi_rmlibintf.cpp]
Fri Mar 21 2008 16:26:49.173893 <Pid - 9477
/ Thread id - 1> Couldn't get instance no
failed with message '%s'. Fri Mar 21 2008
 Configuration of snapshot methods for disk arrays 225
About array troubleshooting

Table 9-19 Backup or restore or image expiration fails (continued)

Issue Explanation/Recommended Action

16:26:49.818308 <Pid - 9477 / Thread id -

1> Exiting Function attachCmd [156,
providers/hitachi/hitachi_rmlibintf.cpp]

Another example message is the following:

Fri Mar 21 2008 16:26:49.173893 <Pid - 9477

/ Thread id - 1> Couldn't get instance no
failed with message 'Instance No Exhausted,
couln't reclaim giving up'

The default array controller of the source device is not the Recommended action: Make sure that the clone (or
same as the controller of the snapshot device. Use the snapshot) device has the same default controller as the
Storage Navigator interface to verify. source device. See the Hitachi documentation.
 Chapter 10
Notes on Media Server
and Third-Party Copy
methods
This chapter includes the following topics:

■ Disk requirements for Media Server and Third-Party Copy methods

■ Directives for Media Server and Third-Party Copy methods

■ Storage units for Media Server and Third-Party Copy methods

■ Preventing multiplexing on a third-party copy backup

■ Raw partition backups

■ Increasing the client read timeout for all clients

■ Further information on off-host data mover backups

Disk requirements for Media Server and

Third-Party Copy methods
For the NetBackup Media Server or Third-Party Copy Device backup method, the
client’s data must be on one or more disks that meet the following criteria.
■ The disk must be either a SCSI or Fibre Channel device.
■ The disk must be visible to both the NetBackup client and to the NetBackup
media server. The disk must be connected through a Fibre Channel SAN or
through a disk array that has dual port SCSI connections.
 Notes on Media Server and Third-Party Copy methods 227
Directives for Media Server and Third-Party Copy methods

■ The disk must be able to return its SCSI serial number in response to a
serial-number inquiry (serialization). Or, the disk must support SCSI Inquiry
Page Code 83.

Directives for Media Server and Third-Party Copy

methods
The policy’s Backup Selections must not contain the ALL_LOCAL_DRIVES entry
(except for VMware).

Storage units for Media Server and Third-Party

Copy methods
Note the following:
■ Any_available is not supported for NetBackup Media Server and Third-Party
Copy Device backup methods.
■ Disk storage units are not supported for the Third-Party Copy Device method.

Preventing multiplexing on a third-party copy

backup
The Third-Party Copy Device backup method is incompatible with multiplexing (the
writing of two or more concurrent backup jobs to the same storage device). To
prevent multiplexing on a third-party copy backup, you must set Maximum
multiplexing per drive to 1. Make this setting on the Add New Storage Unit or
Change Storage Unit dialog.
To prevent multiplexing on a third-party copy backup
On the Add New Storage Unit or Change Storage Unit dialog, set Maximum
multiplexing per drive to 1.

Raw partition backups

For the NetBackup Media Server or Third-Party Copy method, do not specify a
block device as the raw partition to back up. For these two backup methods,
NetBackup does not support block devices. Instead, specify the raw partition as a
character device.
Examples:
 Notes on Media Server and Third-Party Copy methods 228
Increasing the client read timeout for all clients

Solaris: /dev/rdsk/c1t3d0s3
HP: /dev/rdsk/c1t0d0

Increasing the client read timeout for all clients

For the NetBackup Media Server method, it may be necessary to increase the client
read timeout value. In some environments, NetBackup may require more read time
than the default value allows. If the client read timeout is insufficient, the backup
may fail with status 13, file read failed.
To increase the client read timeout for all clients
1 In the NetBackup Administration Console, go to Host Properties > Master
Servers > double click the primary server > Properties > Timeouts.
2 Increase the Client read timeout.
3 Retry the backup.

Further information on off-host data mover

backups
See the off-host data mover backups section in the NetBackup Snapshot Client
Configuration document:
http://www.veritas.com/docs/000081320
 Chapter 11
Backup and restore
procedures
This chapter includes the following topics:

■ About performing a backup

■ About performing a restore

■ About restores from a FlashBackup backup

■ Restoring a large number of files in a clustered file system (VxFS on UNIX Only)

■ Instant Recovery restore features

■ Notes for restoring individual files from an Instant Recovery snapshot

■ About configurations for restore

■ About restoring from a disk snapshot

About performing a backup

The following types of backups can be used with Snapshot Manager policies.

Automatic backup The most convenient way to back up client data is to configure
a policy and then set up schedules for automatic, unattended
backups. To use NetBackup Snapshot Manager, you must
enable snapshot backup as described in the appropriate
configuration chapter of this guide. To add new schedules
or change existing schedules for automatic backups, you can
follow the guidelines in the NetBackup Administrator’s Guide,
Volume I.
 Backup and restore procedures 230
About performing a restore

Manual backup The administrator can use the NetBackup Administration

interface on the primary server to execute a backup for a
policy. To use NetBackup Snapshot Manager, you must
enable snapshot backup as described in the appropriate
configuration chapter of this guide.

See the NetBackup Administrator’s Guide, Volume I, for

instructions on doing manual backups.

User-directed backup and From a NetBackup client, the user can execute a Snapshot
archive Manager backup. The NetBackup administrator must
configure an appropriate snapshot policy with schedule.

See the NetBackup Backup, Archive, and Restore Getting

Started Guide for instructions on doing user-directed backups
and archives.

About performing a restore

You can use the Backup, Archive, and Restore interface to restore individual files
or directories, or a volume or raw partition. See the NetBackup Backup, Archive,
and Restore Getting Started Guide for instructions on performing the restore. The
following topics include restore notes and procedures unique to certain components
of Snapshot Manager.

About restores from a FlashBackup backup

Using the Backup, Archive, and Restore interface, you can restore individual
directories or files (or an entire raw partition) from a FlashBackup backup. The
procedure is the same as that for restoring from a regular backup as described in
the NetBackup Backup, Archive, and Restore Getting Started Guide.

Note: In the Backup, Archive, and Restore interface, set the policy type to
FlashBackup for UNIX clients and FlashBackup-Windows for Windows clients.

Note the following before you start the restore:

■ A FlashBackup (or FlashBackup-Windows) backup supports both individual file
restore and raw partition restore. You can do either type of restore from the
same backup. To restore individual files, select Normal Backups on the Restore
Files tab; to restore an entire raw partition, select Raw Partition Backups.
■ To restore a raw partition, you must have administrator capabilities on the
NetBackup server.
 Backup and restore procedures 231
About restores from a FlashBackup backup

■ An entire raw partition can be restored from a full backup only. FlashBackup
incremental backups only support individual file restores.
■ Ensure that the device file for the raw partition exists before the restore.
■ The overwrite option must be selected for raw partition restores. The device file
must exist and the disk partition is overwritten.
■ To restore a very large number of files (when individual file restore would take
too long), you can do a raw-partition restore. Redirect the restore to another
raw partition of the same size and then copy individual files to the original file
system.

Notes for FlashBackup and UNIX client restore

Note the following for UNIX clients:
■ To restore an entire raw partition, ensure that the partition is not mounted and
not in use. (For this reason, you cannot perform a raw partition restore to the
root partition, or to the partition on which NetBackup is installed.) If a database
uses the partition, shut down the database. The partition must be the same size
as when it was backed up; otherwise, the results of the restore are unpredictable.
■ After a raw partition restore of a VxFS file system, a file system consistency
check (fsck) is usually required before the file system can be mounted.

Notes for FlashBackup and Windows client restore

Note the following for Windows clients:
■ For raw partition restores, you must select the overwrite option. The device file
must exist and the disk partition is overwritten during the restore.
■ For raw partition restores, ensure that the partition is mounted (designated as
a drive letter) but not in use. (For this reason, you cannot perform a raw partition
restore to the root partition, or to the partition on which NetBackup is installed.)
If a database uses the partition, shut down the database. The partition must be
the same size as when it was backed up; otherwise, the results of the restore
are unpredictable.
■ For raw partition restores, make sure to select the drive letter that is in the same
format as was specified in the FlashBackup-Windows policy (for example, \\.\E:).
If you select E:\, the restore fails.
 Backup and restore procedures 232
Restoring a large number of files in a clustered file system (VxFS on UNIX Only)

Restoring a large number of files in a clustered

file system (VxFS on UNIX Only)
In a clustered file system, to restore a large number of files (such as 100,000 or
more), the restore finishes sooner if the file system is mounted on a local host. The
file system can then be mounted as a shared mount after the restore.
To restore a large number of files in a clustered file system
1 Stop all applications (on any nodes) that use the file system.
2 Unmount the file system.
3 Mount the file system locally.
4 Perform the restore.
5 Share the mounted file system again, and restart applications (if any).

Instant Recovery restore features

You can restore files from an Instant Recovery backup in the same way as from a
normal backup. Restore procedures are described in the NetBackup Backup,
Archive, and Restore Getting Started Guide.
In addition, note the features unique to Instant Recovery may require special
instructions.

Block-level restore (for VxFS_Checkpoint See “About Instant Recovery: block-level

snapshots) restore” on page 233.

File promotion (for VxFS_Checkpoint or See “About Instant Recovery: file promotion”
NAS_Snapshot snapshots) on page 233.

Fast File Resync for Windows (for VxVM and See “About Instant Recovery: Fast File
FlashSnap snapshots) Resync (Windows clients only)” on page 235.

Rollback (for VxFS_Checkpoint, VxVM, VSS, See “About Instant Recovery: point in time
FlashSnap, or NAS_Snapshot snapshots, rollback” on page 236.
OST_FIM, and the disk array methods)

Rollback For VSO See “About Instant Recovery: point in time

rollback” on page 236.
 Backup and restore procedures 233
Instant Recovery restore features

About Instant Recovery: block-level restore

If the Instant Recovery snapshot was made with the VxFS_Checkpoint method,
large files can be recovered faster by means of block-level restore. Only the blocks
that have changed are moved from the snapshot to the client’s primary fileset.
Note the following:
■ Block-level restore requires the VxFS File System.
■ Block-level restore is available only when restoring files to the original location
on the client, AND when the snapshot method for the backup was
VxFS_Checkpoint.
■ If the snapshot method for the backup was VxFS_Checkpoint and the files to
be restored are in an Oracle database, block-level restore is automatically
enabled.
More information is available about activating and deactivating block-level restore.
See “Activating and deactivating block-level restore” on page 233.

Activating and deactivating block-level restore

To activate block-level restore
Create the following (empty) file on the client:

/usr/openv/netbackup/PFI_BLI_RESTORE

After this file is created, all subsequent restores of the client’s data use
block-level restore.
To deactivate block-level restore
Delete (or rename) the PFI_BLI_RESTORE file.
When block-level restore is activated, it is used for all files in the restore.
Block-level restore may not be appropriate for all of the files. It may take longer
to restore a large number of small files, because they must first be mapped.

About Instant Recovery: file promotion

If the Instant Recovery snapshot was made on UNIX with either VxFS_Checkpoint
or NAS_Snapshot, large files that have had many changes since the backup can
be recovered more quickly by means of file promotion. File promotion optimizes
single-file restore by using a minimum of I/O to recover the files.
 Backup and restore procedures 234
Instant Recovery restore features

Notes on file promotion

Only regular files can be promoted, not file links or directories.
Note the following regarding VxFS_Checkpoint:
■ File promotion requires the VxFS File System version 4.0 or later.
■ File promotion can be done only from the last Instant Recovery snapshot that
was made with the VxFS_Checkpoint method.
■ File promotion is available only when restoring files to the original location on
the original client.
Note the following regarding NAS_Snapshot:
■ File promotion is available when restoring to the original volume on the original
client.
■ File promotion can be done from older snapshots, but any newer NAS snapshots
are deleted after the file promotion takes place.
■ The file system requirements depend on the NAS vendor.
■ For further requirements specific to your NAS vendor, see the NetBackup for
NDMP Supported OS and NAS Appliance Information online document. That
document can be accessed from the following:
http://www.veritas.com/docs/000027113

About file promotion

The file promotion procedure is the same as the standard restore procedure for
NetBackup.
See the NetBackup Backup, Archive, and Restore Getting Started Guide.
No special settings or choices are required when you are using the Backup, Archive,
and Restore interface.
If the requirements are met, NetBackup automatically attempts file promotion for
the file.
See “Notes on file promotion” on page 234.
Otherwise the restore of the file takes place in the standard manner, without file
promotion. All file data is copied from the snapshot to the primary file system. The
NetBackup progress log indicates how many files were promoted and how many
files that could not be promoted were restored by means of tar.
 Backup and restore procedures 235
Instant Recovery restore features

About Instant Recovery: Fast File Resync (Windows clients only)

If the Instant Recovery snapshot was made on Windows with VxVM or FlashSnap,
large files that have had many changes since the backup can be recovered more
quickly by means of Fast File Resync. (Fast File Resync is a type of file promotion.)
Only the blocks that have changed are moved from the snapshot to the client’s
primary fileset.

Notes on Fast File Resync (FFR)

Note the following:
■ FFR requires Storage Foundations for Windows 4.1 or later and the licensed
FlashSnap option.
■ FFR can be done only from an Instant Recovery snapshot that was made with
the VxVM or FlashSnap method.
■ FFR is available only when you restore to the original location on the original
client.
■ The overwrite existing files option must be selected.

Notes on Fast File Resync (FFR) and the files to be

restored
Note the following:
■ The original files must be present on the client and are overwritten by the restore.
■ The names and creation times of the original files and the snapshot files must
be identical.
■ Files must be larger than 20 MB and be formatted in NTFS.
■ Files must not be compressed or encrypted.
■ There must be no open handles on either the original file or the snapshot file.

About using Fast File Resync

The Fast File Resync procedure for restoring individual files is the same as the
standard restore procedure for NetBackup. Refer to the NetBackup Backup, Archive,
and Restore Getting Started Guide. No special settings or choices are required
when you use the Backup, Archive, and Restore interface.
 Backup and restore procedures 236
Instant Recovery restore features

When NetBackup uses Fast File Resync

If the requirements are met, NetBackup automatically attempts Fast File Resync
first.
See “Notes on Fast File Resync (FFR)” on page 235.
If Fast File Resync cannot be used for a file, the restore of that file takes place in
the standard manner, without Fast File Resync. That is, all file data is copied from
the snapshot to the primary file system. The NetBackup progress log indicates how
many files were re-synchronized, and how many files that could not be
re-synchronized were restored by means of tar.

About Instant Recovery: point in time rollback

You can also restore a snapshot of an entire file system or volume with minimal
I/O. This type of restore is called point in time rollback. All the data in the snapshot
is restored; single file restore is not available in a rollback.
See “Notes on rollback” on page 236.
See “Instant Recovery restore features” on page 232.

Notes on rollback
Note the following.

Warning: Rollback deletes all files that were created after the creation-date of the
snapshot that you restore. Rollback returns a file system or volume to a given point
in time. Any data changes or snapshots that were made after that time are lost.
Also, if there are multiple logical volumes on a single disk or volume group and if
you perform a Point in Time Rollbackof a specific logical volume, the entire disk
or volume group is restored to the point in time.

■ Rollback can be done only from the backups that were enabled for Instant
Recovery and made with one of the following methods: VxFS_Checkpoint,
VxVM, FlashSnap, NAS_Snapshot, or the disk array methods.
Rollback can be done from the backups that were enabled for Instant Recovery
and made with and made with VSO snapshot method.
■ If the backup was made with the EMC_TimeFinder_Clone method and the clone
is not fully created, a rollback cannot succeed.
To verify that the clone is complete before you do a rollback:
See “Verifying that the clone is complete before doing a point in time rollback”
on page 182.
 Backup and restore procedures 237
Instant Recovery restore features

■ For the backups that were made with the VxFS_Checkpoint method, rollback
requires the VxFS File System 4.0 or later and Disk Layout 6. For
NAS_Snapshot, the file system requirements depend on the NAS vendor.
■ Rollback deletes any VxFS_Checkpoint snapshots or NAS_Snapshot snapshots
(and their catalog information) that were created after the creation-date of the
snapshot that you restore.
Rollback deletes any snapshots (and their catalog information) that were created
after the creation-date of the snapshot that you restore.
■ If the primary file system is mounted and the snapshot resides on a disk array,
the rollback attempts to unmount the file system. Any I/O on the primary device
is forcibly stopped if the unmount succeeds. To be safe, make sure that no I/O
occurs on the primary device before a rollback.
If the attempt to unmount the primary file system fails, the rollback does not
succeed. You should halt I/O on the device and retry the rollback. For example,
if a terminal session has accessed the file system through the cd command,
change to a directory outside the file system and retry the rollback.
■ Rollback is available only when you restore the file system or volume to the
original location on the client.
■ When a file system rollback starts, NetBackup verifies that the primary file system
has no files that were created after the snapshot was made. Otherwise, the
rollback aborts.
■ Rollback from OST_FIM type snapshot can be done from copy one only.
Rollback from VSO_FIM type snapshot can be done from copy one only.
■ For the rollback from OST_FIM type snapshot, refer to the NetBackup Replication
Director Solutions Guide.
See “About Instant Recovery: point in time rollback” on page 236.

Performing snapshot rollback

The following procedure requires root access (UNIX) or Administrator privilege
(Windows).
To perform snapshot rollback (UNIX)
1 Start the Backup, Archive, and Restore interface.

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/jbpSA &

2 Click the Restore Files tab.

3 Click Actions > Specify NetBackup Machines to specify the server, source
client, policy type, and destination client.
 Backup and restore procedures 238
Instant Recovery restore features

4 For the Restore Type, select Point in Time Rollback.

The Browse directory field is grayed out, with root (/) as default.
Instant Recovery backups are displayed in the Backup History window, for
all dates (you cannot set a range).
5 Select an image from the list and click OK.
The image contents are displayed in the Directory Structure pane of the
Restore Files tab.

You can select root level or mount points (file systems or volumes), but not
folders or files at a lower level.
6 In the Directory Structure list, click the check box next to the root node or a
mount point beneath root.
You can select a file system or volume, but not lower-level components.
7 Click the Restore option.
 Backup and restore procedures 239
Instant Recovery restore features

If the volume that you have selected, belongs to a storage array consistency
group or volume set, you can see a list of volumes that are restored along with
the selected volume, as they belong to the same array volume set or
consistency group. In the open dialog,
■ To recover all the listed volumes, click OK.
■ To cancel, and select another restore method for single volume recovery,
click Cancel.
For more details refer to NetBackup status code: 4311, in the NetBackup
Status Codes Reference Guide
The only available destination option is Restore everything to its original
location.
8 For file systems, you can choose to skip file verification by placing a check in
the Skip verification and force rollback option.

Warning: Click Skip verification and force rollback only if you are sure that
you want to replace all the files in the original location with the snapshot.
Rollback deletes all files that were created after the creation-date of the
snapshot that you restore.

If Skip verification and force rollback is not selected, NetBackup performs

checks on the file system.
See “Notes on rollback” on page 236.
 Backup and restore procedures 240
Instant Recovery restore features

If the checks do not pass, the rollback aborts and the Task Progress tab states
that rollback could not be performed because file verification failed.
9 For volumes belonging to consistency group or volume set, select Force
rollback even if it destroys the consistency group’s state on the storage
array option, to ignore any mismatch in consistency group configuration on
the storage arrays during the restore. NetBackup completes the restore with
warning messages.

Note: Select this option only when it is safe to rollback all the devices on the
concerned storage array consistency group.

To understand the concept of forced rollback, refer to the following examples.

The above figure shows a simple application server where the application data
(/mnt1 and /mnt2) resides on five storage array devices (D1, D2, D3, D4 and
D5), which are a part of storage array consistency group. Consider that your
NetBackup policy is configured such that you are using VSO snapshot method
and backup selection leads to /mnt1 and /mnt2. Once the snapshot is
conducted, it will be conducted at consistency group level. So, now at the time
of PIT Rollback Restore if you choose only /mnt1 for such a restore, you will
 Backup and restore procedures 241
Instant Recovery restore features

get a warning stating partial selection. This is because of the fact that the
snapshot being referred for restore has information about group snapshot
consisting of devices D1, D2, D3, D4 and D5 where /mnt1 resides on D1, D2
and D3 only; and reverting back at consistency group will affect all devices in
this group.

The above figure shows a simple application server where the application data
(/mnt1 and /mnt2) resides on three devices (D1, D2, D3) which are part of a
storage array consistency group. The consistency group is comprised of four
devices (D1, D2, D3 and D4). Consider that your NetBackup policy is configured
such that you are using VSO snapshot method and backup selection leads to
/mnt1 and /mnt2. Once the snapshot is conducted, it will be conducted at
consistency group level. So, now at the time of PIT Rollback Restore if you
select both /mnt1 and /mnt2 for such a restore, the restore will fail due to
mis-match of the devices. Because, the group consists of four devices whereas
the devices being asked for restore are only three. Reverting back at
consistency group will affect all devices in this group.
 Backup and restore procedures 242
Instant Recovery restore features

The rest of the procedure is identical to a normal restore as explained in the

NetBackup Backup, Archive, and Restore Getting Started Guide and help.
To perform snapshot rollback (Windows)
1 Start the Backup, Archive, and Restore interface.
Click Start > Programs > Veritas NetBackup > Backup, Archive, and
Restore.
2 From the Select for Restore drop-down list, select Restore from Point in
Time Rollback.
3 Click File > Specify NetBackup Machines and Policy Type to specify the
server, source client, policy type, and destination client.
4 In the NetBackup History pane, click the backup image to restore.
Only Instant Recovery backups are displayed in the NetBackup History pane,
for all dates (you cannot set a date range).

You can select root level or mount points (file systems or volumes), but not
folders or files at a lower level.
5 In the All Folders pane, click the check box next to the root node or a mount
point beneath root.
You can select a file system or volume, but not lower-level components.
 Backup and restore procedures 243
Notes for restoring individual files from an Instant Recovery snapshot

6 Click Actions > Start Restore of Marked Files.

The only destination option is Restore everything to its original location.
7 For file systems, you can choose to skip file verification by placing a check in
the Skip verification and force rollback option.

Warning: Click Skip verification and force-rollback only if you are sure that
you want to replace all the files in the original location with the snapshot.
Rollback deletes all files that were created after the creation-date of the
snapshot that you restore.

If Skip verification and force rollback is not selected, NetBackup performs

checks on the file system.
See “Notes on rollback” on page 236.
If the checks do not pass, the rollback aborts and the progress log states that
rollback could not be performed because file verification failed.
The remainder of the procedure is identical to a normal restore as explained
in the NetBackup Backup, Archive, and Restore Getting Started Guide.
See “Notes on rollback” on page 236.
See “About Instant Recovery: point in time rollback” on page 236.

Notes for restoring individual files from an Instant

Recovery snapshot
The following items pertain to restoring individual files from an Instant Recovery
snapshot:
■ When you restore files from a snapshot that is made for an Instant Recovery
off-host alternate client backup:
NetBackup consults the exclude list on the alternate client even when it restores
files to the primary client. If the exclude list on the alternate client is different
from the exclude list on the primary client, any files that are listed in the exclude
list on the alternate client are not restored to the primary client.
For example, if the alternate client's exclude list has the entry *.jpg, and some
.jpg files were included in the primary client backup, the .jpg files can be selected
for the restore but are not in fact restored. To restore the files, you must change
the exclude list on the alternate client.
■ When you restore files from a snapshot that is made for an Instant Recovery
backup (local or off-host alternate client):
 Backup and restore procedures 244
About configurations for restore

If the exclude list is changed after the backup occurred, NetBackup honors the
latest version of the exclude list during the restore. Any of the files that are listed
in the current exclude list are not restored. Also, as noted in the previous item,
the exclude list on the alternate client takes precedence over the exclude list
on the primary client.
For example: If the current version of the exclude list has the entry *.jpg, and
some .jpg files were included in the backup, the .jpg files can be selected for
the restore but are not in fact restored. To restore the files, you must change
the exclude list on the primary (or alternate) client.

Note: For ordinary backups (not based on snapshots), any files that were
included in the exclude list are not backed up. For snapshot-based backups,
however, all files are included in the snapshot. The exclude list is consulted only
when a storage unit backup is created from the snapshot. If the snapshot is
retained after the backup (for the Instant Recovery feature) and the snapshot
is available at the time of the restore, NetBackup restores files from the snapshot.
Since all files are available in the snapshot (including those that would be
excluded from a storage unit backup), NetBackup incorrectly consults the current
exclude list on the client or alternate client. Any files in the exclude list are
skipped during the restore.

This issue will be addressed in a future release of NetBackup.

About configurations for restore

Snapshot Manager backups can be restored in several ways, depending on your
configuration.

About restoring over the LAN

Data can be restored from the storage device to the media server and from the
media server over the LAN to the client. This kind of restore is also used for ordinary
(non-Snapshot Manager) backups.
 Backup and restore procedures 245
About configurations for restore

Figure 11-1 Restore over LAN

LAN / WAN

media
client server
SCSI
client
disks SCSI

storage

The following table describes the phases that are illustrated in the diagram.

Phase Action

Phase 1 Media server reads data from local storage.

Phase 2 Media server sends the data to the client over the LAN.

Phase 3 Client restores the data to disk (disk can be locally attached or on SAN).

About restoring over the SAN to a host acting as both client server
and media server
This type of restore requires the FORCE_RESTORE_MEDIA_SERVER option in
the server’s bp.conf file.
See the NetBackup Administrator’s Guide, Volume I, for details on the
FORCE_RESTORE_MEDIA_SERVER option.
 Backup and restore procedures 246
About configurations for restore

Figure 11-2 Restore over the SAN

LAN / WAN

client/media media
server server

SAN

client disks storage

on SAN

The following table describes the phases that are illustrated in the diagram.

Phase Action

Phase 1 Client/media server reads data from tape over the SAN.

Phase 2 Client restores the data to disk (disk can be locally attached or on SAN).

(Requires use of FORCE_RESTORE_MEDIA_SERVER option in

bp.conf file.)

About restoring directly from a snapshot

If the Keep snapshot after backup option was turned on for the backup, the data
can be restored from a mirror disk by restoring individual files from the snapshot,
or by restoring the entire snapshot. This type of restore must be done from the
command prompt. You can use a copy command such as UNIX cp.
Note the following:
■ This type of restore cannot be done from the NetBackup Administration Console.
■ This type of restore is not the Instant Recovery feature.
See “About restoring from a disk snapshot” on page 247.
 Backup and restore procedures 247
About restoring from a disk snapshot

About restoring from a disk snapshot

If the Retain snapshot after backup parameter is set to Yes, the snapshot is
retained on the mirror disk after the backup completes. From the command line,
you can restore individual files or the entire snapshot directly from the disk, rather
than restoring from tape.

Note: Unless the backup was made with the Instant Recovery feature, you cannot
restore from a snapshot by means of the Backup, Archive, and Restore interface.
You must perform the restore manually at the command line.

About restoring on UNIX

The following procedures are for UNIX.

Restoring individual files on UNIX

To restore individual files, locate and mount the snapshot file system. Copy files
from that file system using system commands, such as cp and ftp, as follows.
 Backup and restore procedures 248
About restoring from a disk snapshot

To restore individual files on UNIX

1 To list the identifiers of current snapshots, use the bpfis command with the
query option:

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/bpfis query

This returns the ID (FIS IDs) of all current snapshots. For example:

INF - BACKUP START 3629

INF - FIS IDs: 1036458302
INF - EXIT STATUS 0: the requested operation was successfully
completed

2 For each snapshot identifier, enter bpfis query again, specifying the snapshot
ID:

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/bpfis query -id 1036458302

This returns the path of the original file system (snapshot source) and the path
of the snapshot file system. For example:

INF - BACKUP START 3629

INF - Snapshot image host : ricopico
INF - Snapshot image owner: GENERIC
INF - Time created : Mon Oct 7 19:35:38 2002
INF - REMAP FILE BACKUP /mnt/ufscon USING

/tmp/_vrts_frzn_img_26808/mnt/ufscon

OPTIONS:ALT_PATH_PREFIX=/tmp/_vrts_frzn_img_26808,FITYPE=MIRROR,
MNTPOINT=/mnt/ufscon,FSTYPE=ufs
INF - EXIT STATUS 0: the requested operation was successfully
completed

In this example, the primary file system is /mnt/ufscon and the snapshot file
system is /tmp/_vrts_frzn_img_26808/mnt/ufscon.
3 Copy the files from the mounted snapshot file system to the original file system.

Restoring the entire snapshot on UNIX

You can recover data from the disk snapshot in several ways, depending on your
hardware configuration and the snapshot method that the policy used.
 Backup and restore procedures 249
About restoring from a disk snapshot

To restore the entire snapshot if the snapshot method was FlashSnap

1 Unmount the snapshot source (original file system) and the snapshot file system
on the alternate client:

umount original_file_system
umount snapshot_image_file_system

To locate the file systems:

See “Restoring individual files on UNIX” on page 247.
2 Deport the snapshot on the alternate-client:
■ Find the VxVM disk group:

vxdg list

The format of the disk group name is as follows:

SPLIT-primaryhost_diskgroup

If vxdg list does not show the disk group, the group might have been
deported. You can discover all the disk groups, including deported ones,
by entering:

vxdisk -o alldgs list

The disk groups in parentheses are not imported on the local system.
■ Deport the VxVM disk group:

vxdg deport SPLIT-primaryhost_diskgroup

3 Import and join the VxVM disk group on the primary (original) client:

vxdg import SPLIT-primaryhost_diskgroup

vxrecover -g SPLIT-primaryhost_diskgroup -m
vxdg join SPLIT-primaryhost_diskgroup diskgroup

4 Start the volume and snap back the snapshot volume as follows, using the -o
resyncfromreplica option:

vxvol -g SPLIT-primaryhost_diskgroup start SNAP_diskgroup_volume

vxassist -g SPLIT-primaryhost_diskgroup -o resyncfromreplica
snapback SNAP_diskgroup_volume
 Backup and restore procedures 250
About restoring from a disk snapshot

To restore the entire secondary disk if the snapshot was made on an EMC,
Hitachi, or HP disk array
WITH CAUTION, you can use hardware-level restore to restore the entire
mirror or secondary disk to the primary disk.
If the disk is shared by more than one file system or VxVM volume, there may
be unintended results. Read the following:

Warning: Hardware-level disk-restore (such as with the symmir -restore

command) can cause data loss if more than one file system or more than one
VxVM volume shares the primary disk. The hardware-level restore overwrites
the entire primary disk with the contents of the mirror disk.

This overwrite can be a problem if you attempt to restore a snapshot of one of

the file systems or one of the VxVM volumes that share the same disk. The
other file systems or volumes sharing the disk may have older data that you
do not want to write back to the primary. When the hardware-level disk-restore
takes place, the older data replaces the newer data on the primary disk.

About restoring on Windows

The following procedures are for Windows.

Restoring individual files on Windows

Use the following procedure to restore individual files on Windows.
 Backup and restore procedures 251
About restoring from a disk snapshot

To restore individual files on Windows

1 To list the identifiers of current snapshots, use the bpfis command with the
query option:

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/bpfis query

This returns the ID (FIS IDs) of all current snapshots. For example:

INF - BACKUP START 3629

INF - FIS IDs: 1036458302
INF - EXIT STATUS 0: the requested operation was successfully
completed

2 For each snapshot identifier, enter bpfis query again, specifying the snapshot
ID:

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/bpfis query -id 1036458302

This returns the path or the original file system (snapshot source) and the GUID
(Global Universal Identifier) representing the snapshot volume. For example:

INF - BACKUP START 2708

INF - Snapshot method: FlashSnap
INF - Snapshot image host : tire
INF - Snapshot image owner : NBU
INF - Time created : Sat Oct 25 15:26:04 2003

INF - REMAP FILE BACKUP H:\ USING

\\?\Volume{54aa666f-0547-11d8-b023-00065bde58d1}\
OPTIONS:ALT_PATH_PREFIX=C:\Program Files\Veritas\NetBackup\
Temp\_vrts_frzn_img_2408,FITYPE=MIRROR,MNTPOINT=H:\,FSTYPE=NTFS
INF - EXIT STATUS 0: the requested operation was successfully
completed

In this example the snapshot file system is H:\ and the GUID is
\\?\Volume{54aa666f-0547-11d8-b023-00065bde58d1}\.
3 To restore individual files from the snapshot volume:
■ Mount the GUID to an empty NTFS directory:

mountvol C:\Temp\Mount
\\?\Volume{54aa666f-0547-11d8-b023-00065bde58d1}\

■ Copy the file to be restored from the temporary snapshot mount point (in
this example, C:\Temp\Mount)to the primary volume.
 Backup and restore procedures 252
About restoring from a disk snapshot

Restoring the entire snapshot on Windows

The following procedure is applicable if the snapshot method was FlashSnap.
To restore the entire snapshot on Windows
1 Deport the snapshot on the alternate-client:
■ Find the VxVM disk group:

vxdg list

The format of the disk group name is as follows:

SPLIT-primaryhost_diskgroup

■ Deport the VxVM disk group:

vxdg -g split_diskgroup deport

2 Import and join the VxVM disk group on the primary (original) client:

vxassist rescan
vxdg -g split_diskgroup import
vxdg -g split_diskgroup -n diskgroup join

3 Snap back the snapshot volume, using the -o resyncfromreplica option:

vxassist -o resyncfromreplica snapback \Device\HarddiskDmVolumes\diskgroup\snap_volume

 Chapter 12
Snapshot management
This chapter includes the following topics:

■ About NetBackup and Snapshot Manager integration for snapshot management

■ Troubleshooting Snapshot Manager and NetBackup integration issues

About NetBackup and Snapshot Manager

integration for snapshot management
NetBackup interfaces with snapshot management servers to manage arrays for
discovery of devices and snapshot lifecycle management. Snapshot management
severs are installed separately apart from NetBackup and they have plugins for
various storage arrays. Veritas Snapshot Manager (TM) is an example of a snapshot
management server for NetBackup. Using the NetBackup Snapshot management
framework, you can use Snapshot Manager for taking snapshots of your images.
You can protect all the on-premises storage arrays that are supported by Snapshot
Manager.
The following table describes the underlying tasks.

Table 12-1 Tasks for snapshot management

Task Description

Configure the Snapshot Manager server in You can configure the Snapshot Manager
NetBackup. server as a snapshot management server.
To configure the Snapshot Manager server
in NetBackup you need to add the credentials
of the Snapshot Manager server.

See NetBackup Administrator's Guide,

Volume I
 Snapshot management 254
About NetBackup and Snapshot Manager integration for snapshot management

Table 12-1 Tasks for snapshot management (continued)

Task Description

Configure the Snapshot Manager plug-ins in The Snapshot Manager plug-ins that are
NetBackup. installed on the Snapshot Manager server
must be registered and configured in
NetBackup with the associated Snapshot
Manager server.

See NetBackup Administrator's Guide,

Volume I

Configure a Standard policy to use VSO See “Configuring a Snapshot Manager policy”
snapshot method. on page 50.

See “Selecting the snapshot method”

on page 58.

Backup and restore procedures See “About performing a backup” on page 229.

See “About performing a restore” on page 230.

Considerations
Consider the following when integrating NetBackup with Snapshot Manager:
■ Deletion of Snapshot Manager host entry and its associated plug-ins is not
supported in NetBackup.
Using Snapshot Manager, if you delete plug-ins that are configured in NetBackup,
the images of snapshots that are taken using Snapshot Manager will be
unusable.
■ Back up from snapshot and index from snapshot is supported. Replication
operations are not supported.
■ For snapshot and index for snapshot, you can use any available storage unit.
■ Post integration, all the related operations must be performed from NetBackup.
Results of operations that are performed outside NetBackup, will not be visible
in NetBackup. Snapshot Manager has its own RBAC, where NetBackup is one
of the users and operations performed only through NetBackup will be visible
in NetBackup. For example, even though you can add Snapshot Manager plug-in
from Snapshot Manager, you must add the plug-in from NetBackup, or the
plug-in may not be visible in NetBackup.
■ HP-UX Native volume group Version 2.0 and later is not supported.
■ Raw device and raw partitions are not supported.
 Snapshot management 255
About NetBackup and Snapshot Manager integration for snapshot management

■ File system verification is not supported. You must skip the verification step and
perform a force rollback. In the Restore Marked Files dialog box, select the
Skip verification and force rollback check box.
■ Consider all the Snapshot Manager limitations.
Refer to the Veritas Snapshot Manager Installation and Upgrade Guide.
■ NetBackup integration is not supported with the Snapshot Manager freemium
version.
■ It is recommended not to reinstall the Snapshot Manager server but to upgrade
it. However, if you reinstall the Snapshot Manager server you need to reconfigure
the Snapshot Manager server and the associated Snapshot Manager plug-ins.
■ Perform the following tasks for RHEL:
In the recent RHEL version, there are changes in usage of partition delimiter.
Based on last character in the device path, OS decides if partition delimiter must
be added or not. To address the change, update the udev rule to add partition
delimiter 'p' on RHEL
■ Open the /lib/udev/rules.d/62-multipath.rules file.
■ Update the existing line:

RUN+="$env{MPATH_SBIN_PATH}/kpartx -an $tempnode", \

ENV{DM_MULTIPATH_NEED_KPARTX}=""

To

RUN+="$env{MPATH_SBIN_PATH}/kpartx -an -p p $tempnode", \

ENV{DM_MULTIPATH_NEED_KPARTX}=""

■ Restart the multipath service. Run the following command:

# service multipathd restart

■ For devices in LVM, if multiple paths are used, ensure that multipathing service
is enabled.
■ On SUSE Linux, ensure that the automount service is disabled.
■ Junction mount point on filler or array is not supported for snapshot operations
with VSO FIM snapshot method.
■ For client-side nested mount points, rollback of parent mount points is not
supported.
 Snapshot management 256
Troubleshooting Snapshot Manager and NetBackup integration issues

Troubleshooting Snapshot Manager and

NetBackup integration issues
Policy validation fails with error 130
Policy validation fails with error 130, due to one of following reasons:
■ Certificate mismatch on client.
Workaround
Remove the Snapshot Manager CA certificate from the following location and
validate the policy again.
install_location/var/global/cloudpoint

■ Cloud point server is not accessible.

Policy validation fails with error 223

This error is encountered if the following options are not configured:
■ In the Snapshot Client and Replication Director dialog box, select the Retain
snapshot for Instant Recovery or SLP management option.
■ In the Schedules tab, select Snapshots only option.

Policy validation fails with error 4201

Policy validation fails with error 4201, due to one of following reasons:
■ The source disk is not associated with configured Snapshot Manager server.
Workaround
Check if you have configured the Snapshot Manager plug-in associated with a
particular disk asset.
■ Snapshot Manager server takes additional time to discover.
Workaround
Wait for sometime so that all the devices from array are discovered.
■ Snapshot Manager server is not accessible from Primary or Client.
Or
Certificate mismatch on client.
Or
Snapshot Manager certificate has been expired.
Workaround
Refresh the Snapshot Manager certificates on client.
Certificate location: /usr/openv/var/global/cloudpoint/<CloudPoint server
name>.pem
 Snapshot management 257
Troubleshooting Snapshot Manager and NetBackup integration issues

■ HP3 par is loaded and there are multiple WS API operations are running.
Workaround
Try snapshot creation after sometime.

VSO policy validation fails with error Asset no_vso_device

not found
VSO policy validation fails with the following error:

CVSOPlugin::selectSnapshots : getAssetDetails failed with status:

[error], Error:[Asset no_vso_device not found]

Workaround
When you encounter this error, run the lsscsi command to verify if the device
selected in the backup selection is available on the client.
If the device is not listed, verify the connectivity issue between the array and host
or get in touch with your system administrator.

Backup fails with PFI rotation error 13

Backup fails with the following error:
PFI rotation error: 13
The errors occurs because the operation takes longer to complete due to network
connectivity, causing jobs to time out and fail.
Workaround
Increase the REQUEST_DELIVERY_TIMEOUT configuration option from the default
of 300 (5 minutes) to more than 3600 seconds (more than 60 minutes).
This option does not appear in the NetBackup Administration Console host
properties. See the NetBackup Commands Reference Guide for information about
using the bpgetconfig and the bpsetconfig commands to change the configuration
option in the bp.conf file (UNIX) or the registry (Windows).

For HP 3PAR devices, snapshot restore fails with error

2800
If there is any clone snapshot or physical copy associated with source device,
snapshot restore fails.
Workaround
Break the clone relationship or delete the clone snapshot.
 Chapter 13
Troubleshooting
This chapter includes the following topics:

■ About gathering information and checking logs

■ Logging directories for UNIX platforms

■ Logging folders for Windows platforms

■ Customer support contact information

■ Latest patches and updates

■ Snapshot provider information

■ Important notes on Snapshot Manager

■ Snapshot Manager installation problems

■ FlashBackup and status code 13

■ Single file restore from a FlashBackup Instant Recovery snapshot of a file

protected by Windows VSS writer fails

■ Identifying and removing a left-over snapshot

■ Removing a VxVM volume clone

■ Alternate client restore and backup from a snapshot fails

■ Restore from a snapshot fails with status 2800

■ Raw Partition restore fails with the message ‘FlashBackup-Windows policy

restore error’

■ Snapshot creation fails with error 156

■ Snapshot fails with error 20

 Troubleshooting 259
About gathering information and checking logs

■ Restore from a snapshot fails with status 133

■ Backup from snapshot fails with error 50

■ Backup from snapshot parent job fails with error 4213: Snapshot import failed

■ Snapshot job fails and the snapshot command does not recognize the volume
name

■ Snapshot creation fails with error 4220

■ Snapshot creation fails when the same volume is mounted on multiple mount
points of the same host

■ Snapshot-based backup and restore failure

■ Multiple snapshot jobs fail with code 156 or 1541.

■ FlashBackup policy fails, with multiple backup selections [Cache =]

■ Partial backup failure with 'Snapshot encountered error 156'

■ Backup of file system validation fails with error 223

■ Policy validation fails if the specified CIFS share path contains a forward slash

■ Policy validation fails with status code 223

■ An NDMP snapshot policy for wildcard backup fails with error 4201

■ Troubleshooting with bpfis log

■ Limitations of using HP-UX 11.31

■ While configuring a policy for snapshot operations, the NetBackup Administration

Console hangs

■ Accelerator enabled incremental backup of NetApp NAS volume

■ Snapshot method: Auto

About gathering information and checking logs

You can resolve many problems on your own by creating logging directories,
reproducing the problem, and checking the logs.
For an in-depth description of NetBackup logs, refer to the NetBackup
Troubleshooting Guide.
 Troubleshooting 260
Logging directories for UNIX platforms

For explanations of NetBackup job status codes, refer to the NetBackup Status
codes Reference Guide.

Logging directories for UNIX platforms

Snapshot Manager backup messages are written to the directories that are shown
in See Table 13-1 on page 260., if the directories exist.
Note the following:
■ To create detailed log information, place a VERBOSE entry in the bp.conf file
on the NetBackup primary and client. Or set the Global logging level to a high
value in the Logging dialog, under both Master Server Properties and Client
Properties.
■ These directories can eventually require a lot of disk space. Delete them when
you are finished troubleshooting and remove the VERBOSE option from the
bp.conf file. Or reset the Global logging level to a lower value.

■ Messages pertaining to NAS_Snapshot can be found in the ndmp unified log

(originator ID 151), in /usr/openv/logs.
■ The bpfis log directory contains the bpfis and ostfi (OST plug-in) logs.

UNIX logging directories for backup

During a backup, Snapshot Manager messages are logged to the following
directories. Create these directories using an access mode of 755 so NetBackup
can write to the logs.
You can use the /usr/openv/netbackup/logs/mklogdir script to create these
directories.

Table 13-1 UNIX logging directories for backup

Path of log directory Where to create the directory

/usr/openv/netbackup/logs/bpbrm NetBackup primary server if Instant Recovery

backup is set to snapshot only; otherwise, on
media server

/usr/openv/netbackup/logs/bptm NetBackup media server

/usr/openv/netbackup/logs/bpbkar NetBackup client or alternate client

/usr/openv/netbackup/logs/bpfis NetBackup client or alternate client

/usr/openv/netbackup/logs/bppfi NetBackup client or alternate client

 Troubleshooting 261
Logging folders for Windows platforms

UNIX logging directories for restore

During a restore, Snapshot Manager messages are logged to the following
directories on the primary server. Create these directories using an access mode
of 755.

Table 13-2 UNIX logging directories for restore

Path of log directory Where to create the directory

/usr/openv/netbackup/logs/bprestore NetBackup primary server

/usr/openv/netbackup/logs/bprd NetBackup primary server

/usr/openv/netbackup/logs/bpbrm NetBackup primary server if Instant Recovery

backup is set to snapshot only; otherwise, on
media server

/usr/openv/netbackup/logs/bptm NetBackup media server

snapctl driver messages

Messages from the snapctl driver are logged in the client’s /var/adm/messages
file along with other kernel messages.

Logging folders for Windows platforms

During a backup, Snapshot Manager messages are written to the folders that are
listed in See Table 13-3 on page 262. if the folders exist. You can use the following
command to create these folders:

install_path\NetBackup\logs\mklogdir.bat

The default path for the logs is the following:

C:\Program Files\Veritas\NetBackup\logs

Since a different path can be set during installation, the paths that are listed in this
topic are install_path\NetBackup\logs.

Note: To create detailed logs, set the Global logging level to a high value, in the
Logging dialog, under both Master Server Properties and Client Properties.
 Troubleshooting 262
Logging folders for Windows platforms

The log folders can eventually require a lot of disk space. Delete them when you
are finished troubleshooting and set the logging level on primary and client to a
lower value.

Windows logging folders for backup

During a backup, Snapshot Manager messages are logged to the following folders.
Messages pertaining to NAS_Snapshot can be found in the ndmp unified log
(originator ID 151), in install_path\NetBackup\logs.

Table 13-3 Windows logging folders for backup

Path of log directory Where folder is created

install_path\NetBackup\logs\bpbrm NetBackup primary server if Instant Recovery

backup is set to snapshot only; otherwise, on
media server

install_path\NetBackup\logs\bptm NetBackup media server

install_path\NetBackup\logs\bppfi NetBackup client or alternate client

install_path\NetBackup\logs\bpbkar NetBackup client or alternate client

install_path\NetBackup\logs\bpfis NetBackup client or alternate client

Windows logging folders for restore

During a restore, Snapshot Manager messages are logged to the following folders
on the primary server.

Table 13-4 Windows logging folders for restore

Path of log directory Where folder is created

install_path\NetBackup\logs\bprestore NetBackup primary server

install_path\NetBackup\logs\bprd NetBackup primary server

install_path\NetBackup\logs\bpbrm NetBackup primary server if Instant Recovery

backup is set to snapshot only; otherwise, on
media server

install_path\NetBackup\logs\bptm NetBackup media server

 Troubleshooting 263
Logging folders for Windows platforms

Configuring VxMS logging

The following procedures describe how to configure VxMS logging for NetBackup.
Except as noted in this topic, you can also use the Logging Assistant (in the
NetBackup Administration Console) to configure VxMS logging.

VxMS logging on a NetBackup UNIX or Linux client

To configure VxMS logging on a NetBackup UNIX or Linux client
1 Create the VxMS log directory:
/usr/openv/netbackup/logs/vxms

Note: For logging to occur, the VxMS directory must exist.

Note: If you have run the NetBackup mklogdir command, the VxMS log
directory already exists.

2 Add the following to the /usr/openv/netbackup/bp.conf file:

VXMS_VERBOSE=<numeric value of 0 or greater>

See Table 13-5 for the available logging levels.

3 To change the log location, enter the following in the bp.conf file:
vxmslogdir=path to new log location

Note: If the VxMS log location is changed, the Logging Assistant does not
collect the logs.
 Troubleshooting 264
Logging folders for Windows platforms

VxMS logging on a NetBackup Windows client

To configure VxMS logging on a NetBackup Windows client
1 Create the VxMS log directory:
install_path\NetBackup\logs\vxms

Note: For logging to occur, the VxMS folder must exist.

Note: If you have run the NetBackup mklogdir.bat command, the VxMS log
directory already exists.

2 In the Windows registry, create the DWORD registry entry VXMS_VERBOSE in

the following location:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE > SOFTWARE > Veritas > NetBackup >
CurrentVersion > Config
3 To configure the logging level, set the numeric value of VXMS_VERBOSE to 0 or
greater. Larger numbers result in more verbose logs.
See Table 13-5 for the available logging levels.
4 To change the log location:
■ Open regedit and go to the following location:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE > SOFTWARE > Veritas > NetBackup >
CurrentVersion
■ Create the registry entry vxmslogdir with a string value (REG_SZ). For the
string value, specify the full path to an existing folder.

Note: You can use NTFS compression on VxMS log folders to compress the
log size. The new logs are written in compressed form only.

Note: If the VxMS log location is changed, the Logging Assistant does not
collect the logs.

VxMS logging levels

Table 13-5 lists the VxMS logging levels.

Note: Logging levels higher than 5 cannot be set in the Logging Assistant.
 Troubleshooting 265
Customer support contact information

Note: Logging levels higher than 5 should be used in very unusual cases only. At
that level, the log files and metadata dumps may place significant demands on disk
space and host performance.

Table 13-5 VxMS logging levels

Level Description

0 No logging.

1 Error logging.

2 Level 1 + warning messages.

3 Level 2 + informative messages.

4 Same as level 3.

5 Highly verbose (includes level 1) + auxiliary evidence files (.mmf, .dump, VDDK
logs, .xml, .rvpmem).

You can set the logging level for the VDDK messages.

6 VIX (VMware virtual machine metadata) dumps only.

7 VHD (Hyper-V virtual machine metadata) dumps only.

>7 Full verbose + level 5 + level 6 + level 7.

Customer support contact information

Before calling customer support, gather as much log information as possible. Be
sure to have the following information ready:
■ NetBackup version
■ Operating system version of the NetBackup primary and media server and
NetBackup Snapshot Manager client
■ Note whether or not the action that failed had ever worked and whether the
problem is repeatable
■ Log information
 Troubleshooting 266
Latest patches and updates

Latest patches and updates

For other Veritas products such as the Veritas File System and Volume Manager,
or Storage Foundation, install the latest patches and updates for those products.
Installing the latest software can fix a variety of issues.
For example:
If you receive status code 156 on a FlashSnap alternate client backup, and the
client data is configured in Storage Foundations for Windows 4.1, note: the volume
to be backed up may not appear on the alternate client. This situation can occur
even though the disk group has been split on the primary client and the disk was
deported to the alternate client. Installing the latest Storage Foundation patches
has been known to correct this problem.

Snapshot provider information

Although NetBackup communicates with the snapshot provider on its own (you do
not configure providers), the NetBackup logs occasionally refer to providers by
name. A knowledge of which provider was used can help in understanding the
snapshot process and in correcting problems.

Important notes on Snapshot Manager

Note the following:
■ If backup or restore jobs are running slowly, verify that the network interface
cards (NIC) are set to full duplex. Half duplex often causes poor performance.
For assistance to view and reset duplex mode for a particular host or device,
consult the manufacturer’s documentation. You may be able to use the ifconfig
(or ipconfig) command to view and reset duplex mode, as explained in the
NetBackup Troubleshooting Guide.
■ Inconsistency in the count of estimated files in the snapshot job and the restore
job details. In the snapshot job details the estimated files field displays a ' '
(blank) whereas in the restore job details the estimated files field displays the
value as '1'.
■ The disk containing the client’s data must be a SCSI or Fibre Channel device
if you use NetBackup Media Server or Third-Party Copy Device.
■ The disk containing the client’s data must be visible to both the client and the
media server, for NetBackup Media Server or Third-Party Copy Device. The
disk can be connected through SCSI or Fibre Channel.
 Troubleshooting 267
Important notes on Snapshot Manager

■ For NetBackup Media Server or Third-Party Copy Device, a disk must support
serialization or support SCSI Inquiry Page Code 83.
■ For Third-Party Copy Device or NetBackup Media Server, a particular storage
unit or group of storage units must be specified for the policy. Do not choose
Any_available. Configuration instructions are available:
See “Configuring a Snapshot Manager policy” on page 50.
■ The storage_unit_name portion of a mover.conf.storage_unit_name file name
must exactly match the storage unit name (such as nut-4mm-robot-tl4-0) that
you have defined for the policy.
Help is available for creating a mover.conf.storage_unit_name file. See the
NetBackup Snapshot Client Configuration document:
http://www.veritas.com/docs/000081320
Similarly, the policy_name portion of a mover.conf.policy_name file name
must match the name of the policy that the third-party copy device is associated
with.
■ For the legacy disk array methods (TimeFinder, ShadowImage, or
BusinessCopy), the client data must reside in a device group. The data must
be on the primary disk and be synchronized with a mirror disk. Assistance from
the disk array vendor may also be required.
For information on disk configuration requirements for the legacy array methods,
see the NetBackup Snapshot Client Configuration document:
http://www.veritas.com/docs/000081320
■ If the Keep snapshot after backup option is changed from yes to no, the last
snapshot that is created for that policy must be deleted manually before the
backup is rerun. Use the bpfis command to delete the snapshot. Refer to the
man page for bpfis.
■ During a third-party copy device backup, if tape performance is slow, increase
the buffer size. To do so, create one of the following files on the media server:

/usr/openv/netbackup/db/config/SIZE_DATA_BUFFERS_TPC.policy_name
/usr/openv/netbackup/db/config/SIZE_DATA_BUFFERS_TPC.storage_unit_name
/usr/openv/netbackup/db/config/SIZE_DATA_BUFFERS_TPC

For third-party copy backup, the size of the data buffer is 65536 bytes (64K),
by default. To increase it, put a larger integer in the SIZE_DATA_BUFFERS_TPC
file. For a buffer size of 96K, put 98304 in the file. If not an exact multiple of
1024, the value that is read from the file is rounded up to a multiple of 1024.
The file name with no extension (SIZE_DATA_BUFFERS_TPC) applies as a
default to all third-party copy backups, if neither of the other file-name types
exists. A SIZE_DATA_BUFFERS_TPC file with the .policy_name extension
applies to backups that the named policy runs. The .storage_unit_name extension
 Troubleshooting 268
Snapshot Manager installation problems

applies to backups that use the named storage unit. If more than one of these
files applies to a given backup, the buffers value is selected in this order:
SIZE_DATA_BUFFERS_TPC.policy_name
SIZE_DATA_BUFFERS_TPC.storage_unit_name
SIZE_DATA_BUFFERS_TPC
As soon as one of these files is located, its value is used. A .policy_name file
that matches the name of the executed policy overrides the value in both the
.storage_unit_name file and the file with no extension. The .storage_unit_name
file overrides the value in the file with no extension.
You can set the maximum buffer size that a particular third-party copy device
can support.
A third-party copy device is not used if it cannot handle the buffer size that is
set for the backup.
■ Replication Director is a feature that makes use of an OpenStorage application
to manage snapshot replication. The snapshots are stored on the storage
systems of partnering companies.

Note: Replication Director uses the NetApp DataFabric Manager server for data
movement and not the media server as in most cases.

Snapshot Manager installation problems

If you receive the following message during installation:

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/version not found.

Add-On Product Installation Aborted.

you have tried to install the Snapshot Manager software before you install the base
NetBackup software.

FlashBackup and status code 13

Status 13 can result from any of the following:

The FlashBackup cache partition may have run out of space

In that case, the cache partition may not be large enough for the backup
requirements.
If the cache partition is full, messages such as the following appear in the system
log:
 Troubleshooting 269
Single file restore from a FlashBackup Instant Recovery snapshot of a file protected by Windows VSS writer
fails

WARNING: sn_alloccache: cache /dev/vx/rdsk/flash1dg/f full - all

snaps using this cache are now unusable
WARNING: sn_failsnap: snapshot id 5 failed error 28

Specify a larger cache partition, or designate additional cache partitions in the

Backup Selections list.
See “Requirements for the cache partition” on page 95.

Removing stale snapshots (Solaris)

On Solaris, if your cache partition runs out of space, stale snapshots may be taking
up space on the cache partition. Stale snapshots are those that FlashBackup did
not automatically delete.
To remove stale snapshots (Solaris)
1 Determine if there are stale snapshots on your Solaris client by executing the
following:

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/driver/snaplist

2 For each snapshot that is listed, run the following to make sure a bpbkar
process is associated with it:

ps -eaf |grep ident

where ident is the snapshot process id displayed by the snaplist command.

3 Remove snapshots that do not have an associated bpbkar process by entering
the following:

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/driver/snapoff snapn

where snapn is the snapshot id displayed by the snaplist command.

Single file restore from a FlashBackup Instant

Recovery snapshot of a file protected by Windows
VSS writer fails
When performing a single file recovery from a FlashBackup Instant Recovery
snapshot of a file that is protected by Windows VSS writer, the restore completes
successfully however the file is not restored.
When a file is protected by a VSS writer, it should be backed up and restored with
VSS writer involvement. If the VSS snapshot that is taken for FlashBackup does
 Troubleshooting 270
Identifying and removing a left-over snapshot

not have VSS writer involvement, the data in the file may not be consistent. This
file should not be used for restore from either tape or snapshot.
A proper way to protect this file is to have a file backup with Shadow Copy
Component file list directive specified. In this case, a VSS snapshot with VSS writer
is taken.

Identifying and removing a left-over snapshot

NetBackup ordinarily removes snapshots after the Snapshot Manager backup
completes, unless the Keep snapshot after backup parameter was set to Yes.
However, as a result of some system failures, such as a system crash or abnormal
backup termination, the snapshot may not be removed.
To identify and remove a left-over snapshot
1 Use the bpfis command with the query option to list the current snapshots.
Enter the following on the client or alternate client, depending on the type of
backup:

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/bpfis query

This command returns the IDs (FIS IDs) of all current snapshots. For example:

INF - BACKUP START 3629

INF - FIS IDs: 1036458302
INF - EXIT STATUS 0: the requested operation was successfully
completed

In this example, the snapshot ID is 1036458302.

2 If the bpfis output shows the ID of the snapshot, delete it as follows:

bpfis delete -id snapshot_id

If bpfis removed the snapshot, you can skip the rest of this procedure.
 Troubleshooting 271
Identifying and removing a left-over snapshot

3 Solaris, HP, AIX, Linux: if bpfis could not remove the snapshot, enter the
following (on the client or alternate client) when no backups are running:

df -k

This command displays all mounted file systems, including any snapshots of
a mounted file system.
If a snapshot backup is currently running, the snapshot should not be deleted.
NetBackup deletes it when the backup completes.
Here are two snapshots from a df -k listing:

/dev/dsk/c1t3d2s4 1048800 73076 914742 8% /tmp/_vrts_frzn_img__wil_vxfs_1299000

/dev/vx/dsk/clone_qes_clone/ufs 38383 21678 12867 63% /tmp/_vrts_frzn_img
__mix_ufs_1299000

The snapshot appears in the following form:

/tmp/_vrts_frzn_img__filesystemname_pid

4 Solaris, HP, AIX, Linux: unmount the unneeded snapshot file systems (on the
client or alternate client, depending on the type of backup).
The next step depends on the type of snapshot.
5 For nbu_snap (Solaris only):
■ Enter the following to display leftover snaps:

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/driver/snaplist

■ To remove a leftover snap, enter

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/driver/snapoff snap1 ...snapn

More information is available on snaplist and snapoff.

See “About managing nbu_snap” on page 288.

6 For VxVM (Solaris, HP, AIX, Linux) and VVR (Solaris and HP):
Do the following on the client for VxVM, and on the alternate client for VVR:
■ Enter the following to display unsynchronized mirror disks:

vxprint -g diskgroup

■ Enter the following to resynchronize the mirror disks:

vxassist -g diskgroup -v volume snapback

 Troubleshooting 272
Identifying and removing a left-over snapshot

7 For VxVM (Windows):

■ Enter the following to display unsynchronized mirror disks:

vxdg -g diskgroup dginfo

■ Enter the following to resynchronize the mirror disks:

vxassist snapback \Device\HarddiskDmVolumes\diskgroup\snap_volume

8 For VxFS_Checkpoint (Solaris, HP, AIX, Linux):

■ Enter the following VxFS command to display the name of the checkpoint:

/usr/lib/fs/vxfs/fsckptadm list /file_system

Note: file_system is the mount point of the primary file system that was
backed up, NOT the snapshot file system that was unmounted in a previous
step.

For example, if the snapshot file system that was unmounted is the following:

/tmp/_vrts_frzn_img__vm2_1765

the original file system, which should be specified on the fsckptadm list
command, is the following:

/vm2

Example entry:

/usr/lib/fs/vxfs/fsckptadm list /vm2

Output:

/vm2
NBU+2004.04.02.10h53m22s:
ctime = Fri Apr 02 10:53:23 2004
mtime = Fri Apr 02 10:53:23 2004
flags = removable

In this example, the name of the checkpoint is NBU+2004.04.02.10h53m22s.

■ Remove the checkpoint by entering the following:

/usr/lib/fs/vxfs/fsckptadm remove name_of_checkpoint /file_system

For example:
 Troubleshooting 273
Identifying and removing a left-over snapshot

/usr/lib/fs/vxfs/fsckptadm remove NBU+2004.04.02.10h53m22s /vm2

■ If the checkpoint cannot be removed, unmount it (umount) and retry the

following:

/usr/lib/fs/vxfs/fsckptadm remove name_of_checkpoint /file_system

■ For more detail on removing VxFS clones, refer to the recommended actions
for NetBackup status code 156 in the NetBackup Troubleshooting Guide.

9 For TimeFinder, ShadowImage, BusinessCopy (Solaris or HP only):

Do the following on the client or alternate client, depending on the type of
backup:
■ To discover and remove any VxVM clones:
See “Removing a VxVM volume clone” on page 275.
■ Enter the following to resynchronize the mirror disks:
For EMC arrays (TimeFinder):

symmir -g device_group establish LdevName

where LdevName is the logical device name of the standard device. For
Hitachi and HP arrays (ShadowImage, BusinessCopy):

pairresync -g groupname -d dev_name

For more information about EMC, Hitachi, and HP arrays and

resynchronizing disks, see the NetBackup Snapshot Client Configuration
document:
http://www.veritas.com/docs/000081320

10 For VxFS_Snapshot (Solaris or HP only):

Using the mounted file system from a previous step, unmount the snapshot as
follows:

umount -F vxfs /tmp/_vrts_frzn_img__filesystemname_pid

11 For FlashSnap (Solaris, HP, AIX, Linux):

Do the following on the client or alternate client, depending on the type of
backup:
■ Find the VxVM disk group:

vxdg list
 Troubleshooting 274
Identifying and removing a left-over snapshot

■ The format of the disk group name is as follows:

SPLIT-primaryhost_diskgroup

If vxdg list does not show the disk group, the group might have been
deported. You can discover all the disk groups, including deported ones,
by entering:

vxdisk -o alldgs list

The disk groups in parentheses are not imported on the local system.
■ Deport the VxVM disk group:

vxdg deport SPLIT-primaryhost_diskgroup

■ On the primary (original) client, import and join the VxVM disk group:

vxdg import SPLIT-primaryhost_diskgroup

vxrecover -g SPLIT-primaryhost_diskgroup -m
vxdg join SPLIT-primaryhost_diskgroup diskgroup

■ On the primary (original) client, start the volume and snap back the snapshot
volume:

vxvol -g SPLIT-primaryhost_diskgroup start SNAP-diskgroup_volume

vxassist snapback SNAP-diskgroup_volume

Example:
In this example, chime is the primary client and rico is the alternate
client.1hddg is the name of the original disk group on chime.
chime_lhddg is the split group that was imported on rico and must be
rejoined to the original group on the primary chime.
On alternate client rico, enter:

vxdg deport chime_lhddg

On primary client chime, enter:

vxdg import chime_lhddg

vxrecover -g chime_lhddg -m
vxdg join chime_lhddg lhddg
vxvol start SNAP-lhddg-vol01
vxassist snapback SNAP-lhddg-vol01

12 For FlashSnap (Windows):

 Troubleshooting 275
Removing a VxVM volume clone

■ Find the VxVM disk group:

vxdg list

■ The format of the disk group name is as follows:

SPLIT-primaryhost_diskgroup

■ Deport the VxVM disk group:

vxdg -g split_diskgroup deport

■ On the primary (original) client, import and join the VxVM disk group:

vxassist rescan
vxdg -g split_diskgroup import
vxdg -g split_diskgroup -n diskgroup join

■ On the primary (original) client, snap back the snapshot volume:

vxassist snapback \Device\HarddiskDmVolumes\diskgroup\snap_volume

Removing a VxVM volume clone

A VxVM volume clone is a form of snapshot that might need manual deletion. For
a description of disk clones, see the NetBackup Snapshot Client Configuration
document:
http://www.veritas.com/docs/000081320
Major system interruptions, such as a system crash or unexpected restart, can
prevent NetBackup from removing the clone. If the clone is not removed, subsequent
backups of the client’s data fail. Examine the /usr/openv/netbackup/logs/bpfis
log for text such as the following:

19:13:07.686 [14981] <2> onlfi_vfms_logf: INF - do_cmd:

Command failed with status=20:
/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/bpdgclone -g wil_test -n vol01 -f /var/tmp/HDSTFCAAs7aOqD
</dev/null >/var/tmp/VfMSAAAq7aOqD 2>/var/tmp/VfMSBAAr7aOqD
19:13:07.687 [14981] <2> onlfi_vfms_logf: INF -
--- Dumping file /var/tmp/VfMSAAAq7aOqD (stdout):
19:13:07.687 [14981] <2> onlfi_vfms_logf: INF -
--- End of file /var/tmp/VfMSAAAq7aOqD
19:13:07.687 [14981] <2> onlfi_vfms_logf: INF -
 Troubleshooting 276
Removing a VxVM volume clone

--- Dumping file /var/tmp/VfMSBAAr7aOqD (stderr):

19:13:07.687 [14981] <2> onlfi_vfms_logf: INF - clone group and volume already exists
19:13:07.688 [14981] <2> onlfi_vfms_logf: INF - --- End of file /var/tmp/VfMSBAAr7aOqD

In this case, you must use the bpdgclone command with the -c option to remove
the clone. Then resynchronize the mirror disk with the primary disk.
The following commands should be run on the client or alternate client, depending
on the type of backup.
 Troubleshooting 277
Removing a VxVM volume clone

To remove a VxVM volume clone

1 When no backups are running, use the following VxVM command to list any
clones.

vxdg list

If a backup configured with an array-specific snapshot method is currently

running, a clone for that backup appears in the vxdg output. Do not delete the
clone; NetBackup deletes it when the backup completes.
Example vxdg output:

NAME STATE ID
rootdg enabled 983299491.1025.turnip
VolMgr enabled 995995264.8366.turnip
wil_test_clone enabled 1010532924.21462.turnip
wil_test enabled 983815798.1417.turnip

In this example, the name suffix indicates wil_test_clone was created for a
snapshot backup that was configured with an array-specific snapshot method.
If a backup failed with log entries similar to those in this example, the clone
must be manually deleted.
2 To remove the clone, enter the following:

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/bpdgclone -g disk_group -n volume -c clone

For the previous example, you would enter:

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/bpdgclone -g wil_test -n vol01 -c wil_test_clone

where wil_test is the name of the disk group, vol01 is the name of the VxVM
volume, and wil_test_clone is the name of the clone. Use the Volume
Manager vxprint command to display volume names and other volume
information.
For more information, refer to the bpdgclone man page.
For assistance with vxprint and other Volume Manager commands, refer to
the Veritas Volume Manager Administrator’s Guide.
 Troubleshooting 278
Alternate client restore and backup from a snapshot fails

3 To verify that the clone has been removed, re-enter vxdg list.
Sample output:

NAME STATE ID
rootdg enabled 983299491.1025.turnip
VolMgr enabled 995995264.8366.turnip
wil_test enabled 983815798.1417.turnip

The clone no longer appears in the list.

Alternate client restore and backup from a

snapshot fails
An alternate restore from a snapshot fails when the Veritas Volume Manager (VxVM)
version is not the same on both the client and the alternate client. The different
version of VxVM also causes a backup from a sanpshotoperation failure with error
4213.
To perform a successful alternate client restore and a Backup from a Snapshot
operation, confirm that the VxVM version is the same on the client and the alternate
client.
Upgrade the NetBackup clients to the same version of VxVM.

Restore from a snapshot fails with status 2800

Restore from a snapshot fails with status code 2800 and displays the ‘Standard
policy restore error’ message. The progress log shows “no files matched in the
given data range”. The restore fails if you select a different path other than what
has been mentioned in the backup selection.
For example, suppose vol6 and vol7 are volumes mounted on /mnt/vol6 and
/mnt/vol7 respectively. These mount points are specified in the backup selection.
During a restore if you select only /mnt, which is the parent directory of the path
mentioned for backup selection, the restore fails with status code 2800.
For a successful restore from the snapshot copy, you must select the original path
mentioned in the Backup Selections tab, that is /mnt/vol6 and /mnt/vol7 or the
sub-directory or file.
 Troubleshooting 279
Raw Partition restore fails with the message ‘FlashBackup-Windows policy restore error’

Raw Partition restore fails with the message

‘FlashBackup-Windows policy restore error’
When a raw partition is set for a restore from a snapshot copy, the restore job fails
with the error - FlashBackup-Windows policy restore error.
Only a single file restore from a snapshot copy is supported. A raw partition restore
from a snapshot copy for a FlashBackup-Windows policy is not supported.
When you need to restore a raw partition, use the storage unit copy (2nd copy) of
a snapshot. You must set the storage unit copy as the primary copy.

Snapshot creation fails with error 156

Snapshot creation fails when multiple volumes are mounted to the same mount
point. Consider a scenario where /vol/gvol1 and /vol/gvol2 are mounted on
/mnt. Here the volumes gvol1 and gvol2 are both mounted on the same mount
point /mnt. When a backup policy is run to take snapshot backups, the snapshot
creation fails with error 156 as both the volumes are mounted on the same mount
point.
The reason for snapshot creation failure in the above case is that there would be
multiple entries in OS mount table for the same mount point, which is an unsupported
configuration in NetBackup.
Veritas recommends that you mount each volume on separate mount points.
Snapshot creation can fail due to multiple reasons. The reason mentioned above
is just one of them.

Snapshot fails with error 20

Snapshot creation fails when a mount point used in the backup selection contains
a symbolic link. The reason for snapshot failure is that NetBackup does not support
a symbolic link as a mount point in the backup selection for a policy.
For example, consider two directory structures /dir1/dir2 and /dir3/dir4 and
ln -s /dir1/dir2 /dir3/dir4 is the symbolic link.

If the path /dir1/dir2/dir4 is used as mount point in backup selection, policy

validation skips such mount point and succeeds. Further if user runs manual backup
for a policy, Snapshot fails with error 20.
 Troubleshooting 280
Restore from a snapshot fails with status 133

Restore from a snapshot fails with status 133

Restore from snapshot fails with status code 133 and displays the Invalid request
message.
The restore fails, if you select a path other than the path mentioned in the backup
selection.
For example, say the backup selection contains /ifs/vol1/parent/dir1. During
a restore if you select only /ifs/vol1/parent, which is the parent directory of the
path mentioned for backup selection, the restore fails with status code 133.
For a successful restore from the snapshot copy, you must select the original path
mentioned in the Backup Selections tab, that is /ifs/vol1/parent/dir1 or the
sub-directory or file inside the backup selection.

Backup from snapshot fails with error 50

This error occurs when the NetBackup Client and NetBackup Legacy Network
services are not restarted properly after configuration for the domain user.
If you are using primary or media as backup host then follow these steps to
troubleshoot:
1 Stop all NetBackup services using the bpdown.exe.
2 Logon to the NetBackup Client and NetBackup Legacy Network services as
the domain user.
But, do not start these services immediate after logon.
3 Start all the services together using the bpup.exe.

Backup from snapshot parent job fails with error

4213: Snapshot import failed
Job details shows an error like:
"Snapshot export failed. Failed to export share: data_lif is not online. Please check
data_lif status on vserver: VSERVER_1."
where, VSERVER_1 is the vserver that is offline.
For a NAS-Data-Protection policy, all the vservers are listed in the client's section
of the policy, irrespective of their state. So, you are able to include backup selection
from offline SVM, and policy validation succeeds. However, at the time of
 Troubleshooting 281
Snapshot job fails and the snapshot command does not recognize the volume name

backup-from-snapshot, export operation for those shares fails if the corresponding

vserver is offline.
To overcome this error, check the status of the vserver and whether that vserver
is reachable. Whenever client and vserver connection is established, SLP retry is
successful.

Snapshot job fails and the snapshot command

does not recognize the volume name
A snapshot job fails if the volume name exceeds 15 characters.
When you create and name a volume, a prefix or a suffix is added to the volume
name. If the volume name contains more than 15 characters, addition of prefix or
suffix may make the volume name exceed the limit of 27 characters. When you run
the vxassist snapshot, command, it does not recognize the lengthy snapshot
volume name and the snapshot job fails.
For example, if the primary volume name is PFItest123456789vol and the suffix
00043c8aaa is added to it, the volume name exceeds the limit. The command
vxassist snapshot does not recognize the name
PFItest123456789vol_00043c8aaa and the snapshot job fails.
Veritas recommended that you limit the primary volume names to up to 15 characters
to create the VxVM mirror snapshots.

Snapshot creation fails with error 4220

Snapshot creation fails due to a zoning issue. If the zoning is not properly done,
the target devices/LUNs do not respond well.
For a successful snashot creation, verify that zoning is properly done for the host
and the FC/scsi adapter is responding well.
For example, for AIX, you can verify zoning, using the following steps:
 Troubleshooting 282
Snapshot creation fails when the same volume is mounted on multiple mount points of the same host

To verify if the zoning is correct

1 Check the FC/scsci adapter on the host in /usr/sbin/lsdev -C -c adapter
-Sa -F 'name'

The Output should be:

fcs0
fcs1
2 Check FC SCSI I/O Controller in /usr/lib/methods/cfgefc -l fcs0.
The Output should be
Output:
3 Check time taken to rescan the devices with the FC SCSI I/O Controller in time
/usr/lib/methods/cfgefscsi -l fscsi0.

The Output should be:

<disk list>
real 2m2.123s the real wall clock time to execute the command

user 0m0.047s the CPU cycle time for the command in user mode.

sys 0m0.024s the CPU cycle time for the command in kernel mode.

Note: If the total time, is greater than 155 sec the snapshot will fail with error
4220.

Snapshot creation fails when the same volume is

mounted on multiple mount points of the same
host
Snapshot creation fails when the same volume is mounted on multiple mount points
of the same host.
For example, when the volume f3170-7-15:/vol/sample1 is mounted on the
mount points /sample1 on f3170-7-15:/vol/sample1
rsize=32768,wsize=32768,NFSv3,dev=4000033 and /test1 on
f3170-7-15:/vol/sample1 rsize=32768,wsize=32768,NFSv3,dev=4000034
snapshot creation fails with the following error.
mount: f3170-7-15:/vol/sample1 is not mounted on /test1
 Troubleshooting 283
Snapshot-based backup and restore failure

The backup of NFS share mounted by two different mount points for OST_FIM is
not supported in this release.

Snapshot-based backup and restore failure

Snapshot-based backups and restores fail if the backup selection that is listed in
the NetBackup policy contains any spaces either in the mount points or mount
devices. For example,
No spaces in mount points
Block device example: /dev/dg/vol is mounted on /mnt point
NFS example: Filer:/vol/datavol is mounted on /nfs mnt
No spaces in mount devices
Block device example: /dev/dg/vol data is mounted on /mntpoint
NFS example: Filer:/vol/data vol is mounted on /nfsmnt

Multiple snapshot jobs fail with code 156 or 1541.

Multiple snapshot jobs that were started at a high frequency fail with code 156 or
1541.
These errors may occur in a situation when an administrator manually (or by using
a script), starts multiple snapshot jobs at a high frequency. (For example, one
snapshot job every 5 seconds.)
At the same time, multiple rotation processes begin. The processes operate on the
same catalog information, which includes information about existing snapshots.
Because the processes work on the same information at the same time, a problem
of inconsistency can occur. Some of the processes delete the snapshots and update
the catalog while other processes continue to refer to the obsolete information. The
result is that the snapshot jobs can end with status codes 156 (snapshot error
encountered), 1541 (snapshot creation failed), or other unpredictable errors.
This behavior does not occur for scheduled snapshot jobs, as NetBackup controls
the job execution.

FlashBackup policy fails, with multiple backup

selections [Cache =]
A FlashBackup policy created with the VxFS_Snapshot fails when multiple backup
selections are specified in the same policy.
 Troubleshooting 284
Partial backup failure with 'Snapshot encountered error 156'

The VxFS_Snapshot can be used to backup a single file system only. If multiple
file systems are backed up using the same policy, the backup fails.
Make sure that you create a separate policy for each file system.

Partial backup failure with 'Snapshot encountered

error 156'
There can be a partial backup failure when the NetBackup client and the alternate
client that are specified in the policy are located on the same host. The off-host
backup functionality ideally shifts the load of backup processing onto an alternate
client. The alternate client sends the client’s data to the storage device.
When both the client and alternate client are on the same host, the off-host backup
purpose is lost. The client load is increases and backups fail.

Note: The client and the alternate client on the same host is not supported.

Backup of file system validation fails with error

223
A Hitachi hardware snapshot backup fails with status 223 and error message
‘Snapshot could not be created with ShadowImage method’.
Check the Storage Foundation version, it must be 5.0MP3 RP3 HF9 or later. The
Red Hat Linux 4 platform supports only 5.0MP3 RP3 HF9 or later versions.

Policy validation fails if the specified CIFS share

path contains a forward slash
Policy validation fails when CIFS share the path specified in backup selection fails
as Snapshot Manager backup does not support the path that contains a forward
slash. For example, the path \\NASFiler1/dataShare1 for OST_FIM and
C:\backup/testdir for VSS FIM are not supported.

Veritas recommends that you use the back slash when you specify the backup
selection. For example, \\NASFiler1\dataShare1 and C:\backup\testdir are
valid paths.
 Troubleshooting 285
Policy validation fails with status code 223

Policy validation fails with status code 223

Policy validation fails with status code 223, and displays the error message An
invalid entry was encountered.
For NASDP policy, NetBackup does not support spaces in name of the NAS Array
Head. If the name of NAS Array Head contains spaces, then policy validation would
fail with this error.
Avoid spaces in the NAS Array Head name.

An NDMP snapshot policy for wildcard backup

fails with error 4201
An NDMP policy for wildcard backup fails when the policy is run after the image
expires. In this scenario, the policy has a specific retention period after which the
image expires. If a backup is taken immediately after the specified retention period
the backup automatically fails. The backup fails due to the conflict in snapshot
creation as the DFM server takes some time to delete the existing snapshot-related
information.
For a successful backup, run the backup job after some time.

Troubleshooting with bpfis log

The NetBackup bpfis log is a good source of troubleshooting information.
See “UNIX logging directories for backup” on page 260.
See “Windows logging folders for backup” on page 262.

Limitations of using HP-UX 11.31

HP-UX 11.31 does allow a new device to be present on the same SCSI path on
which different device was visible to the host. During the snapshot process, when
the old snapshot is deleted and a new snapshot is created, the new snapshot
appears on the same SCSI path as the older snapshot. That causes a conflict within
the HP-UX system and it logs an error message.
During a snapshot with NetBackup installed on a computer that has HP-UX 11iv3
installed, the Syslog error messages are similar to the following:

class : lunpath, instance 15

Evpd inquiry page 83h/80h failed or the current page 83h/80h
 Troubleshooting 286
While configuring a policy for snapshot operations, the NetBackup Administration Console hangs

data do not match the previous known page 83h/80h data on

LUN id 0x0 probed beneath the target path (class = tgtpath,
instance = 4) The lun path is (class = lunpath, instance 15).
Run 'scsimgr replace_wwid' command to validate the change
class : lunpath, instance 15
Evpd inquiry page 83h/80h failed or the current page 83h/80h
data do not match the previous known page 83h/80h data on
LUN id 0x0 probed beneath the target path (class = tgtpath,
instance = 4) The lun path is (class = lunpath, instance 15).
Run 'scsimgr replace_wwid' command to validate the change
class : lunpath, instance 15
An attempt to probe existing LUN id 0x4007000000000000 failed
with errno of 14.
0/3/1/0.0x50001fe150070028.0x4007000000000000 eslpt
0/3/1/0.1.27.0.0.0.7 sdisk
64000/0xfa00/0x69 esdisk

The administrators of the HP-UX 11iv3 host machines should ignore the log
messages if they encounter them during backups with NetBackup.

While configuring a policy for snapshot

operations, the NetBackup Administration
Console hangs
For on-premises devices, while configuring a policy for snapshot operations, the
NetBackup Administration Console hangs.
This issue might arise if the source devices are not responsive or are in a hung
state.

Accelerator enabled incremental backup of

NetApp NAS volume
Accelerator enabled NAS-Data-Protection policy backups complete volume instead
of only the incremental data. This also affects the run optimization.
This issue occurs under the following conditions:
■ The policy type is NAS-Data-Protection.
■ In the policy’s Snapshot options, the value of Access Protocol is Default or
NFS3.
 Troubleshooting 287
Snapshot method: Auto

■ Backup selection has NetApp NAS volumes.

The Accelerator technology optimizes a backup by sending only changed blocks
over a network for backup. A two-step process is used to identify the changed files
and changed blocks in these files. File attributes and index node (inode) are the
key parameters to identify a change. If the files are accessed over NFS version 3,
a file on NetApp NAS volume behaves different because of the inode numbers.
Same file has different inode numbers across snapshots of the volume if accessed
over NFS3. All schedules of backup are based on the snapshot that is created for
the run of the policy. A new snapshot with different inode numbers than the previous
ones makes accelerator to identify these files as new files. Because of this issue,
all files are backed up instead of incremental data only.
To resolve this issue, avoid using NFS version 3 to access the snapshot for
accelerator-enabled backups. You can change the Access Protocol to NFS4 for
the affected policy. For more details, refer to the NetApp documentation.

Snapshot method: Auto

Error scenario 1: Policy validation fails, after a primary server upgrade, if you create
a policy with VSO FIM for older clients and select Snapshot Method as Auto in the
NetBackup 10.0 UI.
Error scenario 2: Snapshot jobs fail, if you configure DNAS policy with backup host
pool containing older version backup hosts and select Snapshot Method as Auto
in the NetBackup 10.0 UI.
The Snapshot Method, Auto is supported only in NetBackup 10.0 onwards. If your
environment contains older version backup hosts, select another snapshot method.
 Appendix A
Managing nbu_snap
(Solaris)
This appendix includes the following topics:

■ About managing nbu_snap

About managing nbu_snap

This topic describes commands for managing snapshots that were made with the
nbu_snap method. This topic applies to Solaris systems only.

Cache for nbu_snap

NetBackup uses the nbu_snap method to create a copy-on-write snapshot in the
following circumstances (Solaris systems only):
■ If the nbu_snap method is configured for the back up on the Snapshot Options
dialog.
■ If NetBackup’s auto-selection mechanism chose the nbu_snap method when
the backup was initiated.
■ If the client is in a FlashBackup policy and no snapshot method is configured
(Perform snapshot backups on the Policy display is not selected).
In all cases, a raw partition must be specified as cache for the snapshot. Any number
of concurrent nbu_snap backups can use the same cache. However, the cache
must be large enough to hold copies of all file system blocks that were changed by
user activity while the snapshots were active.
In the NetBackup Administration Console, the raw partition cache can be specified
in any of three places.
 Managing nbu_snap (Solaris) 289
About managing nbu_snap

See “Entering the cache” on page 129.

About determining cache size

The required size of the cache partition depends on how much user write activity
occurs while the snapshot is active. The required cache size does not depend on
the size of the file system. The more user activity, the larger the cache must be.
You can use the snaplist and snapcachelist commands to determine the required
size of the cache.
See “Determining a size for the cache partition” on page 127.
If a cache is too small and overflows, all snapshots using the cache become
unreadable and the backups that read the snapshots fail.

About terminating nbu_snap

NetBackup ordinarily removes snapshots after the Snapshot Manager backup
completes. However, as a result of some system failures, such as a system crash
or abnormal backup termination, the snapshot may not have been removed.
Use the snapoff command to terminate an nbu_snap snapshot that the backup
job did not terminate.
See “snapoff command” on page 292.
See “Identifying and removing a left-over snapshot” on page 270.

nbu_snap commands
The following commands relate to the nbu_snap snapshot method.

snapon command
snapon starts an nbu_snap snapshot (copy-on-write).
Execute this command as root:

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/driver/snapon snapshot_source cache

where:
■ snapshot_source is the partition on which the client’s file system (the file system
to be "snapped") is mounted
■ cache is the raw partition to be used as copy-on-write cache.
Example 1:
 Managing nbu_snap (Solaris) 290
About managing nbu_snap

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/driver/snapon /var /dev/rdsk/c2t0d0s3

Example 2:

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/driver/snapon /dev/vx/rdsk/omo/tcp1
/dev/vx/rdsk/omo/sncache

The snapshot is created on disk, and remains active until it is removed with the
snapoff command or the system is restarted.

snaplist command
snaplist shows the amount of client write activity that occurred during an nbu_snap
snapshot. Information is displayed for all snapshots that are currently active.
Execute this command as root:

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/driver/snaplist

Information is displayed in the following form:

id ident size cached minblk err time

9 6730 2097152 2560 0 0 05/29/03 07:52:18
device = /dev/vx/rdsk/omaha/tcp1
cache = /dev/vx/rdsk/omaha/sncache
16 7857 2097152 128 0 0 05/29/03 12:16:00
device = /dev/vx/rdsk/omaha/vol01
cache = /dev/vx/rdsk/omaha/sncache
17 7908 20971520 4224 0 0 05/29/03 12:17:38
device = /dev/vx/rdsk/omaha/vol03
cache = /dev/vx/rdsk/zetab/cache

If no snapshots are currently active, no output is returned.

Description of output:

id The snapshot ID. The snapoff command uses this ID to terminate

the snapshot.

ident A unique numeric identifier of the snapshot. ident is the pid of the
process that created the snapshot.
 Managing nbu_snap (Solaris) 291
About managing nbu_snap

size The size of the client’s snapshot source in 512-byte blocks. The
snapshot source is the partition on which the client’s file system (the
file system being backed up) is mounted.
Note: size is not a reliable guide to the size of the cache that is
needed for the snapshot. The user write activity during the snapshot is
what determines the size of the cache needed. See the cached column
of this output.

cached The number of 512-byte blocks in the client file system that were
changed by user activity while the snapshot was active. Before being
changed, these blocks were copied to the cache partition. The more
blocks that are cached as a result of user activity, the larger the cache
partition required. However, additional overhead—which is not shown
in this cached value—is required in the cache. To see the total space
that is used in a particular cache partition, use the snapcachelist
command.

minblk In the partition on which the file system is mounted, minblk shows:
the lowest numbered block that is monitored for write activity while the
snapshot is active. Only FlashBackup policies use minblk.

err An error code; 0 indicates no error. If a snapshot has encountered an

error, the err is non-zero and the snapshot is inaccessible. It can be
terminated using snapoff and the snapshot ID. Error codes are
identified in /usr/include/sys/errno.h. Also, error messages
may be found in /var/adm/messages.

time The time at which the snapshot was started.

device The raw partition containing the client’s file system data to back up
(snapshot source).

cache The raw partition used as cache by the copy-on-write snapshot process.
Make sure that this partition is large enough to store all the blocks likely
to be changed by user activity during the backup.

To determine the total space that is used in a particular cache partition

by all active snapshots, use the snapcachelist command.

snapcachelist command
snapcachelist displays information about all partitions currently in use as nbu_snap
caches. This command shows the extent to which the caches are full.
 Managing nbu_snap (Solaris) 292
About managing nbu_snap

Note: snaplist and snapcachelist can also be used to monitor an nbu_snap snapshot
that a NetBackup policy started. Note that once the backup completes, NetBackup
removes the snapshot. As a result, the snaplist and snapcachelist commands no
longer return any output.

Execute this command as root:

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/driver/snapcachelist

If no snapshots are currently active, no output is returned.

Output is of the form:

device free busy

/dev/rdsk/c0t4d0s0 238528 264472

Description of output:

device The raw partition being used as cache.

free The number of 512-byte blocks unused in the cache partition.

busy The number of 512-byte blocks in the client data that changed while
the snapshot was active. Before being changed, these blocks were
copied to the cache partition by the nbu_snap copy-on-write process.
For each cache device that is listed, busy shows the total space that
was used in the cache.

You can use this value as a sizing guide when setting up raw partitions
for nbu_snap cache. When a cache is full, any additional change to the
client data causes the copy-on-write to fail: the snapshot is no longer
readable or writable. Reads or writes to the client data continue (that
is, user activity is unaffected). The failed snapshot, however, is not
terminated automatically and must be terminated using snapoff.

snapstat command
snapstat displays diagnostic information about the snap driver.
Execute this command as root:

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/driver/snapstat

snapoff command
snapoff terminates an nbu_snap snapshot.
Execute this command as root:
 Managing nbu_snap (Solaris) 293
About managing nbu_snap

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/driver/snapoff snap1 ...snapn

where snapx is the numeric id of each copy-on-write process to be terminated. (Use

snaplist to display the id of active snapshots.)

If snapoff is successful, a message of the following form is displayed:

snapshot 1 disabled
snapshot 2 disabled
...
snapshot n disabled

If snapoff fails, an explanatory message is displayed. Error codes are identified in

/usr/include/sys/errno.h.

Warning: Do not terminate a snapshot while the backup is active: corruption of the
backup image may result.
 Appendix B
Overview of snapshot
operations
This appendix includes the following topics:

■ Introduction to snapshot operations

■ Pre and post snapshot creation operations

■ About quiescing the system

■ About quiescing the database application

■ About quiescing the stack

■ File system quiesce

■ Volume manager data caching

■ How copy-on-write works

Introduction to snapshot operations

This topic presents background information on snapshot operations and
copy-on-write snapshots.
Before a snapshot is created, there are certain operations that NetBackup performs
as a part of the pre- and post snapshot creation process. The snapshots that are
created after these operations contain authentic data. Copy-on-write (COW) is a
snapshot type that gives a detailed account of data as it existed at a certain moment.
For a diagram of the daemons or services involved in creating and backing up a
snapshot, refer to the NetBackup Troubleshooting Guide.
 Overview of snapshot operations 295
Pre and post snapshot creation operations

Pre and post snapshot creation operations

NetBackup performs several vital functions before snapshot creation. Without the
pre-processing, the integrity of the snapshot cannot be guaranteed and the backup
data may be of no value.

Table B-1 Pre and post snapshot creation operations

Step Action

Step 1 Backup process requests database quiesce.

Step 2 Database application quiesces (must wait for transactions to complete).

Step 3 Lock and flush the file system.

Step 4 Create the snapshot.

Step 5 Unlock the file system.

Step 6 Release (unquiesce) the application.

Step 7 Back up the snapshot.

Step 8 (Optional:) Remove the snapshot.

Note: Steps 1, 2, and 6 in Table B-1 apply only to databases, such as those requiring
NetBackup for Oracle.

About quiescing the system

Before a useful snapshot can be created, the data to back up must be transactionally
consistent or complete. A transaction is a single data action, such as updating a
patient’s record in a medical database, or creating a record for a new patient. Such
a transaction is composed of multiple I/O requests (search, copy, send, write, and
so forth). Until the transaction’s I/O requests are complete, the data is inconsistent
and may be unsuitable for backup.
Transactions affect all levels of the storage management stack (file system, volume
manager, and so forth). A transaction generates further transactions as a request
is handed off to the next level of the stack. For instance, in the file system, an I/O
request from a database application constitutes a transaction and may be split into
many disk references. All these disk references must be complete for the original
request to be fulfilled. Thus, the creation of the snapshot must be coordinated with
any application or process that can affect the transactional consistency of the data.
 Overview of snapshot operations 296
About quiescing the database application

The means of coordination is called quiesce (literally, to make quiet or place in

repose). Quiesce involves pausing the database application or process until the
data is transactionally consistent. Applications and the storage management stack
must all be quiesced before a useful snapshot can be made.

About quiescing the database application

Most database applications are transactionally consistent only at particular points
in time. Sometimes, they are consistent only after they have been shut down. Since
many database applications must be available constantly, many applications can
reach transactional consistency at regular intervals or in response to an external
event. This process is called application quiesce, described in this section.
In database application quiesce, an external signal or message is sent to a receptive
database. In response, the database finishes the current transaction or group of
transactions and tells the snapshot consumer when the transactions are complete.
The database then waits for the indication that normal operations can resume. After
the database indicates that it has reached a state of transactional consistency, the
final steps of creating the snapshot can proceed.
Once the snapshot has been created, another signal is sent to the waiting database
to resume normal operations. This procedure is called unquiescing the application.

Figure B-1 Dialog for quiesce or unquiesce

Database Application Snapshot Consumer (NetBackup)
1 Quiesce.

2 Finish transactions.

3 Quiesce acknowledge.
4 Quiesce stack,
... In quiesce mode .... trigger snapshot.

5 Unquiesce.
6 Out of quiesce mode.
Continue processing.
 Overview of snapshot operations 297
About quiescing the stack

About quiescing the stack

The storage management stack is a layered arrangement of software elements.
An I/O request from a database application passes from element to element until
a hardware request to move data reaches the storage network. Each stack element
performs a variety of functions, some of which treat I/O requests like transactions
to assure their completion. Before a snapshot is created, the stack must be quiesced
(made transactionally consistent).
Since the file system is the front-line interface to applications for managing files
and I/O, file system quiesce is critical to quiescing the stack.

File system quiesce

Quiescing the file system consists of two major tasks as listed in the following points:
■ Prohibit new I/O requests from initiating, which is called locking the file system.
■ Flush file system cache (write cached data back to disk). The system must
complete any outstanding application I/O and note completion of outstanding
metadata updates.

Volume manager data caching

As in a file system, the volume manager’s data caching may have to be flushed
and disabled until the snapshot is created. If volume manager caching is enabled,
data that is required for a consistent image may linger in volume manager cache
rather than residing on disk when the snapshot is created.

How copy-on-write works

A copy-on-write snapshot is a detailed account of data as it existed at a certain
moment. Unlike a mirror, a copy-on-write is not a copy of the data, but a specialized
account of it.
The copy-on-write process works as follows: when a snapshot is required, any
unfinished transactions or changes to the source data are allowed to complete, but
new changes are temporarily stalled. The source is momentarily idled (made
quiescent). Once the copy-on-write is activated, new transactions or changes (writes)
to the source data are allowed to take place. However, the copy-on-write process
briefly intercepts or holds the first write request that is issued for any particular block
of data. While it holds those requests, it copies to cache the blocks affected by
those writes, and keeps a record of the cached blocks. In other words, it reads each
 Overview of snapshot operations 298
How copy-on-write works

source block that is about to change for the first time. Then it copies the block’s
current data to cache, and records the location and identity of the cached blocks.
Then the intercepted writes are allowed to take place in the source blocks.
Figure B-2 shows the copy-on-write process.

Figure B-2 Copy-on-write process

Phase 1
s0 s1 s2 s3 s4 s5 s6 s7 s8 s9 s10
Source data

Phase 2
s0 s1 s2 s3 s4 s5 s6 s7 s8 s9 s10
Writes delayed

Result of copy-on-write process

Phase 3 c0 c1 c2 c3 c4
.
Cache

Record of cached blocks:

Phase 4 s4 = c0
s7 = c1
s8 = c2

Phase 5

s0 s1 s2 s3 s4 s5 s6 s7 s8 s9 s10

Source data, which is modified after copy-on-write process

The following table lists the phases that have been depicted in the diagram:

Phase Action

Phase 1 Image of source data is frozen; copy-on-write is activated.

Phase 2 New write requests to s4, s7, s8 are held by copy-on-write process (see
arrows).
 Overview of snapshot operations 299
How copy-on-write works

Phase Action

Phase 3 Copy-on-write process writes contents of blocks s4, s7, and s8 to cache.
These blocks write to cache only once, no matter how many times they
change in the source during the snapshot.

Phase 4 Copy-on-write process keeps a record of the number of writes to cache.

Phase 5 Write requests are now allowed to take place.

The immediate results of the copy-on-write are the following: a cached copy of the
source blocks that were about to change (phase 3), and a record of where those
cached blocks are stored (phase 4).
The copy-on-write does not produce a copy of the source. It creates cached copies
of the blocks that have changed and a record of their location. The backup process
refers to the source data or cached data as directed by the copy-on-write process.
Figure B-3 shows the process for backing up a copy-on-write snapshot.
 Overview of snapshot operations 300
How copy-on-write works

Figure B-3 Backing up a copy-on-write

Backup of copy-on- Source data, which is modified after copy-on-write

write snapshot: Source process

Phase 1 s0 s1 s2 s3 s4 s5 s6 s7 s8 s9 s10

Cache

Phase 2 c0 c1 c2 c3 s4

Phase 3 s0 s1 s2 s3 s4 s5 s6 s7 s8 s9 s10

Cache

Phase 4 c0 c1 c2 c3 s4

Phase 5 Backup continues reading source or cache, as directed by copy-

on-write.
Backup image

Phase 6 s0 s1 s2 s3 s4 s5 s6 s7 s8 s9 s10

The following table lists the phases that have been depicted in the diagram:

Phase Action

Phase 1 Backup reads source data from s0, s1, s2, s3

Phase 2 At s4, copy-on-write tells backup to read c0 instead of s4

Phase 3 Next, the backup reads s5 and s6 from the source.

Phase 4 At s7 and s8, copy-on-write tells backup to read c1, c2 instead of s7,
s8.

Phase 5 Backup continues reading of the source or cache, as directed by

copy-on-write.

Phase 6 When backup completes, backup data is identical to original source.

 Overview of snapshot operations 301
How copy-on-write works

As this diagram shows, an accurate backup image is obtained by combining the

unchanged portions of the data with the cache. When a backup of the snapshot
begins, the backup application copies the source data (phase 1) until it encounters
a block that changed after the copy-on-write process started. The copy-on-write
tells the backup to skip that changed block and read in its place the cached (original)
copy (phase 2). The backup application continues copying source data (phase 3)
until it comes to another changed block. Cache is read again (phase 4) as the
copy-on-write process dictates. The backup, when finished, is an exact copy of the
source as it existed the moment the copy-on-write was activated.
 Index

Symbols B
156 status code 266 Backup
3pc.conf file 43 Archive
Restore 237
A backup
agent 19, 38
abnormal termination 270, 289
automatic 229
access time not updated 76
local 24, 33
activate block-level restore 233
logs 260, 262
Active Directory 87, 142
manual 230
and FlashBackup 87
off-host
actual device file name 91–92
configuration 53, 55
Administrator account and NAS_Snapshot 82
prerequisites 226
AIX
raw partition 54, 227
and VxFS 44
retention period
media servers, restrictions 38
NAS_Snapshot 140
ALL_LOCAL_DRIVES entry 36, 53, 111, 227
scripts 69
Allow multiple data streams 75
techniques (overview) 21
alternate client
types supported 91
defined 38
user-directed 230
Alternate client backup
backup agent 55
configuring 71
backup retention level 108
alternate client backup 19, 26, 56, 90
Backup Selections list 53
and FlashSnap 135
ALL_LOCAL_DRIVES entry 36, 53, 111, 227
and split mirror 28
and Instant Recovery 111
and VVR 138
block vs. character device 227
introduction 27
directives 95
requirements 71
FlashBackup 92
restrictions 71
symbolic link 75
testing setup 135, 139, 141
BLIB 50
Any_available storage unit 57
block device file (vs character) 227
APP_NBU_VVR 139
block level incremental backup 50
arbitrated loop 39
block-level restore 232–233
archive bit
how to activate 233
incremental backup 71
restriction 233
archives 230
bp.conf file 260
auto option (Provider Type for VSS) 66
bpbkar
auto snapshot selection 57, 60, 72, 109
log 260
automatic backup 229
process 269
bpbrm log 260–261
bpdgclone command 277
 Index 303

bpfis configuration (continued)

command 248, 251, 270 supported data types 87
log 260 Configure snashot policy 50
bppfi log on client 260 copy manager (see third-party copy) 42
bprd log 261 copy-on-write
bprestore log 261 defined 39
bptm log 260–261 overview 22, 297
BusinessCopy method 267 cp command 247
credentials
C disk array
rollback and VSS 159
cache 63
cross mount points (disabled) 75
definition of 39
customer support 265
flushing for quiesce 297
CVM
object 115, 133
about support for 143
overflow 289
enabling vxvm or FlashSnap snapshots in 144
partition 95
execute VxVM commands remotely 145
partition out of space 268
requirements 126
size 289 D
specifying raw partition for 126 data change object 115
CACHE= directive 93, 95, 129 data consistency (quiesce) 295
Change Policy dialog 59, 70 data mover 43
character device file (vs block) 126, 227 Network Attached Storage 56
checking logs 259 data mover (see third-party copy) 42
checkpoint Database Edition for Oracle 35
removing (VxFS) 272 database files (Windows) 88, 142
VxFS file system 130 DB2 101
CLARiiON DCO plexes 136
fractured (split) clone after rollback 211 deleting
client data a clone 275
prerequisites for off-host backup 226 snapshots 107
client list 92 deport
client read timeout 228 disk group 135, 137
clone snapshot 249, 252
fractured (split) after rollback 211 device
removing 272, 275 serialization 38, 227, 267
VxVM disk group 275 Device Configuration wizard 49
clone group (CLARiiON) 170 device file name (FlashBackup) 92
clone private LUNs (CLARiiON) 170 differential option (Snapshot Attribute for VSS) 67
Cluster Volume Manager. See CVM directives
CommandCentral 57 for scripts 69
compression 50 directives (Backup Selections list) 95
configuration directories for troubleshooting 259
auto method 57 disabling snapshots 77
backup selections 92 disk
client list 92 restoring snapshot from 247
prerequisites 49 SCSI vs. IDE 266
procedure 51, 58, 109 visibility 266
snapshot parameters 63
 Index 304

disk array methods EMC Symmetrix 177

EMC CLARiiON arrays 163 configuring NetBackup clients 179
EMC disk groups for VSS differential software requirements 177
snapshots 160 Solutions Enabler 177, 179
Hitachi 201 EMC TimeFinder Snap 160
HP EVA 185 test 163
HP-XP 206 EMC_CLARiiON_SnapView_Clone 169
IBM DS4000 196 EMC_CLARiiON_SnapView_Snapshot 174
IBM DS6000 and DS8000 190 reserved LUN pool 175
troubleshooting 209 EMC_TimeFinder_Clone 182
verify NetBackup access to arrays 157 and rollback 182, 236
verify that VSS can make a snapshot 161 EMC_TimeFinder_Mirror 181
disk array snapshot methods EMC_TimeFinder_Snap 183
about 146 encryption 50
advantages 148 exceptions to exclude list 88
dynamic multipathing 155 exclude list 88, 92
HBAs 155 Extended Copy command 19, 26, 42, 56
Instant Recovery 149 extent
list of 150 defined 39
notes on 149
OS-specific configuration 155 F
persistent target bindings 155
Fast File Resync (in Storage Foundation for Windows
Solaris sd.conf 156
4.1) 110, 232, 235
tasks for admin 152
fast mirror resynch 134
types 148
FastResync 39, 41, 110, 136
use in clusters 149
FFR (Fast File Resync) 110, 232, 235
disk arrays
Fibre Channel
and point in time rollback 237
defined 39
disk group
types supported 39
clone 275
file pathname (max length) 53, 74
shared in VxVM 126, 135
file promotion 20, 232–233, 235
disk layout for Storage Checkpoint 102
file system
disk restore
multi-volume 36, 130, 133
caution 250
file systems
disk snapshot
defined 40
restoring from 246–247
quiescing 297
disk storage units 57, 227
files list (see Backup Selections list) 53
DLL patch for VxFS 36
FlashBackup 288
DSCLI 191
actual device name 92
duplex mode and performance 266
and VxFS_Checkpoint 130
backup selections 92
E device file name 91
EMC CLARiiON features 86
configure NetBackup policy for 176 files to back up 91–92
device identifier 173 restoring 230
EMC CLARiiON arrays 163 FlashSnap method 36, 60, 110, 235
EMC CLARiiON clone group 170 and status 156 266
EMC CLARiiON software requirements 164 deporting the disk 135
EMC CLARiiON storage group 168 preparing for alternate client backup 135
 Index 305

FlashSnap method (continued) HP_XP_BusinessCopy

restoring from disk image 249, 252 configuring a NetBackup policy 208
with VxVM shared disk group 135 HP_XP_Snapshot
flush file system 297 configuring a NetBackup policy 208
FORCE_RESTORE_MEDIA_SERVER option 245
fsck (after raw partition restore of vxfs system) 231 I
fsckptadm command 41, 272
I/O components
full-sized instant snapshot 62
supported 87
full-sized instant snapshots 116, 134–135
IBC messages 139
IBC send/receive timeout (seconds) 64
G IBM DS4000 disk array 196
gatekeeper devices 179–180 configure a NetBackup policy for 200
GID 71 configure for NetBackup 199
glossary of terms 38 nbfirescan 198
group of storage units 57 SMclient 197
software requirements 197
H verify NetBackup client access to 198
IBM DS6000 and DS8000 disk arrays 190
hardware option (Provider Type for VSS) 67
configure array for NetBackup 192
hardware-level disk restore 250
configure NetBackup policy for 195
Hitachi disk arrays 201
IBM_DiskStorage_FlashCopy 195
configure NetBackup for 202
software requirements 190
configuring a NetBackup policy for 204
IBM_DiskStorage_FlashCopy 195
nbfirescan 202
IBM_StorageManager_FlashCopy 196
obtain identifiers 203
configure a NetBackup policy for 200
pair status 202
IDE vs. SCSI 266
RAID Manager version 201
identification descriptor 57
software requirements 201
importing disk group 137–138
Hitachi_CopyOnWrite
include list 92
configuring a NetBackup policy for 204
incremental backup
Hitachi_ShadowImage
archive bit and timestamp 71
configuring a NetBackup policy for 204
Inline Tape Copies (Vault) 38
HOMRCF 151
inquiry page code 83 38, 227, 267
HP 95
Instant Recovery 21
HP EVA
and HP EVA snapshot methods 151
configure NetBackup policy for 189
defined 40
software requirements 186
deleting snapshots 107
VDisk 190
disk array snapshot methods 149
VSnaps 190
Fast File Resync 110, 232, 235
HP EVA disk arrays 185
Schedule tab 111
HP-XP disk arrays 206
selecting in policy 109
configure NetBackup 207
snapshot only 109
nbfirescan 207
Snapshot Resources pane 107
obtain identifiers 207
volume name restriction 102, 114, 133
pair status 206
instant snapshots 62, 115–116, 133–134
software requirements 206
HP_XP disk arrays
configuring a NetBackup policy 208 J
jbpSA 237
 Index 306

K mirror (continued)
Keep snapshot after backup 64, 270 fast resynch 134
restoring from image 246–247 overview 22
kernel messages 261 preparing 114
rotation 106
VxVM snapshot 41, 133
L mklogdir script 260
left over snapshot 270, 289 mklogdir.bat 261
Limit jobs per policy 75 modprobe.conf file (Linux) 157
limitations 36 mover.conf file 43
links (in Backup Selections list) 75 and AIX 38
Linux multi-volume system (VxFS) 36, 130, 133
and VxFS 44 Multiple Copies (Vault) 38
Local Host multiple data streams 75
network configuration for 33 configuring 75
local host backup method multiplexing 38, 227
network configuration for 24 MVS 36, 130, 133
local system account 82
lock file system 297
logging N
directories to create 259 NAS
VxMS 263 off-host backup 26
logical volume (as raw partition) 126 NAS filer
logs 259–262 as backup agent 56
creating for UNIX 260 NAS_Snapshot 21, 110–111, 140, 232
creating for Windows 261 access for NetBackup 82
loop (Fibre Channel) 39 backup retention period 140
ls command 41 licensing 81
LVM 87 logging info 260, 262
name 85
notes
M requirements 81
manual backup 230 NAS_Snapshot method 60
mapping naviseccli 166, 173
defined 40 Navisphere 164
Maximum jobs per client 76 nbfirescan 157
Maximum multiplexing per drive 76 NBU_CACHE 115
maximum pathname length 53, 74 nbu_snap method 61, 125, 288
Maximum Snapshots (Instant Recovery only) 65, 108, with VxVM shared disk group 126
117, 140 NDMP 21
Media multiplexing 75 access web info 43
media server (see NetBackup Media Server) 55–56 licensing 81
messages file 261 NDMP host
method as backup agent 56
selecting off-host backup 53, 55 NDMP protocol version 82
selecting snapshot 59 NDMP snapshot 140
mirror 22 ndmp unified log (VxUL) 260, 262
access time 76 NDMP V4 110
compared to copy-on-write 24 NetBackup Client Service 82
defined 40
 Index 307

NetBackup Media Server 26, 40 PFI_BLI_RESTORE file (for block-level restore) 233
and storage units 57, 227 physical device (as raw partition) 126
network diagram of 34 platform requirements 35
selecting 55–56 platforms supported 44
NetBackup Replication Director 16 plex option (Snapshot Attribute for VSS) 67
Network Attached Storage 26 point-in-time snapshots 21
Network Attached Storage (data mover) 56 policy
network interface cards 266 for NAS snapshot 83
NEW_STREAM directive 95 how to select type of 51
NIC cards and full duplex 266 storage unit 57
no-data Storage Checkpoint 102 Policy dialog 51, 89
policy_name (on mover.conf file) 267
O primary vs. alternate client 27
promotion
off-host backup 53, 55
file 20, 233, 235
and multiplexing 227
provider 18, 266
NAS 26
Provider Type (for VSS) 66
overview 25
prerequisites for 226
raw partition 227 Q
type of disk (SCSI vs. IDE) 266 query snapshot 248, 251, 270
with data mover 43 quiesce 295, 298
Open File Backup
disabling 77 R
license 43
RAID 5 133
operating system
raw partition 92, 95
patches 35
as snapshot source 75
Oracle 36
backup 54
OST_FIM method 61
block vs. character device 227
overview of snapshot operations 294
defined 40
overwriting
not supported with VxFS_Checkpoint 130
raw partition restores 231
restore 230
fsck needed after vxfs restore 231
P specifying for cache 126
page code 83 38, 227, 267 recovery procedure 270, 289
pairresync command 273 Registry 87, 142
pairsplit (Hitachi) 202 and FlashBackup 87
pairsplit (HP-XP) 206 remote snapshot (see alternate client backup) 27
parameters for snapshots 63 removing
partitions clone 275
Windows 87 snapshots 270, 289
patch for VxFS 36 replicated host 32
patches 35, 266 replication
pathname length 53, 74 for alternate client backup 138
Perform block level incremental backups 50 testing setup for alternate client backup 139
Perform snapshot backups 288 Replication Director 26, 35, 61, 268
performance requirements for NetBackup 35
increasing tape 267 restore 230
peripherals (latest info on web) 43 and fsck 231
 Index 308

restore (continued) shared disk group (VxVM) 126, 135

block-level restore 233 SIZE_DATA_BUFFERS 267
configurations 244 snap
FFR with vxvm or FlashSnap 110, 232, 235 removing 271
file promotion 20, 233, 235 snapcachelist command 291
from disk image 246–247 snapctl 87
from EMC_TimeFinder_Clone 182, 236 driver log 261
from FlashBackup 230 overview 288
hardware-level 250 snaplist command 271, 290
logs 261–262 snapoff command 271, 292
NAS_Snapshot 82 snapon command 289
Oracle files 233 snapshot 21
overwrite option 231 auto selection 57, 60, 72, 109
raw partitions 230 back up to local storage 24
re. device file 231 backup to local storage 33
Restore everything to its original location 239, 243 configuration 58, 109
restrictions 36, 87 controlling rotation 107
resyncfromreplica option 249, 252 copy-on-write vs mirror (how to choose) 24
resynchronization of mirror 134 defined 41
resynchronize deleting 107
disks 273 disabling 77
Resynchronize mirror in background 67 ID 248, 251, 270
retention level for backup 108 instant 115
RMAN 41 mirror
rollback 232, 236 defined 22
and clone creation 182, 236 mirror (creating) 136–137
causes fractured (split) clone 211 mirror (VxVM) 41, 133
VSS and disk array credentials 159 mirror access time 76
root naming format
specifying as snapshot source 75 NAS snapshot 85
rotation 106 on Solaris client
of snapshots 107 troubleshooting 269
RSM Database 88, 142 overview 21
pre-processing for 295
S removing 270, 289
restoring from disk 247–248, 251
SAN 36, 226
rotation 106
defined 41
selecting method of 59
Schedule tab
source
Instant Recovery 111
defined 41
scripts
for symbolic link 75
running before/after backup 69
state file 47
SCSI E4 target descriptors 57
volume (creating) 136–137
SCSI Inquiry Page Code 83 38, 227, 267
VxVM instant 62
SCSI serialization 38, 227, 267
Snapshot Attribute (for VSS) 67
SCSI vs. IDE 266
Snapshot Client 21
serial numbers 38, 227, 267
access web info 43
serialization 38, 227, 267
Snapshot Client Options button 58
Shadow Copy Service (see VSS) 73, 140
Snapshot Options dialog 58–59, 72
ShadowImage method 267
 Index 309

snapshot provider 18 system requirements for NetBackup 35

Snapshot Resources pane 107, 176 System State 87, 142
Snapshot Volume system-protected files 142
defined 41 system-protected files and FlashBackup 87
Snapshots only
on Schedule tab 109, 111 T
snapstat command 292
tape
software option (Provider Type for VSS) 66
increasing performance 267
Solaris
Terminal Services Database 88, 142
version requirements 35
termination 270, 289
Solaris sd.conf
terminology 38
disk array methods 156
third-mirror (vxvm) 133
space-optimized snapshots 62, 115, 133–134
third-party copy 26
snapshot methods supported 135
and multiplexing 38, 227
split mirror backup (alternate client) 28
and storage unit 57
SSSU for HP StorageWorks 185
defined 39
stack quiescing 297
device configuration 55, 57
Standard policy
third-party copy device 43
restoring 230
and storage units 57, 227
state file 47
defined 42
status 13
Third-Party Copy Device off-host backup 90
and NetBackup Media Server off-host 228
TimeFinder method 267
status code 156 266
timestamp
STD/BCV mirror pairs
incremental backup 71
EMC_TimeFinder_Mirror 181
tpconfig 82
Storage Checkpoint 35, 87, 110
troubleshooting 259
defined 41
directories to create 259
determining disk usage 41
disk array methods 209
disk layout 102
types of backups supported 91
storage checkpoint 62
storage devices 49
storage unit 57 U
restrictions for data movers 57, 227 UFS file system 42, 61, 125
storage_unit_name version of mover.conf file 267 UID 71
streams umount command 249, 273
allow multiple data 95 UNC for Windows pathnames 84
support web site 43 unified logging 260, 262
supported Universal Naming Convention (UNC) 84
data types 87 unmount
platforms 44 checkpoint 273
switched fabric 39 snapshot 249
symbolic links 75 unquiesce 296
symclone 182 UNSET directive 96–97
symmir 181 UNSET_ALL directive 96–97
symmir command 273 user-directed
symsnap 163 archives 230
synchronize disks 273 backup 230
Synchronize mirror before backup 67
system option (Provider Type for VSS) 66
 Index 310

V VxVM (continued)
VCMDB (Volume Configuration Management mirror 133
Database) 179 preparing for Instant Recovery 114
vendors (latest info on) 43 provider
VERBOSE setting for logs 260 with VSS 66
Veritas Federated Mapping Services 42 required version 60, 71, 132, 151
Veritas Volume Manager 62, 133 shared disk group 126, 135
Veritas Volume Manager cluster. See CVM Volume Manager 36, 133
Veritas Volume Replication 111 volume name restriction 102, 114, 133
virtual machine proxy 55 volume sets 102
VMware 55, 61 vxvm method 62, 110, 132–133, 235
ALL_LOCAL_DRIVES 53, 111 vxvol 115, 133, 136
volume
defined 42 W
sets (VxVM) 102 web access to recent Snapshot Manager info 43
vshadow.exe 161 whatrmver 201
VSS wildcards in Backup Selections list 54
disk array credentials and rollback 159 Windows
VSS method 61, 140 open file backup 43
VVR 36, 111 OS partitions 87
VVR method 32, 62, 139 System database files 88, 142
preparing for alternate client backup 138 Windows Shadow Copy Service 141
vxassist 115–117, 133, 136–137, 271–272
vxassist snapstart 114
vxdg command 114, 136, 138, 249, 252
vxdg list command 277
vxdisk command 249
VxFS clone
removing 272
VxFS file system 35, 61, 87, 125
and AIX
Linux 44
patch for library routines 36
restoring 231
VxFS multi-volume file system 36, 130, 133
VxFS_Checkpoint method 62, 87, 110, 130, 233–234
VxFS_Snapshot method 62, 132
vxibc command 139
vxmake 116
VxMS 40, 42
VxMS logging 263
vxprint 115–116, 271
vxprint command 272
vxrecover command 249
vxsnap 117
VxVM
and RAID 5 133
clone of disk group 275
instant snapshots 62, 116, 134